JP2019063638A - Device for games - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a device for games, capable of improving security by properly storing information particularly important in relation to the security.SOLUTION: A system for games is provided, including a P 2 game machine where games are played by a player and a CU 3 connected to the P 2 game machine and enabling games in the P2 game machine by using a game value which is specified by an accepted storage medium and owned by the player. The CU 3 includes a communication control IC 325a for transmitting security related information. The P2 game machine includes: a payout control storage portion 171c capable of storing a user program, a payout control circuit 171a for reading out the user program and capable of performing the user program read out, and a communication control circuit 171b for receiving the security related information. The payout control circuit 171a does not make a notification of the security related information to the user program but stores the security related information in an own register.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 52

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming apparatus capable of playing a game in a gaming machine using a gaming value owned by a player specified by a recording medium connected to and accepted by a gaming machine where a player plays a game.

  Conventionally, as authentication information for mutual authentication, the SID of the CU communication control unit is stored in the ROM of the CU communication control unit at the chip manufacturing stage, and the SID of the main control unit is stored in the CU communication control unit at the time of CU manufacturing It is known that the control unit downloads and stores the SID of the CU communication control unit from the key management server as authentication information (Patent Document 1).

  There is also known a gaming machine control board configured to monitor, through another control chip, an unauthorized action on a control chip mounted on one gaming machine (Patent Document 2).

JP 2012-100763 A JP 2004-89701 A

  However, among the above-mentioned patent documents, among the information transmitted and received at the time of mutual authentication, the storage method of information which is particularly important for security is not described, and it can not be said that security is sufficiently considered. .

  The present invention has been conceived in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming apparatus capable of further improving security by appropriately storing particularly important information in relation to security. It is to be.

(1) According to the present invention, a game machine (enclosed circulation type pachinko machine (P unit 2), a slot machine without medals (S unit 2S)) in which a game is played by a player, and a record connected to the game machine A gaming system comprising: a gaming device (CU3, a call lamp device, etc.) that enables playing on the gaming machine using a gaming value owned by a player specified by a medium;
The gaming device is
52 includes information transmission means (FIG. 52: communication control IC 325a) for transmitting predetermined information;
The gaming machine is
Storage means capable of storing a user program (FIG. 52: payout control storage unit 171c);
Operation processing unit capable of reading the user program from the storage unit and executing the read user program (FIG. 52: the payout control circuit 171a reads and executes the user program stored in the payout control storage unit 171c) ,
Communication means for receiving the predetermined information (FIG. 52: communication control circuit 171 b);
The arithmetic processing means stores the predetermined information received by the communication means in the storage area of the arithmetic processing means without notifying the user program (the payout control circuit 171a notifies the user program of the predetermined information) Store in the register in the payout control circuit 171a), the game system.

  According to the above configuration, the predetermined information is stored only in the storage area of the arithmetic processing means, and is not notified to the user program and is not stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to improve security because it is possible to prevent the outflow of predetermined information due to access to the storage means.

(2) In the above (1),
The arithmetic processing means uses the predetermined information stored in the storage area to determine whether or not it is possible to return from the incommunicable state (the payout control circuit 171a can not communicate using the “store code”. Whether or not it is possible to recover from the

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to improve security because it is possible to determine whether or not it is possible to recover from the incommunicable state using predetermined information that can prevent the outflow.

(3) In the above (2),
The arithmetic processing means updates or erases the predetermined information stored in the storage area when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the payout control circuit 171a receives a response from the P card 2 as a card insertion response). It updates when transmitting to CU 3. The payout control circuit 171a erases when it is instructed to clear the RAM provided in the P base 2).

  According to the above configuration, the predetermined information stored in the storage area is updated or deleted only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, the predetermined information is not updated or deleted without permission. In addition, since processing from storage of predetermined information to erasure is performed only within the arithmetic processing means, it is possible to prevent outflow to the outside.

(4) In any of the above (1) to (3),
The gaming device is
Counting processing means for counting the gaming points as holding points based on the counting request from the gaming machine which grants predetermined gaming points by occurrence of winning (FIG. 15: state information including information of counting request = ON) When the response is received, it further includes the requested number of balls added to the number of balls).
The gaming machine is
History information storage means for storing counting history information of the counting process executed by the counting process means (FIG. 16: P stage 2 counts from P stage 2 side from counting request ON state to counting request OFF state A history of the number of gaming balls paid out to the CU 3 side as the required number of balls is stored as a counting history.

  According to the above configuration, since the counting history information is stored on the gaming machine side, by referring to the counting history information on the gaming device side at the time of recovery, it is possible to reflect the past counting history on the gaming device it can. In addition, since the counting balls are lost when the gaming machine is out of order when returning the counting balls from the gaming machine to the gaming machine, the counting history is stored on the gaming machine side for maintenance It is also a measure.

(5) In the above (4),
The communication means transmits the counting history information of the counting process for a predetermined number of times stored in the history information storage means based on the counting history request from the gaming device when returning from the incommunicable state. (The communication control circuit 171 b transmits counting histories (counting history 1 and counting history 2) for the past two times to CU 3),
The gaming device is
It further includes history information receiving means (the communication control IC 325a of CU3) for receiving the count history information of the counting process for the predetermined number of times in the past.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to refer to the counting history retroactively up to a predetermined number of times in the past. Thereby, the accuracy of the recovery process can be improved.

(6) In the above (4) or (5),
The predetermined information transmitted by the information transmission means includes store information (store code) and device specifying information (SC board ID) capable of specifying a game control device included in the game device.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to consider the movement of the gaming apparatus to another store, and the change of the combination of the gaming apparatus and the gaming machine in the store. This makes it possible to prevent problems such as taking over count history data between different stores.

(7) In any of the above (4) to (6),
The information transmission means transmits, to the gaming machine, count request reception information (count information ON state information response) indicating reception of the count request and time information (count reception time) at which the count request is received. ,
The history information storage means stores the time information in association with the counting history information corresponding to the counting request (stores the counting reception time in the counting history 1).

  According to the above configuration, since the counting reception time is stored in association with the counting history, it is possible to grasp which counting history corresponds to which counting request.

(8) The present invention corresponds to a recording medium connected to a gaming machine (encapsulated circulation type pachinko machine (P unit 2), a slot machine without medals (S unit 2S)) in which a game is played by a player, and accepted A gaming device (CU3, call lamp device, etc.) that enables playing on the gaming machine using a gaming value owned by a player,
Information transmitting means (FIG. 52: communication control IC 325a) for transmitting predetermined information;
The information transmission means is not notified to the user program executed by the arithmetic processing means (FIG. 52: payout control circuit 171a) of the gaming machine, and is not stored in the storage area (register in the payout control circuit 171a) of the arithmetic processing means. A gaming apparatus which transmits the predetermined information stored therein to the gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, the predetermined information is stored only in the storage area of the arithmetic processing means, and is not notified to the user program and is not stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to improve security because it is possible to prevent the outflow of predetermined information due to access to the storage means.

(9) The present invention corresponds to a received recording medium connected to a gaming machine (encapsulated circulation type pachinko machine (P 2), a slot machine without medals (S 2S)) in which a player plays a game. It is a game control apparatus (FIG. 5: CU control section 323) for controlling a game apparatus (CU 3, call lamp apparatus, etc.) that enables a player to play a game using the game value owned by a player.
Information transmitting means (FIG. 52: communication control IC 325a) for transmitting predetermined information;
The information transmission means is not notified to the user program executed by the arithmetic processing means (FIG. 52: payout control circuit 171a) of the gaming machine, and is not stored in the storage area (register in the payout control circuit 171a) of the arithmetic processing means. A game control apparatus, which transmits the predetermined information stored therein to the game machine.

  According to the above configuration, the predetermined information is stored only in the storage area of the arithmetic processing means, and is not notified to the user program and is not stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to improve security because it is possible to prevent the outflow of predetermined information due to access to the storage means.

It is a front view showing a card unit and a pachinko game machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the glass door and front frame of a pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows a mode before and after a game board is attached to a front frame. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit used for a card unit and a pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the notification process when abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in the card unit side and the pachinko gaming machine side, and its transmission / reception. It is an explanatory view explaining an outline of a command and response transmitted and received between a card unit and a pachinko game machine. It is a figure showing an example of processing with a card unit and a pachinko game machine at the time of power activation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko game machine when a card | curd is inserted in a card unit. It is a flowchart figure showing processing at the time of insertion which a card unit performs, when a card is inserted in a card unit. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating the relationship of the CU state contained in the command of a card insertion notification, the command of a status information request | requirement, and the insertion state of a card | curd. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko game machine at the time of carrying out ball lending from the prepaid balance of the inserted card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko game machine at the time of having carried out ball-bearing delivery and storage-balls dispensing. It is a figure which shows an example of the normal processing of a card unit and a pachinko game machine when counting a game ball. FIG. 17 is a sequence diagram for illustrating counting processing automatically performed when the game arcade is closed. FIG. 6 is a sequence diagram for explaining processing of counting history data stored in P table 2; It is a figure which shows an example of a count process when a player performs card return operation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there is a power-off and communication circuit disconnection, and the command of the status information request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko game machine has not arrived yet. It is a figure which shows an example of the process which reads count history memorize | stored in P unit to CU. It is a figure which shows an example of a process in case there exists a response of a status information response from a pachinko game machine to a card unit, since there exists a power-off and communication circuit disconnection. It is a figure which shows another example of a process in case there exists a response of a status information response from a pachinko game machine to a card unit, since there exists a power-off and communication circuit disconnection. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when the command of the addition request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko game machine has not arrived because there exists a power-off and communication circuit disconnection. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there is a power supply disconnection, communication circuit disconnection, and the response of the addition response from a pachinko game machine to a card unit has not arrived yet. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there is a power supply disconnection, communication circuit disconnection, and the response of the addition response from a pachinko game machine to a card unit has not arrived yet. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when the command of the addition request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko game machine has not arrived because there exists a power-off and communication circuit disconnection. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there is a power supply cut off, a communication circuit | line connection break, and the response of the count response from a pachinko game machine to a card unit has not arrived yet. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there is a power-off and communication circuit disconnection, and the command of the count request | requirement from a pachinko game machine to a card unit has not arrived yet. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there is a power supply disconnection, communication circuit disconnection, and the response of the count response from a card unit to a pachinko game machine has not arrived yet. It is a figure which shows an example of a process at the time of game ball addition result abnormality at the time of a ball lending, ball-with-balls withdrawal, and a ball-stirring out. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating operation | movement of P unit and CU regarding an addition serial number. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating operation | movement of P unit | set and CU regarding a counting serial number. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the operation | movement regarding a 1st and 2nd check process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the operation | movement regarding a 3rd check process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the operation | movement regarding a request | requirement serial number. It is a figure for demonstrating another example of the operation | movement regarding a request | requirement serial number. It is a figure for demonstrating the opportunity of registration (update) and deletion (clear) of recovery information. It is a figure for demonstrating the encryption key used for communication between a key management server to communication control IC. It is an explanatory view explaining an outline of a command and response transmitted and received between CU control part 323 and security chip (SC) 325b. It is an explanatory view explaining an outline of a command and response transmitted and received between CU control part 323 and security chip (SC) 325b. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining start-up processing at the time of power on / hall installation of the CU control unit 323; FIG. 16 is a diagram for describing power on / normal start-up processing of the CU control unit 323; It is a figure for demonstrating the process of powering on the CU control part 323 at the time of factory shipment. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the authentication sequence of a board | substrate maker code | cord. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the authentication sequence of a board | substrate initial key or a board | substrate shipping key. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the authentication sequence of board | substrate serial ID and a board | substrate authentication key. It is a figure for demonstrating the process in the case of inquiring about security board information. It is a figure for explaining processing of a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the sequence of a board | substrate authentication key authentication abnormality. It is a figure explaining processing of a communication line disconnection (PIF) sequence. It is a figure explaining the process of the inquiry timeout sequence of security board information. It is a figure explaining the process of the inquiry (collation) timeout sequence of gaming machine chip information.

It is the schematic for demonstrating the communication performed between a main-control part, a delivery control part, and communication control IC. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with a payout control part. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with the main control part. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with communication control IC. It is a flowchart for demonstrating recovery completion confirmation processing. It is an explanatory view explaining an outline of a command and response transmitted and received between a main control part and a payment control part. It is a figure which shows the communication sequence between a main-control part and a delivery control part. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing when there is a power failure, a communication circuit disconnection, and a command of gaming state notification from the main control unit to the payout control unit has not arrived yet. It is a figure for demonstrating the mechanism of a detection when P unit connected to the game board development jig was connected to commercial CU by unit replacement | exchange. It is a figure for demonstrating the mechanism of a detection when P units | devices connected to CU for development were connected to commercial CU by unit replacement | exchange. It is a figure for demonstrating the mechanism of the detection at the time of connecting a game machine simulator to commercial CU. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the front door of the slot machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining various data stored in each of a card unit and a slot machine, and its transmission and reception mode.

Hereinafter, an embodiment according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
<Configuration of Pachinko Machine>
First, the configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. A plurality of enclosed circulation type pachinko gaming machines (hereinafter referred to as gaming machines, pachinko machines or P units) may be abbreviated as an example of a gaming machine on each gaming island (not shown) disposed in plurality in the gaming arcade (hall). ) 2 are attached. In addition, a card unit (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as CU) 3 of an example of a gaming apparatus is installed on the predetermined side of P platform 2 in a one-to-one correspondence with the P platform 2. There is. Although a card unit will be described below as an example of a gaming apparatus according to the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, but connection to a P platform 2 for notification of a big hit or abnormality, collection of gaming information such as the number of winnings, etc. It may be a calling lamp device or the like.

  The P stand 2 encloses pachinko balls as an example of game media inside, and the player operates the hitting operation handle 25 to drive the firing motor 18 (see FIG. 4) to make one enclosed ball. It is configured to be able to play a game by driving into the game area 27 on the front of the game board 26 one by one. Specifically, a touch sensor is provided around the bat operating handle 25, and the player's hand touches the touch sensor while the player is operating the bat operating handle 25, and the player's hand Is detected by a touch sensor, and the firing motor 18 is driven. In this state, the bat firing force is adjusted in accordance with the amount of turning operation of the bat operating handle 25 by the player, and the ball is shot into the game area 27.

  The launch strength of the pachinko ball (hereinafter, also simply referred to as launch strength T) can be adjusted according to the amount of rotational operation of the bat operating handle 25 (hereinafter, also simply referred to as handle operation amount). The launch strength T increases in accordance with. Therefore, the player can adjust the emission intensity T so that the pachinko ball passes through the area that the player aims at by adjusting the handle operation amount.

  The P platform 2 shown in FIG. 1 is a so-called first type pachinko gaming machine, and a variable display device (also referred to as a special symbol) 278 is provided at the center of the game area 27. Further, in the game area 27, there are provided a plurality of types of winning openings through which pachinko balls that have been hit can be won. In the game area 27 shown in FIG. 1, one big winning opening (variable winning ball device) 271, three ordinary winning openings 272, 273, 274 and three starting winning openings 275, 276, 277 are shown. ing. In particular, the start winning opening 276 is composed of an electric tulip that can be changed to a first state (eg, open state) advantageous to the player and a second state (eg, closed state) disadvantageous to the player. .

  The variable display device 278 is provided with a variable display portion capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (patterns), and based on the detection signals of the start winning balls winning in the respective start winning openings 275, 276, 277. Start variable display of multiple types of identification information. When the display result of the variable display device is a combination of specific identification information (for example, all eyes), it becomes a big hit state, and the big winning opening 271 is opened.

  In addition, the display result of the variable display device 278 is a combination of predetermined special identification information (for example, a combination of odd variation symbols such as 777) of the combination (all eyes) of the big hit symbol As a result, a probability fluctuation state (probability state) occurs in which the probability of occurrence of the jackpot is improved after the end of the jackpot state.

  The pachinko balls thrown into the game area 27 are collected in one of the winning openings or are collected in the out opening 154 without any winning. The pachinko balls that have won a prize in one of the winning openings and the pachinko balls collected in the out port 154 are reduced again to the hitting position through the collection path in the P platform 2 again. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the pachinko ball at the hitting position is hit again into the game area 27.

  The P stand 2 places the CU 3 in the side position, and causes the display 54 extended from the CU 3 to be fitted to the connection surface 54 a provided on the front face of the P stand 2. Therefore, a display 54 is provided at a lower position of the game area 27 in the P-table 2. The display 54 is formed of a liquid crystal display device, and displays, to the player, various effect images linked to the display of the points, the card remaining amount, or the display of the variable display device 278. Further, the display 54 is fitted to the P base 2 by connecting a connection terminal (not shown) provided on the back surface to a connection terminal 54 b provided on the connection surface 54 a of the P base 2. As described above, in the configuration in which the display 54 of the CU 3 is fitted to the connection surface 54 a of the P base 2, the CU 3 and the P base 2 can be connected more strongly, and fraud can be prevented. Furthermore, by making it impossible to release the connection lock with the display 54 without opening the lower door provided with the glass door 6 or the bat operating handle 25, fraud can be further prevented. The display 54 is not limited to the configuration formed integrally with the CU 3 and fitted to the connection surface 54 a of the P base 2 as shown in FIG. 1, and may be formed independently of the CU 3 and on the front surface of the P base 2. It may be configured to be attached.

  In addition, a game ball number indicator for displaying the number of game balls is provided at the upper position of the connection surface 54a of the P-base 2. The game ball number indicator 29 is configured of a 7-segment LED display, and is controlled by a payout control unit 171 described later. The number-of-playing balls described later, an error number of an error that has occurred, and the like are displayed by the number-of-playing balls indicator 29. The game ball number display 29 is not limited to the 7-segment LED display, and may be configured by a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, or another display.

  Further, at the left position of the game ball number display 29 in the P-table 2, a count button 28 for counting from the game ball to the ball is provided. In the present embodiment, the counting operation is repeatedly executed according to the time when the counting button 28 is kept pressed. It should be noted that regardless of the pressing duration time, counting from gaming balls to balls may be performed by a predetermined number (for example, 100 balls) by pressing once, or when the counting button 28 is pressed once. In addition, regardless of the pressing time (whether or not a long press), all of the gaming balls currently owned by the player may be counted. Further, the counting speed is further improved when performing a card return operation, and a smooth card return process is realized.

  As described above, since the counting button 28 is provided on the P base 2 side, the operability of the player sitting in front of the P base 2 can be improved as compared to the case where the counting button 28 is provided on the CU3 side. . In addition, the P-table 2 is provided with speakers 270 at the upper right position and the upper left position of the game area 27 for outputting music data to be reproduced according to the effects displayed on the variable display device 278. In addition, the position and number of speakers are not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 1 and may be changed as needed.

  The P platform 2 according to the present embodiment can be divided into the game board 26 and the other front frame (game frame) 5. In particular, the game board 26 is different for each model of pachinko machine developed by each company, while the front frame 5 is a common common frame regardless of the model. Therefore, it is sufficient to replace the gaming board 26 only when the game arcade is replaced.

<Configuration of card unit>
Next, the configuration of the CU 3 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1 continuously. This CU 3 is a visitor card (also referred to as a general card) having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who is not registered as a member, and a member player who has registered as a member in the game arcade Accept a membership card which is a game recording medium issued to the player. The visitor card and the membership card are constituted by an IC card.

  The CU 3 that has received those cards has a function of converting the game value (for example, the remaining amount of cards, the number of balls held, the number of balls stored, etc.) of the player owned by the record information of the card into "data of game balls". . In the P platform 2, ballistic ball games equivalent to the number of balls specified by the data of the game balls are made possible. That is, "data of game balls" is data indicating the number of remaining shootable balls. In the following description, "data of game ball" will be simply referred to as "game ball" as well as balls and balls.

  On the front side of CU3, a bill insertion slot 302 for inserting a bill, a card insertion / ejection slot 309 for inserting a membership card and a visitor card, and the like are provided. A membership card or a visitor card inserted into the card insertion / ejection slot 309 is accepted by a card reader / writer (not shown), and the information recorded in the card is read.

  Displayed on the front side of CU 3 when the display unit 312 receives a membership card, the membership card ID (also simply referred to as card ID, C-ID) recorded in the membership card and the membership card ID are identified A replay button 319 for implementing replay game using the number of balls is provided.

  The display unit 312 displays the prepaid balance (also referred to as the remaining amount of the card or simply the remaining amount) recorded in the inserted game recording medium (card), but can display the number of game balls and various other information. The surface is formed of a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be input by touching various display items displayed on the display unit of the display unit 312 with a finger.

  When the replay button 319 is operated, when the number of balls acquired by the player is recorded in the inserted card, a part of the number of balls is withdrawn and converted to a game ball, and converted to a game ball It becomes possible to play the game by P stand 2 based on. On the other hand, if the inserted card is a membership card and the number of balls is not recorded and the balls are recorded in the hall management computer etc., a part of the balls is withdrawn and it becomes a game ball It is converted, and the game by P stand 2 becomes possible. That is, when both the ball and the ball are stored in association with the inserted card, the ball is preferentially withdrawn. In addition to the replay button 319, a dedicated ball withdrawal button for withdrawing balls may be provided, and the replay button 319 may be a button dedicated to storing balls.

  Here, a "reserved ball" is a ball which has been acquired in the day before and is deposited in a hole, and becomes a game ball by the withdrawal of the stored ball. In addition, the balls are game media deposited in the game arcade, and are generally managed by a hall management computer or other management computer installed in the game arcade.

  The "balls" is a ball acquired on the day and becomes a game ball by the ball-out. Further, the number of balls possessed is the number of game balls owned by the player as a result of the player playing a game with the gaming machine recorded on the card, and the number of balls not yet deposited in the game arcade It is. Generally, the number of balls the player has acquired on the day at the game arcade is referred to as "bearing ball", and the number of balls acquired by the player before the previous day is the number of balls deposited in the game arcade "pool ball". Say.

  A "playing ball" is a ball that can be launched by a gaming machine. The game ball number data is generated in exchange for debiting prepaid card balances, balls, or balls, as described above.

  The number of balls held may be managed by a management device for number of balls management set in the game arcade. In short, the difference between "balls" and "balls" is the number of balls deposited in the game arcade after the operation for depositing the ball in the game arcade, or is still deposited in the game arcade It is a point of whether it is the number of balls of the stage not being.

  In the present embodiment, the ball storage data is not directly recorded in the member card but is stored in a server installed in the game arcade such as a hall management computer in association with the member card number, and the corresponding ball is searched based on the member card number It is configured to be able to. On the other hand, balls are recorded directly on the card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both may be stored in the hole server 801 in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, balls are recorded directly on the visitor card. However, the present invention is not limited to this and balls may be stored in the hole server 801 in correspondence with the card numbers. When storing the hole server 801 in correspondence with the card number, data which can specify the time stored in the hole server 801 may be written on a card (member card, visitor card) and discharged. Also, the prepaid balance is written directly on the card (member's card, visitor card) and discharged.

  Note that the timing for storing the balls in the card (member card, visitor card) or the hall server is stored, for example, in real time every time the counting button 28 is operated and the counting process is performed. It is conceivable to make it a timing such as causing it to be stored or collectively stored when returning the card.

  In addition, when the player finishes playing the game and returns the card from CU3, the ball held in CU3 is temporarily stored as a ball in the hole server 801, and the day the player receives the card return When you insert a card into the same or another CU3 again on the same day, only the balls for the day that were once stored as a ball are stored again in that CU3, and the game balls are added within the range of balls, It may be possible.

  The bill inserted into the bill insertion slot 302 is taken in by a money discriminator (not shown), and the authenticity or the bill type is identified.

  Further, an IR (Infrared) photosensitive unit (also referred to as an IR light receiving unit) 320, a ball lending button (also referred to as a lending button) 321, and a card return button 322 are provided on the front side of the CU3. The IR photosensitive unit 320 is an IR photosensitive unit 320 that receives an infrared signal from a remote controller (not shown) possessed by a staff member of the game arcade, converts it into an electronic signal, and outputs it. The ball lending button 321 is a button for performing an operation (a conversion operation to a game ball) for deducting the remaining amount recorded in the inserted card and using it for the game by the P-base 2. The card return button 322 is operated when the player ends the game, and the number of determined game balls at the end of the game for the inserted card (number of balls possessed at the time of card insertion-number of conversions to game balls + count) It is an operation button for storing and discharging the number of balls held by the operation).

  Next, referring to FIG. 2, P-table 2 opens and closes front frame (hereinafter also referred to as cell) 5 and glass door 6 with respect to the frame-like outer frame 4 with the left edge as the swing center It is possible.

  A pair of upper and lower engagement protrusions 6 a and 6 b are provided near the end edge (free end side) of the front frame 5 opposite to the swinging center. The engagement protrusions 6a and 6b are pressed downward by a spring (not shown). On the other hand, engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b are provided at positions opposed to the engagement protrusions 6a and 6b of the outer frame 4. By pressing the open front frame 5 against the outer frame 4, the engagement projections 6a and 6b get over the engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b, and in a state of getting over the engagement reception pieces 7a and 7b Move and lock.

  Then, a staff member of the game arcade inserts a key into the keyhole 10 shown in FIG. 1 and performs unlocking operation (for example, clockwise rotation), whereby a pair of upper and lower engaging projections 6a against the biasing force of the spring, 6b is pushed upward, and as a result, the engagement of the engagement projections 6a and 6b with the engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b is released, the lock release state is established, and the front frame 5 is opened.

  Further, the front frame 5 is also provided with an engagement projection 8 for the glass door 6, and an engagement hole 9 is provided in the portion of the glass door 6 facing the engagement projection 8. The engagement projection 8 is pressed downward by a spring (not shown), and by pressing the open glass door 6 against the front frame 5, the engagement projection 8 is pushed up by the lower edge portion of the engagement hole 9 By riding over, the engaging protrusion 8 is pushed down by the biasing force of the spring, and the engaging protrusion 8 and the engaging hole 9 are engaged to be in a locked state. In this state, the staff of the game arcade inserts a key into the keyhole 10 shown in FIG. 1 and performs unlocking operation (for example, counterclockwise rotation), whereby the engaging projection 8 is pulled up against the biasing force of the spring. As a result, the engagement between the engagement projection 8 and the engagement hole 9 is released, the lock release state is established, and the glass door 6 is opened.

  A front frame opening detection switch 13 is provided at a position in contact with the outer frame 4 in the lower portion of the front frame 5, and it is detected that the front frame 5 is opened. Further, a glass door open detection switch 12 is provided at a contact portion with the glass door 6 in the upper portion of the front frame 5, and the glass door open detection switch 12 detects that the glass door 6 is opened.

  The number of times the glass door open detection switch 12 and the front frame open detection switch 13 are opened is counted by a counting counter (not shown). The counting counter is equipped with CPU, ROM, RAM, etc., and can be operated by the backup power supply even when the power supply to P platform 2 is interrupted. The number of open detections of glass door 6 and front frame 5 even when the power is off And the count value can be sent to the payout control unit 171. Here, the backup power supply is, for example, a capacitor or a storage battery provided in P platform 2.

  A main control board 16 is provided on the back surface of the game board 26 (the surface opposite to the surface facing the glass door 6). Since the back of the outer frame 4 is closed, the main control board 16 can be detached from the game board 26 by first opening the front frame 5 and removing the game board 26 from the front frame 5. That is, in order to remove the main control board 16 from the game board 26 or to replace the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16, it is necessary to open the front frame 5, so that the front frame open detection switch 13 is used. The work can always be detected. Therefore, if the main control board 16 is illegally removed from the game board 26 or the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16 is illegally replaced, it can be detected by the front frame opening detection switch 13 without fail.

  Furthermore, a payout control substrate 17 is provided on the back of the front frame 5. The dispensing control board 17 also needs to be removed from the back surface of the front frame 5 after the front frame 5 is first opened. Therefore, if the dispensing control board 17 is removed illegally from the back surface of the front frame 5 or the semiconductor chip provided on the dispensing control board 17 is replaced illegally, it can be detected by the front frame open detection switch 13 without fail.

  Next, the configuration for installing the game board 26 in the front frame 5 will be described. FIG. 3 is a view showing a state before and after the game board 26 is attached to the front frame 5. As shown in FIG. 3, on the back surface of the front frame 5, attachment mechanisms 34a and 34b are provided so as to be openable and closable about hinges 35a and 35b, respectively. The attachment mechanisms 34 a, 34 b are U-shaped and have a bottom corresponding to the game board 26. By pushing the game board 26 against the front frame 5 in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 3 (b), the game board 26 is fixed by the attachment mechanisms 34a and 34b as shown in FIG. 3 (a). When the game board 26 is fixed by the attachment mechanisms 34a and 34b, the convex drawer connector 32 provided on the game board 26 side is coupled to the concave drawer connector 33 provided on the front frame 5 side. Here, the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 are floating connectors that are flexible against misalignment.

  Further, when the game board 26 is installed in the front frame 5, the convex drawer connector 32 is connected to the concave drawer connector 33, whereby the main control board 16 on the game board 26 side and the payout control board on the front frame 5 side 17 will be connected. Furthermore, since the game board 26 is fixed in a fixed position, and the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 have flexibility against a certain degree of positional displacement, the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 32 can be used. These can be coupled without being aware of the positional relationship with the connector 33. Even if the game board 26 is installed on the front frame 5 with only the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 without providing the attachment mechanisms 34a and 34b, the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 may be used. Since the flexible connector itself is a floating connector, they can be coupled without being aware of the positional relationship between the game board 26 and the front frame 5. Here, the convex drawer connector 32 is connected to the main control board 16 via the internal wiring (not shown) of the game board 26, and the concave drawer connector 33 is the payout shown in FIG. 2 via the signal cable 36. It is connected to the control board 17.

<Configuration of Card Unit and Pachinko Machine>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of CU 3 and P base 2. The outline of the control circuit of the CU 3 and the P base 2 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The CU 3 is provided with a CU control unit 323 configured of a microcomputer or the like. The CU control unit 323 is a main control function unit of the CU 3 and includes a central processing unit (CPU) as a control center, a read only memory (ROM) that stores programs for operating the CPU, control data, and the like. A RAM (Random Access Memory) functioning as a work area of the CPU, an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like are provided.

  The CU control unit 323 is provided with an external communication unit (not shown) for communicating with a hall management computer and a hall server 801 (see FIG. 5) for security management. The CU control unit 323 is connected to a security substrate (SC substrate) 325 for communicating with the delivery control substrate 17 of the P-unit 2 while securing security. The security board 325 is a security monitoring function unit of the CU3. Note that the CU control unit 323 may be provided on the security substrate 325, or the CU control unit 323 may be provided on a substrate different from the security substrate 325. A connection (not shown) to the P base 2 side is provided in the CU 3, and a connection (not shown) to the CU 3 side is provided in the P base 2. These connection parts are configured by, for example, a connector or the like.

  The security substrate 325 on the CU 3 side and the payout control substrate 17 on the P base 2 side are communicably connected via this connector and the connection wiring. The security board 325 is provided with a communication control IC 325 a for controlling communication between the security board 325 and the payout control board 17, and a security chip (SC) 325 b for monitoring the security of the P platform 2. Furthermore, the SC 325 b includes a fraud detection unit 1325, and the fraud detection unit 1325 monitors fraud addition request information notified to the P-unit 2 from the CU control unit 323 to perform fraud detection, and performs key management at the time of fraud detection. It notifies the server 800 (see FIG. 5). Further, the setting value (constant) for fraud detection is notified from the key management server 800 as substrate control information.

  In the CU control unit 323, the authenticity and the type of the banknote are identified by the above-described money identifier, and the identification result signal is input. Further, when the IR photosensitive unit 320 receives an infrared ray emitted from a remote controller possessed by a game arcade clerk, the CU control unit 323 receives a light reception signal. In the CU control unit 323, the card reader / writer reads the recorded information of the inserted card, and the read information is input, and the CU control unit 323 writes the inserted card to the card reader / writer. When data is transmitted, the card reader / writer writes the data to the inserted card. The card record information includes the card ID. The CU control unit 323 stores the card ID read by the card reader / writer until the end of the game.

  The CU control unit 323 manages and stores the balls held by the player when the player plays a game. Data such as the remaining amount or the number of game balls is output from the CU control unit 323 to the display control unit 350, and is converted into display data by the display control unit 350. The display data converted by the display control unit 350 is transmitted to the display 312 provided on the front of the CU 3 and the display 54 disposed on the front of the P platform 2 as shown in FIG. The display data transmitted to the display 54 is first input to the relay board 14. An image corresponding to the display data is displayed on the display 312 and the display 54. Further, when the player operates the touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323 via the display control unit 350. When the player operates the ball lending button 321, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323. In addition, the ball lending button 321 is not limited to the configuration provided on the CU 3, and may be a configuration provided on the P-unit 2 and inputting an operation signal to the CU control unit 323. When the player operates the replay button 319, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323. When the player operates the card return button 322, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323.

  The P control 2 controls the drive of the firing motor 18 based on the commands of the main control board 16 that controls the progress of the game of the P 2, the payout control board 17 that manages and stores the gaming balls, and the payout control board 17 The emission control substrate 31 is provided, the variable display device 278, and the effect control substrate 15 for controlling the display of the variable display device 278 based on the command transmitted from the main control substrate 16.

  The main control board 16 and the effect control board 15 are provided on the game board 26. The main control board 16 is mounted with a game control microcomputer which is a main control unit 161. The main control unit 161 is a main control function unit of the gaming machine. The gaming machine control microcomputer includes a central processing unit (CPU) as a control center, a read only memory (ROM) that stores programs for operating the CPU, control data, and the like, and a RAM (functions as a work area of the CPU). An Random Access Memory (Random Access Memory), an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, etc. are provided. The main control unit 161 is connected to the prize sensor 162 and the radio wave sensor 163 provided on the game board 26.

  When a ball is won in each starting winning opening 275, 276, 277, the main control section 161 draws a random number for determining a big hit (or further includes a small hit) / out, and stores the random number. This is called pending storage. The maximum value of the number of pending storages is, for example, “4”. When the variable display device 278 is ready to start a new variable display, the main control unit 161 digests one pending storage, performs a big hit determination based on the pending storage, and derives a display result from the variable start. Determine the variable display time from one to multiple types. Also, when a big hit is determined, it is also determined whether or not to cause a probability change. The main control unit 161 transmits the result of the big hit determination (including whether or not to make a positive change) and information on the variable display time as a command to the effect control unit 151 mounted on the effect control board 15.

  For the command regarding variable display transmitted from the main control unit 161 to the effect control unit 151, a variable start command indicating the start of variable display, a display result command (big hit / out) indicating the result of variable display, and a variable display pattern are specified A possible variable display time command, a variable stop command indicating a timing for deriving and displaying a variable display result, and the like are included. Furthermore, the command transmitted from the main control unit 161 to the effect control unit 151 includes a command capable of specifying the progress status of the big hit during the big hit, a command indicating the generation of a new hold storage, and the occurrence of an error of the gaming state. There is a command to show.

  The effect control unit 151 determines the variable display content of the variable display device 278 based on these commands transmitted from the main control unit 161. For example, the effect control unit 151 specifies the variable display result and the variable display time based on the command transmitted from the main control unit 161, determines the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern (presence or absence of reach, type of reach) In addition, it decides the production pattern of the notice production about the big hit and the reach. The effect control unit 151 performs display control of the variable display device 278 in accordance with the determined variable display content.

  The effect control board 15 is also connected to the display 54 via the relay board 14 of CU3. The effect control unit 151 transmits a display control signal for variable display and the like to the variable display device 278 and transmits a display control signal for performing display interlocking with the display of the variable display device 278 to the display 54. It is possible. The relay board 14 and the display 54 may be provided on the side of the P base 2. In this case, the effect control board 15 on the P base 2 side is directly connected to the relay board 14 on the P base 2 side without the intervention of the CU 3.

  The payout control board 17 is provided on the front frame 5. The payout control board 17 is mounted with a payout control microcomputer which is a payout control unit 171. The payout control unit 171 is a payout control function unit of the gaming machine. The payout control microcomputer includes a central processing unit (CPU) as a control center, a read only memory (ROM) that stores programs for operating the CPU, control data, and the like, and a RAM (functions as a work area of the CPU). An Random Access Memory (Random Access Memory), an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, etc. are provided.

  In addition, a launch ball detection switch 903, an out ball detection switch 701, a foul ball detection switch 33 A, a counting button 28, and a radio wave sensor 173 are electrically connected to the payout control substrate 17. The radio wave sensor 173 is for detecting a fraudulent act of transmitting a radio wave illegally to turn on the ball raising switch (upper) 41a constantly. A detection signal of the radio wave sensor 173 is input to the payout control unit 171 through an input port (not shown) of the payout control board 17. The ball raising switch (upper) 41a detects the firing of the game ball by changing from on to off, and the payout control unit 171 subtracts “1” from the number of game balls based on the detection.

  Therefore, when the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is constantly turned on by an illegal radio wave, the number of game balls is not reduced even if the ball is fired. The radio wave sensor 173 detects a fraud due to such radio waves.

  From the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17, main control chip ID, winning opening information, round information, connection confirmation signal, winning detection signal, starting winning opening winning information, error information, number of symbol determinations, big hit information, manufacturer specific Big hit information is sent.

  The main control chip ID (also referred to as a main chip ID) is a chip ID recorded on the main control board 16 of the P base 2 and is transmitted to the payout control board 17 when the power of the P base 2 is turned on. It is information. The winning opening information is information including the type of winning opening (starting winning opening, normal winning opening, large winning opening), and the number of winning balls (number of payout balls when the game ball enters the winning opening), P It is transmitted to the payout control board 17 when the power of the table 2 is turned on. The round information is information on the number of rounds when a big hit is made, and is transmitted to the payout control board 17 when the power of the P-unit 2 is turned on.

  The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 16 and the payout control board 17 are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 is configured to perform operation control on the condition that the payout control board 17 receives the predetermined voltage signal. The winning detection signal is a detection signal of pachinko balls that have won a winning opening other than the starting winning opening. The payout control board 17 having received the detection signal performs control to add the number of balls to be provided to one of the winning balls to the number of gaming balls and the number of additional balls.

  The start-up winning opening winning information is information indicating that a pachinko ball is won in any of the starting-up winning openings. The error information is information for notifying the payout control board 17 that an error has occurred while the main control board 16 is performing game control.

  The symbol determination frequency is information of a symbol determined as a display result of the variable display device for winning on each start winning opening.

  The jackpot information is information indicating that a jackpot has occurred, and the breakdown includes common jackpot information indicating a jackpot common to each maker and maker unique jackpot information indicating a jackpot unique to a maker. The common jackpot information is a jackpot commonly used by each gaming machine maker, such as, for example, 15 round jackpots, and includes probability change information when a definite change occurs in association with the large hit, and in conjunction with the large hit When a short time state (a control state for shortening the variable display time of the variable display device) occurs, the short time information is included. The maker-specific jackpot is, for example, a jackpot state adopted only by a certain gaming machine maker, such as a sudden change.

  A health check command and a winning ball count acceptance command are transmitted from the payout control board 17 to the main control board 16. The health check command is a command for checking whether the main control board 16 is operating normally. The winning ball number reception command is a command indicating that the number of additional balls has been received.

  An out ball detection signal is input from the out ball detection switch 701 to the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 to which the out-of-ball detection signal is inputted subtracts and updates the number of playing balls (the number of floating balls floating in the game area 27) as described later. In the payout control board 17 to which the foul ball detection signal is input from the foul ball detection switch 33A, as described later, the number of added balls and the number of gaming balls are added and updated, and the number of playing balls is subtracted and updated. A launch ball detection signal is input from the launch ball detection switch 903 to the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 to which the shot ball detection signal is input subtracts and updates the number of playing balls.

  The security substrate 325 of the CU 3 and the payout control substrate 17 of the P base 2 are electrically connected, and various commands are transmitted from the security substrate 325 to the payout control substrate 17 as described later. Conversely, various responses are transmitted from the payout control board 17 to the security board 325 as described later.

  In the front frame 5, in addition to the payout control substrate 17, a launch control substrate 31, a launch motor 18, and a game ball number indicator 29 are provided. Although the game ball number indicator 29 may be directly attached to the front frame 5, the front plate 5 may be attached to the front plate 5 like the upper plate or the lower plate provided on the front side of a normal pachinko gaming machine from which balls are dispensed. It may be provided in a rotatable manner. The same applies to the display 54. The payout control unit 171 of the payout control board 17 displays the number of gaming balls currently owned by the player on the gaming ball number display 29.

  The emission control signal and the emission permission signal are output from the discharge control substrate 17 to the emission control substrate 31. The launch control board 31 receiving the signal outputs a signal for exciting the launch motor 18 of the launcher. As a result, the pachinko ball is in a state of being bombarded to the game area 27. The launch control board 31 emits a launch motor excitation output to drive the launch motor 18 when an input signal of a touch ring for detecting that the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25 is input.

  The launch intensity sensor 19 detects the launch intensity T of the pachinko ball by the launch motor 18. For example, the emission intensity sensor 19 detects, as the emission intensity T, a value obtained by converting an analog value output from a variable resistor configured to change the electric resistance value according to the amount of steering wheel operation into a digital value. In the following, as an example, the firing intensity T will be described as changing from 0 (minimum value) to 99 (maximum value) in accordance with the amount of handle operation. The detection result of the emission intensity sensor 19 is output to the delivery control substrate 17 and CU3 via the emission control substrate 31.

  A display 54 and a relay board 14 extended from the CU 3 are provided on the front surface of the P platform 2. The display 54 receives the display data (display control signal) from the display control unit 350 of the CU 3 through the relay board 14. Furthermore, the display 54 receives display data (display control signal) from the effect control board 15 via the relay board 14.

  The display control signal from one of the effect control board 15 and the display control unit 350 is output to the display 54 on the relay board 14 and the display 54 is based on the display control signal from the effect control board 15 or the display control unit 350 A switching circuit 141 for displaying an image is mounted.

  In the present embodiment, the display 54 extended from the CU3 provided on the front surface of the P-table 2 can be controlled by the CU3 side, but instead, the display 54 on the P-table 2 side can be controlled instead. The display control board may be provided on the side of the P base 2 so that the display 54 can be provided on the side of the P base 2 and the display control can be performed on the side of the P base 2. In this case, the display control board controls the display of the display 54 based on the command of the payout control unit 171.

  The RAM clear switch 293 is a switch for deleting gaming machine information and game information stored in the RAM of the P unit 2 and is operated initially by the store clerk operating the switch after the P unit is in an error state. It is possible to return to the state. The RAM clear switch 293 is operated by the store clerk, for example, after the card is discharged.

<Circulation route of pachinko balls>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 1 and 4, the circulation path of the pachinko ball in P platform 2 is outlined.

  When the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the firing motor 18 is driven. As a result, one pachinko ball supplied to the launch position is bounced by the hitting hammer, and the pachinko ball is driven into the game area 27.

  The detection of the launch of the game ball is detected when the ball raising switch (upper) 41a changes from on to off. This detection is detected by a port input on the payout control board 17 (see FIG. 4) provided with the payout control unit 171, and the payout control unit 171 subtracts “1” from the number of game balls based on the detection. Do.

  Out of the balls driven into the game area 27, the out ball entering the out port 154 (see FIG. 1) flows down the out ball flow down path and is detected by the out ball detection switch 701 provided on the way . The foul ball flows down through the far ball return path, and is detected by a far ball detection switch 33A provided on the way.

  All winning balls that have won in the winning opening and the variable winning ball device are collected at the back of the gaming machine and guided to the recovery ball passing path. Similarly, out balls and far balls are also guided to the recovery ball passage path. A launch ball detection switch 903 is provided on the recovery ball passage route. For this reason, all of the winning balls, out balls, and far balls are detected by the launch ball detection switch 903. In other words, the launch ball detection switch 903 is a switch for detecting all the pachinko balls that have been fired. When the number of detections of this switch and the number of bullets of the pachinko ball kicked by the shooting motor 18 become equal, it can be determined that all the hit pachinko balls are recovered.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the difference between the number of detections of the fired ball detection switch 903 and the number of bullets is calculated, and when the number of differences is not zero, the balls thrown into the game area 27 have been collected. It is judged that it is not. By performing this determination, it can be determined whether the game area 27 is rolling or there is no floating ball which is not caught and dropped between the nails and the like of the game area.

<Notification processing of abnormality that occurred in card unit and pachinko gaming machine>
FIG. 5 is an explanatory view for explaining notification processing when an abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication.

  Referring to FIG. 5, when an abnormality occurs in CU control unit 323, security substrate 325, payout control unit 171, or main control substrate 16, notification is made in the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. In the case of abnormality here, the CU control unit 323, the security board 325, the payout control unit 171, or the main control board 16 may be replaced with another one manufactured illegally, or malfunction or failure due to noise or the like. It also includes an off-line state due to disconnection or the like. The key management server 800 shown in FIG. 5 is a key management server that stores the SID of the CU communication control unit and the authentication key in association with each serial ID (also referred to as SID) of the electronic component inside the CU3. is there. Also, the key management server 800 is a server that can communicate with the main control board 16.

  First, when an abnormality occurs due to the security substrate 325 of the CU 3, the CU control unit 323 detects an abnormality as a result of the mutual authentication performed between the CU control unit 323 and the security substrate 325 described above. The mutual authentication includes device authentication using a session key, in addition to serial ID authentication and device authentication described later.

  The serial ID is a serial ID (substrate serial ID) of the security substrate 325, and is stored in the ROM of the security chip 325b at the stage of manufacturing the security chip 325b of the security substrate 325. In addition, when CU3 is brought into the game arcade and connected to the hall server 801, the board serial ID is downloaded from the key management server 800 of the key management center via the hall server 801 and stored in the CU control unit 323. Ru.

  When the CU control unit 323 detects an abnormality of the security board 325, the CU control unit 323 notifies the hole server 801 to that effect, and transmits an abnormality notification command to the display control unit 350 of CU3. The CU control unit 323 causes the display control unit 350 to perform control to display the occurrence of an abnormality on the display unit 312, and turns on or blinks an abnormality notification lamp (not shown) to perform abnormality notification. Furthermore, the CU control unit 323 transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred from the external communication unit to the hall management computer.

  When an abnormality occurs in the CU control unit 323 of the CU 3, the security board 325 detects an abnormality occurrence by the mutual authentication described above, and notifies the payout control unit 171 of a signal (an abnormality notification signal) indicating that. The security board 325 notifies the payout control unit 171 by parallel signals via the PIF circuit 326 which is a parallel interface circuit. The payout control unit 171 receives the notification and notifies the main control board 16 that an abnormality has occurred. As described above, the main control board 16 performs control to operate the abnormality notification lamp and sends a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer.

  When the security board 325 detects an abnormality in the payout control unit 171, the fact is notified to the CU control unit 323, and the CU control unit 323 notifies the hole server 801 of that effect.

  As described above, when the security board 325 detects an abnormality in the CU control unit 323, the security board 325 notifies that effect to the payout control unit 171 via the PIF circuit 326, and when the security board 325 detects an abnormality in the payout control unit 171, Is notified to the CU control unit 323, and notification destinations of occurrence of abnormality by the security board 325 are different. The reason is that even if the control unit in which the abnormality has occurred is notified that the abnormality has occurred, control for notifying an abnormality is not performed at all, and no countermeasure against the abnormality is taken. Moreover, although the security board 325 has a communication control function, it does not have an abnormality notification control function. Therefore, it is not possible to control the abnormality notification by itself, and therefore, it is always notified that an abnormality has occurred in the direction of the control unit opposite to the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The payout control unit 171 receiving the notification of the occurrence of an abnormality from the security substrate 325 via the PIF circuit 326 notifies the main control substrate 16 to that effect. In response to the notification, the main control board 16 performs the same control for reporting an abnormality as described above.

  When an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 171, the fact is detected by the security board 325, the CU control unit 323 is notified that an abnormality has occurred, and the CU control unit 323 performs the above-mentioned abnormality notification control. It notifies the hole server 801 that an abnormality has occurred. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 171, the main control board 16 detects that an abnormality has occurred, receives the notification, and performs the control for notifying the abnormality occurrence described above.

  As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the security substrate 325, the payout control substrate 17 detects it and notifies the main control substrate 16 of it, while when an abnormality occurs in the main control substrate 16, the same. It detects and notifies the security board 325 that an abnormality has occurred. As in the case of the security board 325 described above, when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred, the payout control board 17 also performs control for notifying an abnormality even when the control unit that has the abnormality is notified. In order not to do so, the control unit or control board on the opposite side to the control unit where the abnormality has occurred is notified. The security board 325 and the payout control board 17 are not connected with abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification indicator, and have a function to perform abnormality notification control even if an abnormality is detected. Absent. In the above description, the security board 325 and the payout control board 17 are not connected with abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification indicator, and even when an abnormality is detected, the abnormality substrate is controlled by itself. Although described as having no function, the security board 325 and the payout control board 17 may be provided with an abnormality notification function to directly notify that an abnormality has occurred.

<Transmission mode between the card unit side and the pachinko gaming machine side>
Next, FIG. 6 is a schematic view showing the main ones of various data stored in each of the CU 3 side and the P base 2 side and the transmission / reception mode thereof. With reference to FIG. 6, the main ones of various data stored in each of the CU (card unit) 3 side and the P (pachinko gaming machine) 2 side and the transmission / reception mode thereof will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the variation of the number of gaming balls is calculated on the side of P platform 2 to store and manage the current latest number of gaming balls. The CU3 side also calculates and stores the current number of game balls, but the number of game balls is based on the information transmitted from the P-base 2 side. On the other hand, the CU3 side manages and stores the balls (number of balls having a card), the number of balls, and the remaining amount of the card (remaining amount).

  6 shows stored data of the RAM provided in the CU control unit 323 on the CU 3 side and stored data of the RAM mounted on the payout control board 17 on the P base 2 side. First, the payout control board on the side of the P unit 2 when the power is turned on with the P unit (pachinko gaming machine) 2 and the CU (card unit) 3 installed in the game arcade for the first time electrically connected. 17 sends a main chip ID (main control chip ID) from the main control board 16 and transmits the main chip ID to the CU 3 side, and the payout chip ID stored in the payout control board 17 itself (payout Send the control chip ID) to the CU3 side.

  On the CU 3 side, the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID are stored. Next, data of the connection time, that is, the time when the CU3 side and the P-unit 2 side are connected and communication is started is transmitted from the CU3 side to the P-unit 2 side, and the transmitted connection time on the P-unit 2 side Remember.

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID and the connection time identified on the CU 3 side are stored on the CU 3 side and the P base 2 side. At the time of power on after that, the three information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the P-table 2 side to the CU 3 side.

  On the CU 3 side, the transmitted data and the already stored data are collated to determine whether the same P-unit 2 as in the previous time is connected. In connection time data, new connection time data at which communication between the CU3 side and the P base 2 side is started every time the power is turned on is transmitted from the CU 3 side to the P base 2 side and the new connection is made The time data is stored on the side of the P-table 2.

  Both CU and P add a "serial number" to the telegram and transmit. Also, both the CU and the P store the "serial number" received from the other party. There are three types of "serial number": "normal serial number", "addition serial number" and "count serial number". "Normal serial number" indicates the sequence number of the message. The “normal serial number” is transmitted by counting up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with the initial value “1” as the CU 3 side (primary station side). However, at the time of retransmission, "normal serial number" is not counted up. The P base 2 side (secondary station side) transmits the received serial number as it is. In addition, when the continuity of a serial number is not materialized, it becomes a non-response. The “addition serial number” is a serial number used when the CU 3 requests the P 2 to add a game ball. The “counting serial number” is a serial number used when the P-unit 2 requests the CU 3 to count the gaming balls.

  Only CU3 has the right to update the serial number. When the same normal serial number as the transmitted normal serial number is sent back, the CU 3 backs up the normal serial number and transmits the updated normal serial number. Only CU3 has the addition update right of the addition serial number. When making an addition request, the CU 3 transmits, to the P-unit 2, an addition serial number obtained by adding 1 to the addition serial number used for communication until then. When the P unit 2 accepts the request, it returns the same added serial number. When the request is rejected, the added serial number received last time (the added serial number -1 received this time) is returned. Only the P unit 2 has the added update right of the counting serial number. When making a counting request, the P-unit 2 transmits to the CU 3 a counting serial number obtained by adding 1 to the counting serial number used for communication. When the CU3 accepts the request, it returns the same counting serial number. When rejecting the request, the received serial number (count serial number -1 received this time) is returned.

  In the following, with regard to the “normal sequence number”, a configuration in which the sequence number received by the CU 3 at the time of transmission is counted up (+1) and transmitted will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and each of P base 2 and CU 3 counts up (+1) and transmits the serial number received by P base 2 at the time of transmission, and the other receives the serial number May be transmitted as it is.

  Also, “addition serial number” and “count serial number” are special serial numbers that are counted up in the processing of the addition request and the processing of the counting request, respectively. Below, when this "addition serial number" and "count serial number" are counted up, the structure which also counts up "normal serial number" is demonstrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the "normal serial number" may not be counted up when the "addition serial number" and the "count serial number" are counted up. In addition, below, "normal serial number" is only called "serial number." Also, the "addition serial number" and the "count serial number" are collectively referred to as "request serial number".

  The latest game table information (game table information being counted) is transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU 3 side. The latest gaming machine information is stored in the latest gaming machine information storage area of the RAM of the payout control section 171 (see FIG. 4) on the side of P stand 2. Specifically, the information on the addition ball number counter, the information on the subtraction ball number counter, and the information on the counting ball number counter are included. Note that the number of gaming balls is not included in the latest gaming machine information, and is transmitted from the P-table 2 side to the CU 3 side as a count value of the gaming ball number counter as described later. However, instead of this, or in addition to the game ball counter, the number of game balls may be included in the latest gaming machine information.

  The information of these counters is collectively sent to the CU as a response. The addition ball number counter is a counter that counts the number of addition balls. The additional balls are the sum of "the number of prize balls × the number of prizes" and "the number of back balls". The back ball is a foul ball. That is, the addition ball indicates the number of addition balls to be added to the game ball. The subtraction ball number counter is a counter that counts the number of subtraction balls. The subtraction ball is "the number of fired balls". That is, it is the number of balls detected by the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. The “number of balls to be subtracted” is not included in the “number of balls to be subtracted”. The counting ball number counter is a counter that counts the number of counting balls. The counting ball is “the number of balls converted from gaming balls to balls by counting operation”. Here, the "prize ball" is a ball that is paid out by the ball winning to the winning opening, and is a safe ball. "Balling ball" is a ball shot by a gaming machine, and if there is a back ball, the number of balls obtained by subtracting the back ball is the number of fired balls. A "back ball" is a ball from which a firing ball comes back without jumping onto the board. The “out-out passing ball” is a ball that has passed through the out-port 154, and the total number of out-out balls and safe balls means the number of out-out passing balls.

  For example, when a pachinko ball hit into the game area 27 wins and the winning information is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17, an adding ball to which the gaming ball should be added based on the winning information The addition ball number counter counts the number, and the value (additional ball number) of the addition ball number counter is transmitted from the P-table 2 side to the CU 3 side. Also, the subtraction ball number counter counts the number of firing balls as the number of subtraction balls, based on the change in output of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a from on to off due to the pachinko balls being shot into the game area 27 The value of the subtraction ball number counter (subtraction ball number) is transmitted from the P base 2 side to the CU 3 side.

  Alternatively, the payout control unit 171 counts the number of gaming balls as the number of counting balls by pressing the counting button 28, and transmits the value of the counting ball number counter (number of counting balls) from the P-table 2 side to the CU3 side.

  Each time the values of the added ball number counter, the subtracted ball number counter, and the counted ball number counter are transmitted to the CU 3 side on the P base 2 side, those count values are stored in the previous game table information storage area (RAM of the payout control unit 171). After storing (rewriting) as backup data, etc., the values of the added ball number counter, the subtracted ball number counter, and the counted ball number counter as latest game table information are cleared to 0 (except for the game ball number counter). In the present embodiment, "clear" has the same meaning as "initialization".

  As a result, in the memory area of the previous game table information (game table information transmitted immediately before), the data of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, and the number of counting balls, which are game table information transmitted to CU3 immediately before, are backed up. It is stored as data. This backup data is not only the value of each counter at the time of the next transmission but also the value of each previous counter which was not transmitted when the latest game table information is not transmitted from the P unit 2 side to the CU 3 side. Is also intended to enable transmission. The number of game balls transmitted immediately before may be added to the previous game table information and stored.

  Further, the payout control board 17 updates the value of the game ball counter according to the occurrence of winnings, the firing of balls, the occurrence of back balls, and the occurrence of counting balls (conversion from gaming balls to balls). The value of the updated game ball number counter is transmitted to the CU 3 as the number of game balls.

  On the CU3 side, in the total data storage area in the RAM, the number of game balls, the number of balls possessed by cards (simply referred to as the number of balls held), the number of balls held, the balance, the total number of balls added (total number of balls added), total subtraction The number of balls (total number of subtracted balls) and the number of balls held at the time of card insertion are stored. The number of balls possessed by the card is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the number of paid out balls (the number of balls converted from the number of card held balls to the number of game balls) from the number of balls held at card insertion. That is, the number of balls possessed by the card is the number of balls possessed by the player at the present time.

  The total number of added balls is added based on the value (number of added balls) of the added ball counter sent from the side of P platform 2 to update the number of balls. Further, the total subtraction ball number is subtracted based on the value of the subtraction ball number counter (subtraction ball number) transmitted from the P-base 2 side to update the ball number. Further, based on the value of the counting ball number counter transmitted from the P-unit 2, the card holding ball number is added and updated. In this way, the CU 3 can manage the latest information by updating the total additional balls number, the total subtractive ball number, and the card possession number by the latest gaming machine information transmitted one by one from the P platform 2 It becomes possible.

  As illustrated, the CU 3 has an area for storing gaming balls, and also receives a count value of the gaming ball number counter (also referred to as gaming ball number or total number of gaming balls) from the P-base 2 side. The CU 3 updates the area for storing the game balls in the following procedure. That is, CU3 stores the value based on the value of the added ball number counter (number of added balls), the value of the subtracted ball number counter (the number of subtracted balls), and the value of the counting ball number counter transmitted from P side. The number of playing balls is updated, and it is determined whether the count value of the number-of-playing ball counter transmitted from the P-unit side at the same timing matches the number of updated playing balls. If they match, the game is allowed to continue, but if they do not match, control is made to shift to an error state.

  As a result, for example, the error notification lamp or the indicator 312 gives an error notification, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred in the hall management computer or the hall server 801 is transmitted (in this case, the hall management An error notification may be issued by a computer or a hall server 801). As a result, a predetermined notification is provided to urge an artificial response by the clerk.

  It should be noted that instead of shifting to the error state and stopping the game, the number of gaming balls stored on the CU 3 side may be replaced with the count value of the gaming ball number counter transmitted from the P base 2 side. Good. Alternatively, it may be corrected to an average value of the number of gaming balls managed on the CU 3 side and the number of gaming balls stored on the P base 2 side.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the CU 3 side, but it is determined whether or not the number of game balls matches the number of game balls managed and stored on the P base 2 side. Can be performed (CU3 side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of gaming balls stored on the side of the P platform 2 does not match the number of gaming balls stored on the side of the CU 3 due to injustice or other circumstances, that effect can be checked. Here, although the determination function is provided on the CU3 side, for example, the number of game balls stored on the CU3 side and the memory on the P-table 2 side are stored by the hall server 801 or hall management computer connected to the CU3. The number of playing balls may be received, and it may be determined whether or not both match.

  As shown in FIG. 6, CU3 has a storage area for storing the number of balls possessed and the number of balls stored, a storage area for storing the remaining amount of the accepted (inserted) card, and the total number of added balls (number of added balls Storage area for storing the total number of subtraction balls (total number of subtraction balls) and balls at the time of card insertion. The CU control unit 323 (see FIG. 4) stores the balls according to the input requesting use of the balls (for example, the pressing input of the replay button 319 provided on the CU 3 (when there is no balls)). Subtract a predetermined number of storage balls from the area.

  CU control unit 323 (see FIG. 4) is an input requesting use of balls (for example, pressing input of replay button 319 provided on CU 3 when there is a ball (when there is a ball)) A predetermined number of balls are subtracted from the storage area storing balls in accordance with. Further, the CU control unit 323 (see FIG. 4) subtracts a predetermined value from the storage area storing the remaining card amount in response to an input requesting use of the remaining card amount (for example, pressing input of the ball lending button 321).

  When the player performs an operation to use for the game by debiting the value from the game-owned value (for example, the prepaid balance, the number of balls held, or the number of balls held) owned by the player, the number of balls for the withdrawal is the number of game balls The number of added balls to be added to the counter is transmitted from the CU 3 side to the P base 2 side. On the P platform 2 side, in response to that, the game ball counter is added and updated.

  On the other hand, in the gaming system according to the present embodiment, it is possible to receive a so-called wagon service order or the like in which the gaming value owned by the player is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink or the like. However, it is limited to receive wagon service with game balls, and can only receive wagon service with balls. This is an image that prohibits, in a conventional enclosed circulation type pachinko gaming machine in which each counter has been installed, manually grasping the ball remaining in the plate before counting and using it for the wagon service.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the operation for performing the wagon service is executed, the player is urged to perform the counting operation if the number of balls is less than the number of balls corresponding to the desired menu of the wagon service. It is done. At that time, when the player executes the counting operation, the number of counting balls based on the operation is transmitted from the P-table 2 side to the CU 3 side. In response to that, the CU 3 subtracts the number of game balls and adds and updates the number of card balls.

<Frame configuration used in communication>
Next, communication between the CU 3 and the P base 2 according to the present embodiment will be described in more detail. A telegram used in the communication is composed of a frame having a predetermined format. Transmission data (telegram) is always transmitted in units of one frame. That is, divisional transmission of telegrams is not performed. Also, when sending messages continuously, leave an interval of 1 millisecond or more.

  Transmission data of one frame includes a data length, a normal serial number, an adding serial number, a counting serial number, a command, and a data portion. The “data length” indicates the data length of the transmission data (serial number to data portion (business message range)). "Command" is a command code of a message. The "data part" is data of a telegram.

<Commands and responses sent and received between CU and P>
Next, with reference to FIG. 7, an outline of commands and responses transmitted and received between the CU (card unit) 3 and the P unit (pachinko gaming machine) 2 will be described.

  FIG. 7 shows the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, and the name of transmission information and its outline.

<< 1. Recovery request, 2. Recovery response >>
First, a command named recovery request is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P base 2. This recovery request command is for requesting recovery information from the P-unit 2. In response to the recovery request, a response named recovery response is sent from P unit 2 to CU3. The response of the recovery response is to notify the CU 3 of recovery information.

  The command of the recovery request is sent from CU3 to P2 after CU3 completes authentication. The command of the recovery request requests recovery information from the CU 3 to the P unit 2. After the CU 3 completes the authentication, it sends the same command first. The recovery request includes "serial number", "command", "previous final transmission serial number", and "previous final transmission count serial number". The "serial number" is a sequence number (1 to 255). The "command" is a command code of the recovery request, and is indicated by binary data in hexadecimal notation.

  The “previous final transmission serial number” is a serial number of the command of the status information request transmitted last to P platform 2 at the time of the previous connection. When the “last transmission serial number last time” is “0”, it indicates that there is no stored serial number. Note that “previous final transmission serial number” is a serial number that stores “serial number” as the last transmission serial number (serial number) on P base 2 and CU 3 side at the time of status information response reception in CU3 when transmitting status information response in P base 2 It is.

  The “previous final transmission counting serial number” is a counting serial number of the response of the status information request transmitted last to P unit 2 at the time of the previous connection. The "previous final transmission counting serial number" indicates that there is no stored serial number in the case of "0". Note that “previous final transmission count serial number” is a serial number that stores count serial number to P base 2 and CU3 side as last transmission count serial number at the time of status information response reception to CU3 when status information response is transmitted in P platform 2 .

  "Store code" and "SC substrate ID" notified from the security board 325 in the counting history sequence to be described later in the recovery process (number of counting balls) of P table 2 and "store code" held by P table 2 And the coincidence judgment with "SC board | substrate ID" is performed, and when it corresponds, the following processes are performed. In the case of non-coincidence, the count request ball number = 0 is set in the subtraction register to notify the user program.

  P unit 2 refers to “previous final transmission counting sequence number” notified from CU3 and sets “counting request ball number = 0” in the subtraction register when CU3 has not performed counting processing for the counting request. Notify the user program to be executed on P unit 2. When CU3 has performed counting processing, the number of counting request balls notified to CU3 is set in the subtraction register and notified to the user program. If all the store codes held by P unit 2 are “F” (hexadecimal number), it is determined that the store codes match. If the "store code" notified from the security board 325 does not match the "store code" stored in the P platform 2, the store code mismatch is notified to the user program via the register. When the P-unit 2 receives the recovery request command from the CU 3, the P-unit 2 notifies the user program via the register.

  The response of the recovery response is for responding the recovery information held by the P-unit 2 to the CU3. The recovery information includes "serial number", "command", "last transmitted serial number", "last inserted card ID", "previous card insertion time", "last transmitted addition serial number", "ball unit price", "gaming information" It includes storage status, "previous game platform information" and "previous game information". Since "serial number" and "command" are the same as described above, the description will not be repeated.

  The “previous final transmission sequence number” is data of a sequence number included in the response of the status information response transmitted last to the CU 3 at the previous connection time, and is “0” when there is no sequence number held. The "previous insertion card ID" is data of the card ID of the card that was being inserted at the time of the previous connection, and in the case of "0", there is no card being inserted. The payout control unit 171 of the P-unit 2 stores and holds the card ID being inserted based on the information transmitted from the CU 3.

  The "previous card insertion time" is data of the insertion time of the card which was being inserted at the time of the previous connection, and when it is "0", there is no card being inserted. This data also has year information as two digits YY, month information as two digits MM, day information as two digits DD, time information as two digits hh, minute information as two digits mm, and second information as two digits ss. It is. The “previous final transmission addition serial number” is an addition serial number included in the response of the state information response last transmitted to the CU 3 at the previous connection time, and when “0”, the addition serial number is not present. The “ball unit price” is a ball unit price (0.01 yen to 99.99 yen) per ball playing in the P platform 2. The "game information storage presence / absence" is "0x00" when game information is not stored, and "0x01" when game information is stored.

  The "previous game platform information" is the game platform information notified to the CU 3 last time, and includes information on "number of gaming balls", "game ball information", "number of requested counting balls" and "counting serial number". The “number of game balls” is the number of game balls notified to CU 3 last time. The “playing ball information” is the playing ball information notified last time. The game ball information is, for example, information such as the number of fired balls notified to CU 3 last time, the number of out-port passing balls, the total number of balls, etc. The “count request ball number” is the number of game balls requested to be counted. The “counting serial number” is the counting serial number notified to CU3 last time.

  The "previous game information" is game information notified to the CU 3 last time, and includes information on "the number of game information" and "game information 1" to "game information n". The “number of game information” is the number (0 to n) of game information notified to CU 3 last time. In addition, it is a variable length by n = 0-22. “Game information 1” is game information 1 notified to CU 3 last time. “Game information n” is game information n notified to CU 3 last time. The game information n includes, for example, the type information and the game winning ball information notified to the CU 3 last time.

  Note that “previous final transmission addition serial number” is a serial number stored on the CU 3 side and the P base 2 as the previous final transmission addition serial number when the status information request is received in the P 3 and the P 3 is transmitted.

  In the recovery process (game information) of P unit 2, “store code” and “SC substrate ID” notified from the security substrate 325 in the counting history sequence to be described later, “store code” held by P unit 2, and A match determination with “SC substrate ID” is performed, and if “store code” does not match, recovery data is processed as nothing. If they match, the following processing is performed.

  When there is recovery data of gaming information, store “presence or absence of storing gaming information”: Yes: Set “previous number of gaming balls” to “previous number of gaming balls”, “preceding ball number of counting balls” last time The recovery data held by the P-unit 2 is set to the “count serial number”, the previous “number of game information” and the previous “game information 1 to n”. When there is no recovery data of gaming information, or when the last transmission serial number is 0 last time, store "presence of game information storage" to no storage "0x00", last "game ball information", last "count request ball number", last time The "counting serial number" and the previous "number of game information" are set to ALL "0". However, the game ball number sets the game ball number notified last time. If all the store codes held by P unit 2 are “F” (hexadecimal number), it is determined that the store codes match.

  If it is determined that the “store code” notified from the security board 325 does not match the store code stored in the P platform 2, it is processed as no card. That is, ALL “0” is set for “previous insertion card ID” and “previous card insertion time”.

  The P-unit 2 stores the serial number at the time of the status information request response as the last transmission serial number last time. If the "store code" and the "SC substrate ID" notified from the security substrate 325 do not match the information held in the P unit, notification is made as the last transmission serial number = 0 last time. If the "store code" and the "SC substrate ID" notified from the security board 325 are compared with the information held in the P unit, the last transmitted serial number stored last time is notified if they match.

  When transmitting the status information response, the P-unit 2 stores the counting serial number as the previous last transmission counting serial number. If the "store code" and the "SC substrate ID" notified from the SC 325b do not match the information stored in the P unit, the last transmission count serial number of the previous time is notified as "0". If the "store code" and the "SC substrate ID" notified from the security substrate 325 are compared with the information stored in the P unit, the stored last transmission count serial number is notified if they match.

  In addition, if the processing of the “last transmission serial number notified last time” notified from the P unit 2 is not performed, the CU 3 performs recovery processing using the previous game table information. When the processing of “last transmission serial number last time” is performed, the CU 3 performs recovery processing using only the previous game table information. However, recovery of the number of balls is not performed.

  In addition, when the recovery process can not be performed due to a mismatch in the communication partner (for example, replacement of CU3 or P platform 2), manual correction by POS based on the display information of P platform 2 is conceivable. For example, it is conceivable to display the display information of the P-table 2 using the liquid crystal display screen of the variable display device 278. Alternatively, it is also conceivable to further provide a display controlled by the payout control unit 171 with respect to the P-table 2, and to display information for hand correction on the display. In addition, POS is a prize management system, and performs prize exchange and management of prizes. In addition, POS is not limited to those performing prize exchange and management of prizes, and records sales information of goods every time they sell goods in a store, and uses the total result as inventory management and marketing material at general point of sale It may be management (Point Of Sales system).

<< 3. Recovery request 2, 4. Recovery response 2 >>
A command named recovery request 2 is transmitted from CU 3 to P 2. The command of the recovery request 2 is to notify the P-unit 2 of the addition recovery information. In response to the recovery request 2, a response named “recovery response 2” is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. The response of the recovery response 2 is to notify the processing result of the addition recovery information to the CU 3.

  The command of the recovery request 2 is to notify the addition recovery information to the P base 2 and includes data of "serial number", "command", "previous final transmission addition serial number" and "additional ball number" There is. Since "serial number" and "command" are the same as described above, the description will not be repeated. The recovery request 2 is transmitted when it is determined that the additional ball recovery processing needs to be performed in the P platform 2 and the CU 3 is present. CU3 compares the "previous final transmission addition serial number" contained in the recovery response received from P unit 2 with the "previous final transmission addition serial number" stored by itself, and in the case of a match, the additional ball recovery It is determined that there is no need for processing, and in the case of incoincidence, it is determined that there is a need for additional ball recovery processing. When it is determined that the additional ball recovery processing is necessary, the recovery request 2 is transmitted.

  The “previous final transmission addition serial number” included in the recovery request 2 is data of the addition serial number of the command of the state information request transmitted last to the P base 2 at the previous connection, and the “additional ball number” is the game ball It is data of the number of addition balls.

  Next, the recovery process of the P-unit 2 will be described in detail. In the recovery process of P unit 2, if P unit 2 has not carried out the processing of the “previous final transmission serial number” notified from CU 3 based on recovery request 2, it is referred to the number of added balls to be a game ball It is a process of performing addition to this.

  The response of the recovery response 2 is to notify the processing result of the added recovery information to the CU 3 by the P-unit 2 and includes “serial number”, “command” and “recovery result”. The “recovery result” is “0x00” for the recovery result process OK, and “0x01” for the recovery result process NG. When the P-table 2 can not receive the number of added balls, a process NG is returned as a recovery result.

  When performing recovery processing (number of added balls) of P stand 2, if P stand 2 has not carried out the process of "previous final transmission addition serial number" notified from CU3, it is processed as "recovery result" in CU3 and OK , And the number of addition balls notified from CU3 is set in the addition register to notify the user program. When the number of additional balls notified from CU3 = 0, the number of additional balls = 0 is set in the addition register, the user program is notified, and processing OK is returned to CU3. However, when the CU status of the status information request, which will be described later, is the gaming ball addition request (Bit = 1) and the gaming machine status 1 responds with the gaming ball addition result (Bit5 = 1) in the status information response, the CU3 “Recovers” As a result, the process NG is returned, the number of added balls = 0 is set in the addition register, and the user program is notified.

  If the "previous final transmission addition serial number" notified from CU3 is the same as the "previous final transmission addition serial number" held by the chip P2, set the number of additional balls = 0 in the addition register, It notifies the user program, and sends a process NG as a "recovery result" to CU3. If "previous final transmission addition sequence number" notified from CU3 = 0, regardless of the addition ball number notified from CU3, the addition ball number = 0 is set in the addition register, and the user program is notified of it, and CU3 is notified. Reply processing OK.

  Also, at the timing when the recovery process is completed (for example, the timing when the recovery completion flag is set), the "last transmission addition sequence number notified last time" notified from CU3 is notified to the user program via the register regardless of the recovery result. . When the recovery request 2 is not received, the “last transmission addition serial number held by the chip of P base 2” is notified to the user program at the timing when the recovery process is completed.

<< 5. Communication start request, 6. Communication start response >>
A command of communication start request is transmitted from CU 3 to P 2. The command for communication start request is for requesting the P unit 2 to start communication. In response to the communication start request, a response to the communication start response is transmitted from P unit 2 to CU3. The response to the communication start response is to send a communication start to the CU3.

  The command of the communication start request is to notify the P unit 2 that the communication has normally started. The P-unit 2 having received the communication start request clears the recovery information stored so far. The command of communication start request includes data of "serial number" and "command". Since "serial number" and "command" are the same as described above, the description will not be repeated. After the communication start request, the CU 3 sets the counting serial number to “0” (initial value), and after the P base 2 receives the communication start request, sets the counting serial number to “0” (initial value).

  The response of the communication start response is to notify the CU 3 that the communication has normally started, and the CU 3 clears the recovery information. The response to the communication start response includes data of "serial number" and "command". Since "serial number" and "command" are the same as described above, the description will not be repeated.

<< 7. Communication termination request, 8. Communication end response >>
A command of communication termination request is transmitted from CU 3 to P 2. The communication end request command is for requesting the P unit 2 to end the communication. In response to the communication termination request, a response of the communication termination response is transmitted from the P-unit 2 to the CU3. The response of the communication end response is to return the communication end to the CU 3.

  The command of communication end request is to notify the P unit 2 that the communication is normally ended, and includes data of "serial number" and "command". Since "serial number" and "command" are the same as described above, the description will not be repeated.

  The response of the communication end response is to notify the CU 3 that the communication has normally ended, and after the notification, the CU 3 and the P unit 2 stop the communication and wait for the restart. The response of the communication end response includes data of "serial number" and "command". Since "serial number" and "command" are the same as described above, the description will not be repeated.

<< 9. Status information request >>
A command of status information request is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P base 2. The command of this status information request is to request the status of CU 3 from P-unit 2. The CU 3 uses this command to periodically check the state of the P base 2. Further, the command of the state information request includes the number of added balls from the side of CU3 to the side of P base 2 shown in FIG.

  Specific data of this status information request includes "serial number", "command", "CU status", "number of additional balls", "addition serial number", "count serial number", "ball unit price" and "count reception time" Contains the data of. Since "serial number" and "command" are the same as described above, the description will not be repeated.

  The "CU state" indicates the state of CU3 notified to the P base 2. When Bit 0 is "1", it indicates that the card is being inserted, and when "0", it indicates that the card is not inserted. That is, Bit 0 represents a state in which a card (general card / membership card) is inserted in CU3. In addition, the general card is inserted by depositing on a stock card (general 0 yen 0 ball card) stocked in advance in the card stock unit of CU3.

  When Bit 1 is “1”, the card unit is being opened, and when it is “0,” the card unit is being closed. That is, the bit 1 notifies the P-unit 2 of the card unit opening state according to the state of CU3. The timing at which the card unit opening is notified is, for example, when the opening is completed. The timing at which the card unit is closed is notified, for example, when the store is closed. When the same state is changed from opening to closing, the P platform 2 notifies CU3 of all the game balls held therein as the number of counting balls by the state information response.

  When Bit 2 is “1”, the card return preparation is shown, and when “0”, the card preparation except for card return preparation is shown. CU3 notifies P stand 2 that "card return preparation is in progress" for a predetermined time (10 seconds) by setting this bit at each operation of card return, simple leaving, and meal break. When the operation of the count button 28 is detected, if the status information request that the bit in preparation for returning the card is on is received, whether the P unit 2 has operated the count button once or has operated multiple times All the stored game balls are notified to CU3 by the state information response as the number of counting balls regardless of or regardless of the operation continuation time.

  When Bit 3 is "1", the game ball addition request is shown, and when it is "0", no game ball addition request is shown. That is, Bit 3 requests addition (number of added balls) of the game balls at the time of operation of ball lending, ball bearing payout, and storage ball dispensing.

  When Bit 4 is "1", count ball reception completion, "0" shows count ball non-reception respectively. Bit 4 notifies P 2 that the receipt of the counting ball has been completed. That is, it is used to confirm the delivery of the response "number of balls" of the status information response. The P unit 2 checks whether the counting serial number is the same as that of the P unit 2 when the count ball reception completion is received, and notifies the CU 3 without subtracting the number of game balls if the serial numbers do not match.

  When Bit 5 is “1”, “0” indicates completion of card removal, while waiting for card removal. The bit 5 notifies the P unit 2 of the state of waiting for card removal from the CU 3. Note that Bit6 to Bit7 are unused.

  The “number of additional balls” is the number of additional balls of the game ball, and the data of the number of additional balls is valid only when Bit 3 of the CU state is “1”. The “addition serial number” is a sequence number for addition (0 to 255), and when the game ball addition request is made, the sequence number is updated (+1) and notified. The “counting serial number” is a counting sequence number (0 to 255), and the counting serial number received at the time of counting request is notified as it is. However, if the continuity of the counting serial number can not be established, the counting will not be received.

  The “ball unit price” is a ball unit price (0.01 yen to 99.99 yen) per ball of a game ball to be played in P stand 2. The ball unit price notified from CU3 to P platform 2 is stored, for example, in the RAM of payout control substrate 17 of P platform 2. Then, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the P-table 2 notifies the ball unit price stored in the RAM to the CU 3 by the state information response. Specifically, when recovery information for recovering from the incommunicable state is requested from the CU3 to the P2 (a recovery request command is transmitted from the CU3), the P2 receives a ball for the response of the recovery response. Set the unit price and send it to CU3. That is, the ball unit price is not output to the outside except for notifying CU3 at the time of recovery response. The ball unit price stored in P unit 2 is set in the response of the recovery response when the recovery request command is sent from CU3, and sent to CU3. As a result, it is possible to accurately grasp the ball unit price of the game ball played on the P platform 2 before recovery, and to resume and play the game with an appropriate game value to the player after recovery. In addition, by not outputting the ball unit price stored in P unit 2 to the outside except notifying CU3 at the time of recovery response, security is ensured so that the ball unit price is not changed illegally. Furthermore, the ball unit price stored in the P unit 2 prohibits the new ball unit price from being overwritten when the P unit 2 holds the number of game balls. Even when the P unit 2 holds the number of game balls, the ball unit price stored in the P unit 2 is allowed to be overwritten, and the number of game balls held is converted into a unit price overwritten and displayed. May be updated.

  The “count reception time” is information for notifying the P base 2 of the time when the CU 3 receives the count request from the P base 2. The Bit 4 in the CU state (play count reception response for game balls) is “1” (CU). It is effective only when it is completed. It should be noted that the information of “counted reception time” is notified to P unit 2 but is processed only within the CPU of payout control section 171 and is not notified to the user program and stored in RAM etc. accessible from the outside Absent. Therefore, since the information of “counted reception time” is deleted in the CPU of the payout control unit 171, security can be ensured.

<< 10. Status information response >>
In response to the status information request, a response of the status information response is transmitted from P base 2 to CU3. The response of the status information response is to notify the CU 3 of the information and status of the P-unit 2. The response of the state information response includes the latest gaming machine information and the number of game balls shown in FIG.

  Specific data of this status information response includes "serial number", "command", "number of game balls", "number of fired balls", "number of balls passed outro", "total ball number", "count request ball" Data of “number”, “counting serial number”, “firing strength”, “play game state”, “corruption detection information” and “gaming information” are included. Since "serial number" and "command" are the same as described above, the description will not be repeated.

  The “number of game balls” is the current number of game balls (the number of game balls as a result of calculation of addition / subtraction). The “number of game balls” is calculated by using the “total prize ball number”, the “number of fired balls” and the “number of counting balls” described later by the CU 3 and the number of game balls held by the CU 3. Thereafter, CU3 checks whether the calculated number of gaming balls of CU3 matches the number of gaming balls of P platform 2.

  The “number of fired balls” is the number of fired balls (when there are a plurality of fired balls at the time of transmission, they are added up). However, if there is a back ball number, the back ball number is subtracted. That is, the "number of fired balls" (subtraction) is data to be subtracted from the number of game balls held by the CU3. When the data is received without holding the card, the CU 3 does not subtract the number of game balls. In addition, CU3 does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by CU3 itself is zero.

  The “out-out passage passing ball count” is the number of balls that have passed through the out-out port 154 (when there are a plurality of passing balls at the time of transmission, they are summed up).

  The “total prize ball number” is the sum of the prize ball numbers of the prize ball information 1-n. The winning ball information 1-n is, for example, the number of winning balls for each winning opening type such as a starting opening, a big winning opening, a winning opening (ordinary winning opening). The “total prize ball number” (addition) does not include the “addition required ball number” transmitted from the CU 3. In addition, the CU 3 adds data of the total award ball number to the held game number. When the data of the total award ball number is received without holding the card, the CU 3 does not add the number of game balls.

  The “count request ball number” is the number of game balls requested to be counted. That is, the “number of counting balls” (subtraction) is data to be subtracted from the number of gaming balls held by the CU 3 and added to the number of balls possessed by the card. Note that the number of counting balls is not used for the data of the number of subtracting balls to be transmitted from P 2 to CU 3. Further, when the data is received without holding the card, the CU 3 does not subtract the number of game balls. In addition, CU3 does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by CU3 itself is zero.

  However, when the card unit opening status changes from opening to closing, the gaming balls held by the gaming machine are counted and set as the number of counting balls. When the card unit opening state is in the opening state, the game ball is counted by the operation of the counting button 28 and set as the number of counting balls. However, when the card unit opening status changes from opening to closing, the game balls are automatically counted without waiting for the operation of the counting button 28 and set as the number of counting balls.

  The “counting serial number” is a counting sequence number (0 to 255), and is notified by updating (+1) the sequence number at the time of counting request.

The “launch intensity” is information on the launch intensity of the game ball.
The “play game status” indicates the status of the P base 2 at the time when the command of the status information request is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P base 2, “play game status 1”, “play game status 2”, “ The game state 3 "and the" game error state "information is included.

  Bit 0 of "play game state 1" indicates whether the game is permitted or prohibited. When "0", the game is permitted, and when "1", the game is prohibited. Bit 1 indicates whether the fan (player) is playing (balls are firing) or not, and when it is 0 ′ ′, it is in standby (when the fans are not firing balls), when it is “1”. The game is in progress (the fan is firing the ball) However, there is a game ball and the game is in progress in the state where the launch handle (ball hitting operation handle 25) is touched (the touch sensor is touched).

  Bit 2 indicates the presence or absence of a game ball (detection of no game ball). When "0", there are no game balls, and when "1", there are no game balls. Bit 3 indicates whether or not the whereabouts of all the fired balls are determined while the firing of the balls is stopped. That is, it indicates whether all the floating balls in the game area 27 have been collected. However, it excludes the firing stop of the ball by the firing stop switch (also called a single shot switch). When the game is "0", the game is not completed (all balls are undecided), and when "1", the game is completed (all balls are fixed). In addition, if it is not possible to confirm completion of the game for 15 seconds or more after stopping the firing of the ball, the P-table 2 times out and completes the game.

  Bit 3 indicates whether or not the whereabouts of all the fired balls are determined while the firing of the balls is stopped. When "0", the game ball is not determined (all balls are in the undetermined state), and when "1", the game balls are determined (the state in which all the balls are determined). Here, after stopping the firing of the ball, if it is not possible to confirm the whereabouts of the game ball, for example, for 15 seconds or more, the P unit 2 times out and decides the game ball. In addition, when the power is turned on or the RAM is cleared, the P-table 2 is set in a state where the whereabouts of the game ball is determined (game ball determined).

  Bit 4 indicates the presence / absence of the counting request of the game ball (the pressing of the counting button). When "0", there is no request, and when "1", there is a demand for payout of the counting ball at the start of counting. When the counting operation is detected, the P-unit transmits the status information response of the counting request ON to the CU 3 to confirm whether the counting request is received. When it is "1", it is a counting request. Bit 5 indicates the processing result of the game ball addition, and when it is “0”, addition is OK, and when it is “1”, it is addition NG. In addition, when the P base 2 makes an addition NG response, notification is made without updating the addition serial number. Bit 6 indicates the pressed state of the firing stop switch, and is "0" when the release state is released, and "1" when the switch is pressed. Bit 7 is a spare.

  Bit 0 of "game console state 2" represents a big hit 1 of the big hit information (all big hits) and sets "1" in all the big hits. Bit 1 represents the big hit 2 (big hit + small hit) of the big hit information, and sets “1” in all the big hit middle and small hit. Bit 2 represents the big hit 3 of the big hit information (the big hit of the delivery size), and sets “1” to the big hit of the large delivery balls. Bit 3 represents the big hit 4 of the big hit information (the big hit of the small dropout ball), and sets “1” to the big hit of the small small dropout ball. Bit 4 represents the big hit 5 of the big hit information (big hit in the out ball), and the out ball sets "1" in the middle big hit. Bit5 to Bit7 are spares.

  Bit 0 of "play game state 3" represents a big hit of the game state information + time drop, and "1" is set for the big hit and time drop. Bit 1 indicates that the game state information is in the process of being changed, and "1" is set in the case of being changed. Bit 2 indicates the time of the game state information, and "1" is set during the time. Bit 3 indicates that the gaming state information is fluctuating, and "1" is set during fluctuating. Bit4 to Bit7 are spares.

  The “play game error state” indicates an error code being generated in the P-unit 2, and each error code is expressed using Bit0 to Bit5. Note that no error occurs when Bit0 to Bit5 are all "0". Bit 6 is information for specifying a place where an error has occurred, and represents "payout control" when it is "0" and main control when it is "1". Bit 7 indicates an error output method, and when it is “0”, it indicates only an alert, and when it is “1”, it indicates an alert and an output to the hall server 801.

  The "corruption detection information" is information detected by the P-unit 2 at the time when the command of the status information request is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P-unit 2, "incorrectness detection state 1", "incorrectness detection state 2" , And “information of fraud detection information 1” to “cheating detection information 4” and “addition serial number”.

  The “corruption detection state 1” is fraud detection information of the main control board 16. Bit 0 of the "incorrectness detection state 1" indicates that it is improper detection information of radio wave sensor detection when "1". Bit 1 indicates that the magnetic sensor is not detected as positive detection information when it is "1". Bit 2 indicates that it is fraud detection information of fraudulent prize detection when "1". Bit3 to Bit7 are spares.

  The “corruption detection state 2” is fraud detection information of the payout control board 17. Bit 0 of the "incorrect detection state 2" indicates that it is the open detection information of the glass plate when "1". Bit 1 indicates that it is fraud detection information for opening the frame when "1". Bit 2 indicates that it is fraud detection information of radio wave sensor detection when "1". Bit 3 indicates that it is fraudulent detection information of proximity sensor abnormality when "1". Bit 4 indicates that it is the fraud detection information of the prize ball god detection when "1". Here, "Goto" is an injustice in which a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine acquires balls in an illegal manner. Bit 5 indicates that it is the fraud detection information of compound goth detection when “1”. Bit 6 indicates that it is fraud detection information of fraudulent addition detection when "1". Bit 7 indicates that it is fraud detection information of nighttime frame opening / monitoring SW abnormality detection when “1”.

  The “corruption detection information 1” is data indicating information on the prize ball sensor god detection (the number of winning combination misalignment balls). The "corruption detection information 1" is valid when Bit 4 of the "corruption detection state 2" is "1". The “corruption detection information 2” is data indicating information on combined sensor god detection (firing / out mismatched ball number). That is, it is data indicating information when a mismatch between the number of fired balls and the number of out balls (the number of out-port passing balls) is detected. The “corruption detection information 2” is valid when Bit 5 of the “corruption detection state 2” is “1”. The "corruption detection information 3" is data indicating information on fraudulent addition detection (the number of fraudulent addition balls). The "corruption detection information 3" is valid when Bit 6 of the "corruption detection state 2" is "1". The "corruption detection information 4" is data indicating nighttime frame opening information. The “corruption detection information 4” is valid when Bit 7 of the “corruption detection state 2” is “1”.

  Bit 7 of "incorrectness detection information 4" is information indicating whether nighttime monitoring switch abnormality 4 is occurring, and represents "normal" when it is "0" and abnormality 4 when it is "1". Bit 6 is information indicating whether nighttime monitoring switch abnormality 3 has occurred, and represents "normal" when it is "0" and abnormality 3 when it is "1". Bit 5 is information indicating whether the nighttime monitoring switch abnormality 2 is occurring, and represents "normal" when it is "0" and abnormality 2 when it is "1". Bit 4 is information indicating whether the nighttime monitoring switch abnormality 1 is occurring, and represents "normal" when it is "0" and abnormality 1 when it is "1". Bits 0 to 3 are information indicating the number of times the main body frame has been opened. When the number is "0", no opening is made, and "1" to "15" are the number of times the opening is made. The number of times of release is counted up to 15 times, and the count after 16 times is held at 15 times.

  "Addition serial number" is a sequence number for addition, and notifies the serial number received upon addition request as it is. However, when the continuity of the addition serial number is not established, the addition NG is notified.

  The “corruption detection state 3” is fraud detection information of the payout control board 17. Bit 0 of the "corruption detection state 3" indicates that it is the fraud detection information of other shop game ball detection when "1". Bit 5 of “corruption detection state 3” indicates that the card unit to which P unit 2 was connected in the past was “CU3D for development” when “1” (CU connection for development). Bit 6 of "corruption detection state 3" indicates that the card unit to which P unit 2 was connected in the past was "game board development jig 3E" when "1" (game board development jig connection) . Bit 7 of the "corruption detection state 3" indicates that the connected gaming machine is the gaming machine simulator 2A when it is "1" (gaming machine simulator connection). Bit 1 to Bit 4 are spares. It should be noted that in the other store game ball detection, for example, a sensor is provided on a collection ball passage path of P units, the sensor reads identification information (such as marking on the surface) provided on the game ball, and It is determined whether or not it matches the identification information. In the case of non-coincidence, it is notified that CU3 is made by setting Bit0 of “corruption detection state 3” to “1”, since the game ball of another store is mixed in the game ball.

  "Game information" is information of P base 2 when a command of status information request is transmitted from CU3 to P base 2, "number of game information", "type information 1" to "type information n" And “count information 1” to “count information n”.

  “The number of game information” is the number (n) of type information and count information, and n = 0 to 22 (variable length). “Type information 1” to “type information n” indicate game type information 1 to game type information n, respectively. In the type information, Bit 4 to Bit 7 are data type information and indicate the data type of game information. When "0", no information, when "1", start opening, when "2", big winning opening, In the case of "3", the winning opening, in the case of "4" the number of symbol stops, in the case of "5" a big hit, in the case of "6" it is a small hit. Bit 0 to Bit 3 are data number information and indicate the data number for each data type of game information, and "0" indicates no information, and "1" to "15" indicate the respective data numbers. . For example, when the data type is a big hit of "5", the data number is "1" when it is "1", "2" when "2" is small, "3" when "24", "4" to "6" It is spare time. When the data type is a small hit of "6", the data number is a small hit when "1", and it is a spare when "2" to "15".

  “Count information 1” to “count information n” respectively indicate game count information 1 to game count information n.

  Here, when the data type is a starting opening, a large winning opening, and a small winning opening, Bit 4 to Bit 7 are information on the number of winning balls, and the number of winning balls for winning each time for game information type information A number is shown, and when "1" to "15", data of the number of balls is displayed. Further, Bit0 to Bit3 are information on the number of winnings, and the number of winnings (total) is shown for each type information of the gaming machine information, and when "1" to "15", data on the number of winnings are respectively shown. In the count information, when the data type is symbol stop frequency, Bit 4 to Bit 7 are fixed to "0", and Bit 0 to Bit 3 indicate the symbol stop frequency, and when "1" to "15", the symbol stop frequency Represents In the count information, if the data type is a big hit or a small hit, Bit 4 to Bit 7 are fixed to "0", Bit 0 to Bit 3 indicate the number of hits, and "1" to "15" indicates the number of hits. Is represented.

  Furthermore, the response of the state information response includes the “emission intensity signal”, the “passing area signal”, the “during variation signal”, and the “handle touch signal”.

  The “emission intensity signal” indicates the emission intensity T which is the detection result of the above-described emission intensity sensor 19. As described above, in the present embodiment, the firing intensity T is a variable value that changes from 0 (minimum value) to 99 (maximum value) according to the amount of steering wheel operation. If the communication interval (for example, 200 msec) between P unit 2 and CU 3 is shorter than the firing interval for pachinko balls (for example, 0.6 sec), the firing intensity signal is basically output for each ball become. Alternatively, the emission intensity signal may be output as a set with data indicating whether or not it was actually emitted.

  The “passing area signal” indicates the above-described passing area signal. As described above, in the present embodiment, the passband signal is any of the passband signals A1 to A8. The emission intensity T at the time when each passage area signal is detected is linked to each passage area signal.

  The "during change signal" indicates that the symbol displayed on the variable display device 278 is changed as the pachinko ball passes through one of the start winning openings 275, 276, 277.

  The “handle touch signal” indicates that the touch sensor is detecting that the player is touching the bat operating handle 25.

<< 11. 12. Card insertion notice, Card insertion response >>
A command for card insertion notification is sent from CU3 to P2. The command of the card insertion notification is to notify the P base 2 of the card insertion. In response to the card insertion notification, a response of a card insertion response is transmitted from P base 2 to CU3. The response to this card insertion response is a response to the effect that the card insertion notification has been received from CU3.

  The card insertion notification command notifies the card ID and insertion time of the inserted card to the P base 2 at the time of card insertion, “serial number”, “command”, “card ID”, “card insertion time”, Data of “store code” and “SC substrate ID” are included. Since "serial number" and "command" are the same as described above, the description will not be repeated.

  The “card ID” is identification ID information of the IC card inserted in the CU 3 and is used in association with the game ball held by the P-base 2. The "card insertion time" is the time when the IC card is inserted into the CU3 card insertion / ejection slot 309 (see FIG. 1), the year information is 2 digits YY, the month information is 2 digits MM, and the day information is 2 digits DD, time information is represented by 2 digits hh, minute information is represented by 2 digits mm, and second information is represented by 2 digits ss. The card insertion time is used to determine whether the game ball held by P stand 2 is a ball on the day or a ball in the past.

  The “store code” is a store identification code in which the CU 3 is installed, and is used to be associated with the game ball held by the P-unit 2. It is also used to determine whether CU3 has been moved to a store. CU3 stores the store code in which it is installed. Note that the store code is added information from the security board 325 and notified to the P unit. The “SC substrate ID” is an SC substrate ID for identifying the CU 3 and is used to determine whether the CU 3 has been replaced. The SC substrate ID is added to the information from the security substrate 325 and notified to the P base 2. The payout control unit 171 of the P-table 2 stores information notified by the card insertion notification command such as the card ID (C-ID) and the card insertion time. The "store code" and the "SC substrate ID" are deleted in the payout control circuit without notifying the user program side.

  The response to the card insertion response is to notify the CU 3 that the card insertion notification has been received normally, and includes data of “serial number” and “command”. Since "serial number" and "command" are the same as described above, the description will not be repeated.

  The operation of the platform 2 at the time of card insertion / return notification will be described. First, whether a membership card or a general card is inserted into the card insertion / ejection slot 309 of CU3 or a general 0 yen ball card is deposited, a card insertion notice is sent to the P platform 2 as a card insertion notification. Information such as ID and card insertion time is notified. When there is a card insertion notification, the P-base 2 backs up information such as the card ID and the card insertion time. However, when the card insertion notification command is received and the status information request including the information of CU3 status being card insertion status (bit 0 of CU status = 1) is received (P card 2 determines card insertion status In the case, the P-unit 2 sends only a response without backing up information such as card ID and card insertion time. Also, when the card return button 322 of CU3 is pressed, a card return notification is given to the P platform 2, and the P platform 2 clears information such as the card ID and card insertion time that has been backed up. The condition for canceling the card insertion state is when P base 2 receives the card return notification command.

<< 13. Card return notice, 14. Card return response >>
The command of the card return notification is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2. The command for the card return notification is to notify the P platform 2 of the card return. In response to the card return notification, a response of a card return response is sent from P platform 2 to CU3. The response of the card return response is to return the card return to the CU3.

  The command of the card return notification is to notify the card return to the P base 2. The CU 3 transmits the notification when the "card return" button is pressed. The card return notice includes data of "serial number" and "command". Since "serial number" and "command" are the same as described above, the description will not be repeated.

  The response of the card return response is to transmit a response of the card return notification to the CU 3 and includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “card ID”, and “card insertion time”. Since "serial number", "command", "card ID" and "card insertion time" are the same as those described above, the description will not be repeated. In the case of a card return response, CU3 does not return the card if the card ID included in the command does not match the ID of the currently inserted card, or if there is a problem with the card insertion time included in the command. Perform processing such as prohibiting writing on the card with balls.

  Here, the operation of the platform 2 at the time of the card insertion notification or the card return notification will be described. At the time of card insertion notification, if operation of member card insertion, general card insertion, or deposit to a general 0 yen ball card is performed at CU3, the P-base 2 backs up the card ID and the card insertion time. At the time of the card return notification, when the operation of pressing the “card return” button is performed in CU3, the P-base 2 clears the card ID and the card insertion time.

<< 15. Communication test request, 16. Communication test response >>
A command of a communication test request is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P base 2. The command of this communication test request is to notify the test data to the P-unit 2. In response to the communication test request, a response of a communication test response is transmitted from P unit 2 to CU3. The response of this card return response is to return test data to CU3.

  The command of the communication test request is to notify the test data to the P-unit 2. The test data to be notified to the P-unit 2 is not encrypted. The command of the communication test request includes data of “serial number”, “command”, and “test data”. Since "serial number" and "command" are the same as described above, the description will not be repeated. “Test data” is test data to be notified to the P-unit 2 and is arbitrary data.

  The response of the communication test response notifies the CU 3 of test data. The test data to be notified to CU3 is not encrypted either. The response of the communication test response includes data of “serial number”, “command”, and “test data”. Since "serial number" and "command" are the same as described above, the description will not be repeated. “Test data” is test data to be notified to the CU 3 and is arbitrary data.

<< 17. Counting history request, 18. Counting history response >>
A command of counting history request is transmitted from CU 3 to P 2. The command of the counting history request is for requesting the counting history to the P-unit 2. In response to the counting history request, a response of the counting history response is transmitted from P unit 2 to CU3. The response of the counting history response is to notify the counting history to the CU 3.

  The command of the counting history request requests the counting history with respect to the P-unit 2, and the CU 3 transmits to the P-unit 2 in the counting history sequence after the authentication sequence. The counting history request includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “store code”, and “SC substrate ID”. Since "serial number" and "command" are the same as described above, the description will not be repeated.

  The “store code” is a store identification code in which the CU 3 is installed, and is used to be associated with the game ball held by the P-unit 2. Note that the store code is added information from the security board 325 and notified to the P unit. The “SC substrate ID” is an SC substrate ID for identifying the CU 3 and is used to determine whether the CU 3 has been replaced. The SC substrate ID is added to the information from the security substrate 325 and notified to the P base 2.

  The detection process of the shipping maker code of the SC substrate ID will be described. The SC substrate ID includes an identification code and a shipping maker code. The P unit recognizes a connected unit (such as a commercial CU 3 or a development unit) by detecting a shipping maker code included in the SC substrate ID.

  Specifically, the case of detecting whether the unit P to be connected is a connection device other than a commercial CU 3 (specifically, a development unit or a game board development jig) will be described. If the game history when these development units and game board development jigs not used for commercial use are connected is taken over by the unit (CU3) used for commercial use connected after that, the game ball granted at the time of development Can cause games to be played at the time of commercial use. Therefore, in order to avoid the problem, when connected to the unit, the P-unit 2 detects whether or not a development unit or game board development jig is connected, and stores the result in the recovery register.

  When the P unit 2 is connected to the unit, the shipment maker code of the SC board ID before the counting history request and the counting history request are performed to detect whether the development unit or the game board development jig is connected when the unit is connected. The shipping maker code of the later SC substrate ID is compared. First, if the shipping maker code of the SC board ID before the counting history request is "none", regardless of the shipping maker code of the SC board ID after the counting history request, the development unit and the game board development jig are detected do not do. Even when the shipping maker code of the SC board ID before the counting history request matches the shipping maker code of the SC board ID after the counting history request, it is not detected as a development unit or a game board development jig.

  However, if the upper byte matches and the lower byte differs between the shipping maker code of the SC board ID before the counting history request and the shipping maker code of the SC board ID after the counting history request, the development unit is detected. Also, if the upper byte of the shipping maker code of the SC board ID before the counting history request is the code of the commercial unit, and the upper byte of the shipping maker code of the SC board ID after the counting history request is a code other than the game board development jig Also detect the development unit. The upper byte of the shipping maker code of the SC board ID before the counting history request is the commercial unit code, and the upper byte of the shipping maker code of the SC board ID after the counting history request is the game board development jig code, the game board Detect as development jig.

  The P unit 2 stores the detection that the development unit is connected by setting Bit 4 of the recovery register to "1", and the detection that the game board development jig is connected is the recovery register Is stored by setting "Bit 5" to "1".

  Also, when the shipping maker code of the SC board ID before the counting history request is "none", the shipping maker code of the SC board ID stored in the P base 2 is a unit newly connected after recovery processing is performed. Overwrite the shipment maker code of SC substrate ID. If the shipping maker code of the SC board ID before the counting history request is "presence", the shipping maker code of the SC board ID stored in the P base 2 is subjected to the recovery process if there is no gaming ball to be recovered. After that, the shipping maker code of the SC substrate ID of the unit newly connected is overwritten. However, if there is a game ball to be subjected to recovery processing, the shipment maker code of the SC substrate ID stored in the P-unit 2 is sent to the shipment maker code of the SC substrate ID of a unit newly connected after recovery processing is performed. Do not overwrite. The prohibition state of the overwrite of the shipping maker code of the SC substrate ID is canceled by clearing the RAM of P unit 2 (in particular, clearing the number of game balls). By prohibiting the overwrite of the shipping maker code of the SC substrate ID when there is the number of gaming balls, the number of gaming balls given by the development unit is recovered as the number of gaming balls that can be played by the commercial unit connected thereafter Can be prevented.

  The response of the counting history response is to notify the counting history to the CU 3 and the P base 2 transmits the information of the counting history stored in the P base 2 to the CU 3 in response to the counting history request command. . The counting history response includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “counting history result”, “counting history 1” and “counting history 2”. Since "serial number" and "command" are the same as described above, the description will not be repeated.

  The “counting history result” is information indicating whether or not counting history is stored in P table 2 by the counting history process in P table 2. Here, the counting history is a history of the number of gaming balls paid out from the P base 2 side to the CU 3 side as the counting request ball number from the P base 2 side from the counting request ON state to the counting request OFF state. “Card ID” of “Counter Receipt Response (Counting Response ON)” from CU3 and “Counting Receipt Time” included when accumulated and count number of counting balls paid out until the status of counting request “cumulative count ball” It also contains information on numbers. In addition, in the P platform 2, the history for the past two times (the history of the number of gaming balls in the period from the counting request ON state to the counting request OFF state is regarded as one) is held.

  In the counting history result, “0x00” indicates no history, “0x01” indicates a history (counting history 1 information is present), and “0x02” indicates a history (counting history 2 information is present).

  “Counting history 1” is the latest history (final counting) of the past two times, and information of “card ID”, “counting reception time”, “cumulative counting ball number”, and “number of gaming balls” Contains. "Card ID" is identification information of a card inserted in CU3 at the time of counting request. The “count reception time” is a time when CU 3 receives the number of game balls requested to be counted from P unit 2. The "cumulative counting ball number" is the total number of counting balls counted in the period from the counting request ON state to the counting request OFF state. The “number of game balls” is the number of game balls held in the P platform 2 at the end of the counting.

  “Counting history 2” is the old history (counting before the last counting) of the past two times, “card ID”, “count receiving time”, “cumulative counting ball number”, and “game ball” Contains the information of the number. The information of "card ID", "count reception time", "cumulative count ball number" and "game ball number" is the same type of information as the information included in "count history 1", and the detailed description will not be repeated. .

  Next, conditions for outputting the count history data held by the P-unit 2 to the CU 3 will be described. When the P store 2 matches the “store code” and the “SC substrate ID” held by the “store code” and the “SC substrate ID” included in the count history request command received from the CU 3 in the counting history sequence, The response of the counting history response includes “counting history result”, “counting history 1” and “counting history 2” and outputs it to CU3. In addition, if the “store code” contained in the “count code request command received from CU3” matches the “store code” stored in P table 2, the count history response even if the “SC substrate ID” is different. Is output to CU 3 including the “counting history result”, “counting history 1” and “counting history 2” in the response to This is considering changing the combination of P stand 2 and CU 3 in the store, and it is disadvantageous even if the counting history data stored in P stand 2 is taken over to another CU 3 in the same store Not to give

  However, if the P store 2 is different from the "store code" stored in the "store code" contained in the count history request command received from the CU 3, the count history even if the "SC substrate ID" matches. It is prohibited to output to CU 3 including “count history result”, “count history 1” and “count history 2” in the response of the response. Even if the same CU3 is transferred to another store, it is disadvantageous to the other store if it takes over the count history data even if it is connected to the P base 2 holding the same "SC substrate ID". It is because there is a possibility of giving

  Of course, if P unit 2 is connected to a game board development jig or development unit instead of CU 3 or if it is not connected to any unit, output counting history data stored in P unit 2 There is no. By limiting the output of the count history data, the security of the P system 2 and the gaming system including the P system 2 is enhanced.

<Main sequence in communication between CU and P>
<< Send command and response >>
First, transmission of a command and a response between the CU 3 and the P base 2 will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU3 (primary station) to the P-unit 2 (secondary station), and the P-unit 2 sends a response to the CU 3 in response to the command. That is, transmission of the operation message is a command / response method in which CU3 is a primary station and P2 is a secondary station.

  The period from the transmission of the first command from CU3 to P 2 to the transmission of the next command is controlled to 200 ms, or 0.2 seconds. The period from the transmission of a response from P unit 2 to CU 3 to the transmission of the next response is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds.

  Thus, both the command and the response are transmitted between the CU 3 and the P platform 2 at an interval of 200 ms. On the other hand, in the P-table 2, since 100 pachinko balls are hit into the game area 27 in one minute by operating the hitting operation handle 25, the hitting time interval is 0.6 seconds. As a result, a plurality of commands and responses are transmitted and received during one shot of the ball.

  Therefore, from P unit 2 to CU 3, responses for notifying the amount of change in the number of game balls are transmitted one after another at intervals shorter than the firing time interval of the balls. As a result, the P-unit 2 can finely notify the CU 3 of the amount of change in the number of game balls.

  Here, the transmission interval of the command and the response is 200 ms, but the transmission interval may be longer or shorter than this. It is also conceivable to match it with

<< CU communication line disconnection detection >>
Next, a process when communication disconnection is detected on the CU 3 side will be described. If a response can not be received for 200 ms after the CU 3 transmits a command to the P-unit 2, the same command is transmitted to the P-unit 2 again. Furthermore, if a response can not be received until 200 ms later, a second retransmission of transmitting the same command to the P-unit 2 is performed. The same command is resent to P unit 2 up to 14 times. If the response can not be received from the P-unit 2 even after the 14th retransmission, the CU 3 determines that the communication is abnormal after 3 seconds, and sets it as the "communication disconnection". This communication abnormality may be caused by disconnection of the connector of the CU 3 and the connector of the P base 2, disconnection of the connection wiring, or power disconnection of the P base 2. The CU 3 does not count up the serial number when retransmitting the command.

<< P line side communication line disconnection detection >>
A process in the case where the communication disconnection is detected on the side of the P base 2 will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P-unit 2, and the P-unit 2 responds to the command and returns a response to the CU 3. Thereafter, when the command from the CU 3 is not transmitted to the P unit 2 and continues for 3 seconds, the P unit 2 determines that the communication is disconnected, and stops the driving of the firing motor 18 to stop the game. The cause of the communication disconnection may be disconnection of the connector of CU3 and the connector of P base 2, disconnection of connection wiring, or power disconnection of CU3.

  It should be noted that the command to detect communication disconnection on P unit 2 side, response to recovery request / recovery response, recovery request 2 / recovery response 2, communication start request / communication start response, notification end request / communication end response, and communication Does not include test request / communication test response command / response.

<< Power on >>
Next, the process of the connection sequence when the power is turned on will be described. The sequence process shown in FIG. 8 is a process executed at the time of resuming communication after the communication between the CU 3 and the P-unit 2 ends normally. Specifically, it is executed at the time of resuming communication after the power of the CU 3 is turned off in the standby state in which the card is not inserted. A typical example is a case where one day of business is finished in the game arcade, the power is turned off, and the power is turned on at the start of business the next day.

  First, turn on the power. When the power is turned on, the firing motor 18 is stopped in the P-unit 2 to stop the game and then the communication is started. After that, an authentication sequence is started, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from P platform 2 to CU3. CU3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, inquires whether main chip ID and payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned . If it is registered properly, it will be an appropriate authentication result.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 19 is started, and when the counting history request command is transmitted from CU3 to P 2, the counting history data stored in P 2 is transmitted to CU 3 . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the previous last transmission serial number and the previous last transmission counting serial number to the P-unit 2 and requests the P-unit 2 for recovery information. The P-unit 2 executes count recovery processing with reference to the previous last transmission count sequence number notified from the CU3. Specifically, P unit 2 refers to the last transmission counting serial number in the previous time and assumes that there is no counting request when CU3 has not performed counting processing, and counting when CU3 has already performed counting processing. The game balls are determined by subtracting the number of counting balls from the number of previous game balls.

  After execution of the count recovery process, the P-unit 2 sends the game information recovery data backed up in the P-unit 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) back to the CU 3 as a response (recovery response). The recovery information includes the last transmission serial number of the last time, the card ID in the last insertion, the last card insertion time, the last transmission addition serial number of the last time, the last game table information, and the like.

  In CU3 that has received the recovery response, if the processing of the previous last transmission addition serial number included in the recovery information has not been executed, CU3's addition recovery processing is performed using the previous gaming machine information included in the recovery information. When carrying out the addition ball recovery process, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request 2 to the P base 2 to the P base 2 and transmits recovery data to the P base 2. The recovery data includes the previous last transmission serial number and the number of added balls.

  The P unit 2 having received it executes an addition recovery process based on the received recovery data, and sends the result as a response to the CU 3 (recovery response 2). When the P-table 2 can not receive the number of added balls, a recovery process NG is returned as a recovery result.

  This recovery process is a process for recovering the integrity of each other's data between the CU 3 and the P unit 2. It is not only executed at power on, but also when a problem occurs and is recovered, To be executed.

  Each time CU3 transmits a command such as a recovery request, it counts up the serial number. However, it does not count up when retransmitting a command. When the P-unit 2 receives a command with the same serial number as the previously received serial number, it determines that a communication failure has occurred and the CU 3 has retransmitted the command. CU3 transmits a command, and backs up the serial number when a response of the same serial number is notified from P unit 2. When transmitting the response corresponding to the received command, the P-unit 2 notifies the received serial number to the CU 3 as it is. The P unit 2 backs up the serial number when transmitting the response.

  After the end of the authentication sequence, the CU 3 sets the serial number to “1” and transmits a recovery request command to the P-base 2. The P-unit 2 sends back the received serial number “1” as it is to the CU 3 as a response of the recovery response. Furthermore, CU3 sets the serial number to "2" and transmits the command of recovery request 2 to P-base 2. The P-unit 2 returns the response of the recovery response 2 to the CU 3 as it is with the received serial number “2”.

  After that, the CU 3 counts up the serial number and transmits a communication start request command to the P-unit 2 as “3”. When the CU 3 does not transmit the recovery request 2, the serial number is decremented by one (−1) and “2”. In P stand 2, it receives that and clears recovery data. Then, the P-base 2 returns a response to the communication start response to the CU 3 while keeping the received serial number “3”. Thereafter, transmission and reception of the command of the state information request and the response of the state information response are performed between the CU 3 and the P unit 2.

  The CU 3 counts up the serial number and transmits the command of the status information request to the P-unit 2 as “4”. The command of the status information request includes information on the ball unit price. By the ball unit price being transmitted to P platform 2, P platform 2 can recognize whether the game ball is playing a game with 1 ball 4 yen or playing a game with 1 ball 1 yen . In addition, since the command of the status information request is transmitted at a cycle of 200 ms as described above, it is possible to transmit information of the ball unit price up to three times to the P-unit 2 during a cycle of 600 ms that the game ball is firing is there. Therefore, it becomes possible to change the ball unit price for each one of the game balls played in the P platform 2. If it becomes possible to manage the ball unit price for each small number of game balls (for example, 1 ball unit), the player's request (for example, a desire to play the game slowly with a small amount, the number of remaining game balls in a short time) It is possible to provide a variety of games in accordance with the desire to consume The command of the state information request transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2 described below also includes ball unit price information, but when the ball unit price information is not directly related to the content of the described sequence, no particular description is made.

  In response to that, the P unit 2 updates the gaming machine information, the gaming information and the last transmission serial number last time, and backs up the updated data for each transmission of the response of the state information response. Then, the P-base 2 sends the response of the status information response back to CU3 while keeping the received serial number “4”. Note that the response of the state information response does not include information on the ball unit price. This means that the information on the ball unit price currently being played on the P platform 2 is illegally changed and transmitted to the CU 3 to prevent the fraud on the ball unit price of the game ball managed in the CU 3 . Thereby, the security of the gaming system can be improved.

  In response to this, the CU 3 updates the last transmission sequence number last time, and backs up the updated data each time a response of the status information response is received.

  After that, CU3 counts up the serial number and transmits the command of the status information request to P-base 2 as "5", and P-base 2 CU3 the response of the state information response while keeping the received serial number "5". Reply to

<< Insert Card >>
The processing of the CU 3 and the P platform 2 when the card is inserted will be described. The CU 3 shown in FIG. 9 transmits a command of a status information request including the serial number = n and the card return preparation status = OFF to the P-base 2 before card insertion. In response to that, the P platform 2 sends back to CU3 the response of the status information response including the serial number = n and the gaming prohibition.

  Thereafter, in CU 3, when the card is inserted, the card reader / writer outputs a command signal to load the card into the card reader / writer, and the card reader / writer reads information (card ID etc.) recorded on the taken card. A card insertion process such as receiving the read information is performed. Note that the information (card ID and the like) recorded on the card read by the card reader / writer may be stored in CU3.

  CU3 is in a state of inquiring card information for a predetermined period after the card is inserted. This is in the process of verifying whether the inserted card is appropriate or not, whether it is a membership card registered in the game arcade, or asking questions to the hall server 801, for example, holding balls, balls, remaining amount of cards, etc. It means that the process of displaying a certain thing on the display 312 and displaying it on the display 54 on the side of the P table 2 is being executed.

  Since CU3 does not authenticate the inserted card while displaying that it is inquiring about the card inserted in the display unit 312, state information request including serial number = n + 1, card return preparation state = OFF Send the command of P to P2. In response to that, the P platform 2 sends back to CU3 a response of a status information response including serial number = n + 1 and gaming prohibition. The display control unit 350 of the CU 3 performs display control on the display 54 on the P base 2 side, and displays that the card is being inquired.

  Thereafter, when the inserted card is authenticated, the CU 3 stores the card ID of the card and the card insertion time in the RAM of the CU control unit 323, and serial number = n + 2, card ID, card insertion time, store code And a card insertion notification command including the SC substrate ID to the P-base 2. The store code and the SC board ID are information added to the command of the card insertion notification when the command passes the security board 325. In P stand 2, in response, it backs up the received card ID, card insertion time, shop code and SC board ID data to the RAM etc of payout control section 171, and response of card insertion response including serial number = n + 2 Reply to CU3. Also in CU3, the card ID of the inserted card is stored in the RAM or the like of the CU control unit 323.

  In response to this, CU3 sends a command of status information request including serial number = n + 3 and card return preparation status = ON to P-base 2, thereby notifying P-base 2 of the status that the card is being inserted. . Upon receiving the notification that the card is being inserted, the P unit 2 permits the game, and returns the response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 3 and the gaming permission to the CU 3 so that the gaming permission state is CU3. Notify against

  While the card is inserted, CU3 transmits a command of status information request including serial number = n + 4 and card return preparation status = ON to P-base 2, and P-base 2 responds to status information response including serial number = n + 4 and gaming permission Reply to CU3.

  Furthermore, a case will be described in which a command for card insertion notification is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2 during card insertion. First, CU3 transmits a command for card insertion notification including serial number = n + x, card ID, card insertion time, shop code and SC board ID to P-base 2. When a card insertion notification command is transmitted during card insertion, the transmitted card ID and card insertion time are often different from the card ID of the card being inserted and the card insertion time, and are stored in P 2 There is a high possibility that fraud has been made to intentionally change the card ID or card insertion time.

  Therefore, in the P-base 2, the data of the card ID, the card insertion time, the shop code, and the SC board ID received in response to it are not backed up in the RAM or the like of the payout control unit 171. The determination as to whether or not the card is being inserted in the P platform 2 can be easily determined based on the information of the card return preparation state = ON included in the command of the state information request.

  Next, the P-base 2 sends back a response to the card insertion response including the serial number = n + x to the CU 3 without performing backup of the received card ID, card insertion time and the like. Also in the CU 3, the card ID transmitted in response to the card insertion notification command, the card insertion time, and the like are not stored in the RAM or the like of the CU control unit 323. In this way, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as tampering with the card ID stored in the P platform 2 by intentionally transmitting the card ID to the P platform 2 during card insertion, thereby improving security. Can.

  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an insertion process performed by the CU 3 when a card is inserted into the CU 3. The steps shown by broken lines in the present embodiment indicate the control contents of the modification. The solid arrows indicate the flow of control, and the arrows of the two-dot chain line indicate the flow of transmitted information. In FIG. 10, CU3 executes each step of S1 to S7. In addition, P stand 2 executes S8 to S10 and S12 to S15. More specifically, the effect control board 15 provided in the P-unit 2 executes the deletion process of S8 to S10, S12, S13, and S15, and the transmission process of S14 and S15 is provided by the effect control unit 151. The effect control board 15 thus transmitted transmits to the payout control unit 171, and the payout control unit 171 transmits to the CU3.

  First, the CU determines in step (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 1 whether or not interruption is in progress. Whether or not this interruption is in progress is determined based on whether or not the interruption operation is performed and the sequence of the game interruption is executed. If interruption is in progress, it is determined in S2 whether the C-ID and type of the inserted card match the C-ID and type of the interrupted operation card, and if they do not match, it is determined in S5. Eject the inserted card and shift to standby mode. In FIG. 10, the illustration of the “type” is omitted.

  On the other hand, when the C-ID of the inserted card and the type match the C-ID and the type of the interrupted card, the player who has performed the interrupted operation returns to the gaming machine again to start the game. In order to be determined, the control proceeds to step S4, the suspended state is released, and in step S6, processing for resuming the game is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1 that the card is not being interrupted, it is determined in S3a whether the card is already inserted. Whether or not this insertion is in progress is determined based on whether or not the card reader provided in the card insertion / ejection slot 309 receives a card. If it is determined in S3a that the card is not being inserted, a process of storing the C-ID and type of the inserted card and transmitting it to the P-table 2 is performed in S3. The P-table 2 receives the C-ID and the type, and stores the received C-ID and the type and the backup area (for example, the backup data storage unit provided on the effect control board 15 shown in FIG. 4). The C-ID and the type are compared (S8). Then, it is determined in S9 whether or not the comparison results match, and if not, it is determined that a player different from the player who left the seat has started playing, and the subroutine program of this insertion process is ended. .

  If it is determined in S3a that the card is being inserted, the C-ID and the type different from the C-ID and the type of the card being inserted are stored in S3 in order to prevent the CU3 and P base 2 from being overwritten and stored. Skip processing in.

  Thus, the player identification information storage unit (current player gaming history data storage unit) for storing the player identification information (C-ID) and the same determination unit (S8, S9) for performing the same determination process are the gaming machines. Display control means (effect control board 15 provided with effect control unit 151), the communication means side (payment control unit 171 side) is sufficient without providing the same determination processing function, display control A common communication means can be used between the gaming machine having the means and the gaming machine not having the display control means, and it becomes possible to mass-produce a small variety of communication means.

  The processes of S15 and S7 may be performed as control contents of the modification. At S15, the gaming history data, C-ID and type stored in the backup area (backup data storage unit) are deleted after being sent to CU3. The CU 3 receives it and transmits the received data to the hall server (upper server) 801. The hall server 801 backs up and stores the received game history data, the C-ID, and the type.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S9 that they match, the process proceeds to S12, and the gaming history data of the backup area (backup data storage) is stored in the current area (for example, backup data storage unit provided on effect control board 15 shown in FIG. 4). Then, the addition and update of the game history data is newly started from the game history data.

  In addition, you may process S10, S13, S14 as control content of a modification. If YES in S9, the control proceeds to S10, and it is determined whether a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has elapsed since the previous card was discharged, and a predetermined time has elapsed according to S10 which has not elapsed. If it is determined that it is, processing of deleting the gaming history data, C-ID and type of the backup area (backup data storage unit) is performed in S13. Also, after S12, in S14, a notification that the players are the same is transmitted to the CU. As the control content of the modification, control may be performed so that all of the processes of S10, S13, and S14 and the processes of S15 and S7 are performed.

  The conditions for overwriting (updating) the card ID and the insertion time will be described in more detail. As described above, the card ID and the insertion time are prohibited from being updated while the card is inserted. The relationship between the card insertion notification command and the CU state included in the state information request command will be described as a condition to prohibit the state with reference to the drawings. FIG. 11 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the relationship between a card insertion notification command, a CU state included in a state information request command, and a card insertion state.

  First, FIG. 11A shows an example in which the CU status included in the command of the status information request becomes the card insertion status (Bit0 = “1”) before the P base 2 receives the command of the card insertion notification. ing. State (1) shown in FIG. 11A is the card insertion waiting state, and the P card 2 has not received the card insertion notification command, and the CU state included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3 When the card is not inserted (Bit0 = “0”). In this case, since the CU 3 is not inserting the card, the P-table 2 can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time.

  Next, the state (2) shown in FIG. 11A is the card insertion preparation state, and although the P card 2 has not received the card insertion notification command, it is included in the state information request command transmitted from CU3. This is the case where the selected CU state is card insertion (Bit 0 = “1”). Also in this case, since the CU 3 is not inserting the card, the P-table 2 can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time. The state (3) shown in FIG. 11A is the card insertion state, and the P card 2 receives the card insertion notification command, and the CU state included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3 is the card In the case of being inserted (Bit0 = “1”). In this case, it is prohibited to overwrite the card ID and the insertion time of the P-unit 2 on the assumption that the CU 3 is inserting the card.

  Next, the state (4) shown in FIG. 11A is the card return preparation state, and the command of the card return notification is not received by the P base 2 but is included in the command of the state information request transmitted from the CU3. This is the case where the selected CU state is not inserting a card (Bit 0 = "0"). In this case, it is prohibited that the card ID and the insertion time are overwritten, since the CU 3 has not returned the card yet and the card is being inserted. The state (5) shown in FIG. 11A is the card return state, and the P card 2 receives the card return notification command, and the CU state included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3 is card insertion If not (Bit0 = “0”). In this case, since the CU 3 is not inserting the card, the P-table 2 can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time.

  FIG. 11B shows an example in which the CU state included in the command of the status information request after the command of the card insertion notification is received by the P-unit 2 is the card insertion status (Bit0 = “1”). State (1) ′ shown in FIG. 11B is a card insertion waiting state, and the P card 2 has not received a card insertion notification command, and the CU included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3 When the card is not inserted (Bit0 = “0”). In this case, since the CU 3 is not inserting the card, the P-table 2 can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time.

  Next, the state (2) ′ shown in FIG. 11B is the card insertion preparation state, and the P card 2 receives the card insertion notification command, but is included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3 This is when the CU state is not in the process of inserting a card (Bit0 = “0”). Also in this case, since the CU 3 is not inserting the card, the P-table 2 can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time. The state (3) ′ shown in FIG. 11B is the card insertion state, and the P card 2 receives the card insertion notification command, and the CU state included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3 is When the card is being inserted (Bit0 = “1”). In this case, it is prohibited to overwrite the card ID and the insertion time of the P-unit 2 on the assumption that the CU 3 is inserting the card.

  Next, the state (4) ′ shown in FIG. 11B is the card return preparation state, and the command of the card return notification is not received by the P base 2, but the command of the state information request transmitted from CU3 This is the case where the included CU state is not in the process of inserting a card (Bit0 = “0”). In this case, it is prohibited that the card ID and the insertion time are overwritten as the card is being inserted, since the CU 3 has not yet returned the card. The state (5) 'shown in FIG. 11B is a card return state, and when the P card 2 receives a card return notification command, the CU state included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3 is a card It is not inserted (Bit0 = “0”). In this case, since the CU 3 is not inserting the card, the P-table 2 can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time.

  As described above, by limiting the card ID and the condition for overwriting (updating) the insertion time, the card ID etc. is intentionally transmitted to the P base 2 and the card ID etc stored in the P base 2 is falsified. Etc. can be prevented and security can be improved.

<< Prepaid Lending >>
Next, the process of lending the game ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card will be described. In the sequence process shown in FIG. 12, the prepaid balance recorded in the inserted card is 500 yen, and the number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3 transmits a command of a state information request including the serial number = n, the game ball addition request = OFF, and the addition serial number = m to the P-base 2. In response to this, the P-base 2 sends back to CU3 a response of the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of gaming balls = 50, and the addition serial number = m. Thus, while the addition request is not generated, the addition serial number is not updated.

  Thereafter, the player performs the lending operation (ball lending operation) of pressing the “Lending” button once, and the CU 3 lends the remaining amount of 500 yen, ie, 125 balls. When the ball lending button (loaning button) 321 is pressed, the CU 3 fixes the prepaid consumption for 500 yen and backs up the data of the number of additional balls = 125. Thus, the balance consumption is decided on the CU 3 side alone when the lending operation is performed. Thereafter, CU3 is being displayed for addition. During this addition display, it is displayed on the display 54 that it is in the process of deducting 125 balls from the remaining amount and adding to the game balls.

  Next, the CU 3 requests the P platform 2 to add a game ball. Therefore, the CU 3 transmits a command of the state information request including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P-base 2. The serial number is counted up to "n + 1", and the addition serial number is also counted up to "m + 1" in order to request addition of a game ball. The CU 3 counts up the addition serial number to “m + 1”, updates the previous last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1”, and backs up the data. In response, P unit 2 updates the number of gaming balls to 50 (current number of gaming balls) + 125 (additional ball number) = 175, and updates the last transmission addition serial number of last time to "m + 1". Backup the data. Then, P platform 2 notifies CU3 of the number of game balls = 175 and the result of game ball addition = OK, so that the serial number = n + 1, the number of balls to be added = 175, the result of game ball addition = OK and the number serial number = m + 1 The response of the status information response including is sent back to CU3. Since this is a response to the game ball addition request, the addition serial number is simply incremented to "m + 1" without being counted up.

  Thereafter, CU3 transmits a command of a status information request including serial number = n + 2, gaming ball addition request = OFF and addition serial number = m + 1 to P-base 2, and P-base 2 has serial number = n + 5, number of additional balls = 175 and The response of the status information response including the added serial number = m + 1 is sent back to CU3. When the game ball addition request is OFF, the state information request and the state information response count up the serial number but do not count up the serial number.

<< Carrying balls / removing balls (replay) >>
Next, processing for playing balls with balls and balls and playing again will be described. In FIG. 13, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, CU3 transmits a command of a state information request including serial number = n, game ball addition request = OFF and addition serial number = m to P-base 2. In response to this, the P-table 2 sends back to CU3 a response of the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of gaming balls = 50 and the addition serial number = m. Thus, while the addition request is not generated, the addition serial number is not updated.

  Thereafter, when the player depresses the ball withdrawal button or the replay button 319 with balls or balls being present, the CU 3 confirms consumption of 125 balls from the balls or balls. As described above, the consumption of balls or balls is decided on the CU 3 side alone when an operation of pressing the balls out button or the replay button 319 is performed. In addition, when both balls and balls exist, ball consumption is prioritized.

  Instead of the control for preferentially consuming the balls, a ball replay button and a ball replay button are provided, and the player can select and operate either ball spending or ball spending by selecting and operating the ball. You may do so. That is, the replay button is for storing the gaming ball (game points) from the storage balls (stored medals), and for playing the gaming balls (game points) from the balls (scores). It may be composed of two with a ball-bearing (point-holding) replay button.

  After determining the consumption from the balls or the balls, the CU 3 notifies the P 2 of the addition request for the number of additional balls = 125. Specifically, the CU 3 indicates that the addition processing of the game ball is in progress, and the command of the state information request including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of addition balls = 125 and the addition serial number = m + 1 Send to P stand 2. In order to request addition of game balls, the serial number is counted up to "n + 1" and the serial number is also counted up to "m + 1". Furthermore, CU3 updates the last transmission addition sequence number last time to "m + 1" and backs up the data. In response, P unit 2 updates the number of gaming balls to 50 (current number of gaming balls) + 125 (additional ball number) = 175, and updates the last transmission addition serial number of last time to "m + 1". Backup the data. Then, the P-table 2 sends back to CU3 a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of added balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK and the added serial number = m + 1. Since it is a response to the game ball addition request, it remains "m + 1" without counting up the addition serial number.

  Thereafter, CU3 transmits a command of a status information request including serial number = n + 2, gaming ball addition request = OFF and addition serial number = m + 1 to P-base 2, and P-base 2 has serial number = n + 2, number of additional balls = 175 and The response of the status information response including the added serial number = m + 1 is sent back to CU3.

<< Playing Ball Count (Normal) >>
Next, a normal counting process of counting and subtracting a part of the game balls will be described. FIG. 14 shows the case where the count button is pressed without detecting the card return operation. Therefore, all the bits of the card return preparation state transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2 are OFF (= 0). For this reason, in the following, the description of the bits in the card return preparation state is omitted.

  Further, in FIG. 14, the number of balls identified by the inserted recording medium (member card or visitor card) is “0”, and the initial number of gaming balls is “800”. There is.

  Here, while the operation of the counting button is detected, counting in units of 100 points continues, and an example in which the counting operation is finished when the operation of the counting button is not detected will be described.

  First, CU3 transmits a command of a status information request including serial number = n, card return preparation state = OFF, counting serial number = m, counting response = OFF to P-base 2. In response to this, the P-table 2 sends back to CU3 a response of a status information response including serial number = n, gaming ball number = 800, counting serial number = m, counting ball number = 0, counting request = OFF.

  The serial number n + 1 is returned from the P base 2 with respect to the serial number n transmitted from the CU3. The same counting serial number m is returned from P base 2 with respect to the counting serial number m transmitted from CU3. This is because the counting serial number is updated upon the occurrence of a counting request and is a special serial number that is terminated upon completion of counting.

  Thereafter, the player presses the counting button 28. In FIG. 14, immediately after the operation of pressing the counting button 28 once, the command of the status information request including the serial number = n + 1, the card return preparation state = OFF, the counting serial number = m, and the counting response = OFF is from CU3. It has been sent to P stand 2.

  When detecting the operation of the count button 28, the P-unit 2 transmits, to the CU3, the status information response of serial number n + 1 in which the count request value is specifically set to 100 as a response to the command of the status information request. However, at this stage, the P unit 2 does not execute counting for the counting request. Therefore, in the state information response of serial number n + 1, the number of gaming balls is still 800. Further, since this status information response is a telegram indicating a counting request, the counting serial number is counted up to "m + 1". At this time, the P-unit 2 updates the last transmission count serial number last time, and backs up the updated data of the last transmission count serial number last updated and the count request state ON.

  The CU 3 that has received the status information response with the serial number n + 1 adds the balls corresponding to the required number of counting balls and updates the display of the balls to 100. That is, the CU control unit 323 transmits an instruction for counting display to the display control unit 350. In response to the command, the display control unit 350 controls display of the display 54 on the side of the P base 2. As a result, on the display 54, the game balls are counted and the number thereof is reduced, while the image display in which the balls are increased is performed.

  In this case, it is conceivable to perform effect display such that the game balls are guided one by one to the respective counter and counted. As another example of this effect display, it may be a display in which data of the number of game balls is converted over time into data of the number of balls possessed. For example, data on the number of gaming balls and data on the number of balls are shown as a bar graph, and a bar graph of the number of balls is increased while decreasing the bar graph of the number of gaming balls. The display to move to the bar graph of may be repeated. Furthermore, as another example of effect display, data of the current number of gaming balls and data of the number of balls are digitally displayed as it is, and the number of balls is increased while decreasing the number of gaming balls, or part of the number of gaming balls It is possible to repeat the display for moving the lens to the number of balls possessed, and various display effects.

  Further, CU3 updates the last transmission count sequence number to "m + 1" and backs up the data. Subsequently, CU3 transmits a status information request of serial number n + 2, counting serial number m + 1, and counting response = ON to P stand 2 to notify that the requested counting has been completed.

  The P unit 2 having received this status information request finally subtracts the number of gaming balls by the number corresponding to the number of counting balls = 100, and updates the display of the number of gaming balls indicator 29 from 800 to 700. At this stage, although the counting request state of the P-unit 2 is turned OFF, since the pressing of the counting button continues, the P-unit 2 transmits a second counting request to the CU 3. That is, the status information response of serial number n + 2 whose count request value is specifically set to 100 is transmitted to CU3. However, even at this stage, the P unit 2 does not execute counting for the counting request. Therefore, in the state information response of serial number n + 2, the number of gaming balls = 700. Further, since this status information response is a telegram transmitted as a new count request, the count serial number is incremented to "m + 2", the last transmission count serial number is updated last time, and the last transmission count serial number updated last time Back up the data with counting request status ON.

  The CU 3 that has received the status information response of the serial number n + 2 adds the balls corresponding to the required number of counting balls and updates the display of the balls to 200. Furthermore, CU3 updates the last transmission count sequence number to "m + 2" and backs up the data. Subsequently, the CU 3 sends a status information request of serial number n + 3, counting serial number m + 2, and counting response = ON to the P-unit 2 to notify that the requested counting has been completed.

  Upon receiving this status information request, the P platform 2 subtracts the number of gaming balls by the number corresponding to the number of counting balls = 100, and updates the display of the number of gaming balls indicator 29 from 700 to 600. However, at this stage, the player's hand has left the counting button, and the counting operation has ended. For this reason, the P-unit 2 notifies the CU 3 of the completion of counting by the state information response of the number n + 3. That is, together with the current number of gaming balls = 600, a state information response of counting request = OFF and number of counting balls = 0 is transmitted to CU3. In addition, since all counting operations corresponding to the counting request have been completed, the counting serial number included in the status information response is not updated as it is m + 2.

  The CU 3 that has received this status information response determines that the counting is completed. Although illustration is omitted, CU3 transmits a status information response of serial number n + 4, counting serial number m + 2, card return preparation status = OFF, count response = OFF to P-base 2.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the information state response notifying the number of counting balls is transmitted from the P unit to the CU, if the number of the game balls for the counting balls is being subtracted promptly on the P unit side. Instead, at the stage of transmitting an information status response notifying the number of counting balls and receiving a confirmation of receipt from the CU, the P unit subtracts the game balls.

<< game ball count (automatic count) >>
At the time of closing the store, if no card is inserted and game balls remain in the P platform 2, the store clerk turns around the P platform 2 in which the game balls remain and inserts the store card into each one and performs the counting operation It is necessary to collect the remaining game balls, and the work at the time of closing the store is complicated. In addition, if it is the constitution of the game machine and the card unit where the physical game ball is paid out conventionally as in the past, the work at the time of closing the store is done only by collecting the remaining game balls and resetting the card unit. It can be done. However, in the configuration in which P platform 2 and CU3 mutually authenticate and communicate and manage the game balls (playing points) as in the present embodiment, the remaining game balls are collected only by the operation of simply resetting the card unit. It is impossible to do the work at the time of closing a store. Then, with reference to FIG. 15, the automatic counting process of the game ball at the time of closing a store will be described.

  FIG. 15 is a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process automatically performed when the game arcade is closed. First of all, CU3 is a state in which there are no stock cards since there are no balls in the card holding ball = 0. On the other hand, P stand 2 recognizes that no card is inserted in CU3 with 50 game balls. Then, the CU3 transmits a command of a status information request including the serial number = n, the CU opening state = ON, the card insertion state = OFF, the counting serial number = m, and the counting response = OFF to the P-base 2. In response to this, the P-table 2 sends back a response to the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of gaming balls = 50, the counting serial number = m, the number of counting balls = 0, and the counting request = OFF to CU3.

  When it is determined that the store is closed in the game arcade in which CU3 and P unit 2 are installed, if it is determined that no card is inserted and game balls remain in P unit 2, processing described below is performed. It should be noted that the fact that no card is inserted can be determined from the information of card insertion state = OFF included in the command of the state information request, and the fact that game balls are left in P platform 2 is that of the state information response It can be judged from the information of the number of game balls = 50 included in the response.

  The CU 3 transmits a command for card insertion notification including the serial number = n + 1, the card ID = 0, and the card insertion time = 0 to the P-base 2. That is, P card 2 is notified that the card of card ID = 0, which is a virtual card, has been inserted into the card reader of CU3 at card insertion time = 0. Since the virtual card is inserted into the CU 3 in this manner, there is no need for the shop clerk to go around the P platform 2 where the game balls remain and insert the shop card into each one. In response to this, the P-unit 2 recognizes that the card is inserted into the CU 3 and executes the following processing. In response to this, the P-base 2 sends back a response of the card insertion response including the serial number = n + 1 to CU3.

  Next, the CU 3 notifies the P-unit 2 of the CU opening state OFF. Specifically, a status information request including serial number = n + 2, CU opening status = OFF, card return preparation status = ON, counting serial number = m and counting response = OFF is transmitted to P-base 2.

  In addition, as for the closing setting in the game arcade, for example, the CU control section 323 distributes a closing command to the effect that the store management computer installed in the game arcade or the hall server 801 is closed to each CU 3 simultaneously. It is done by judging the end of sales in Specifically, when a clerk operates the hall management computer or the hall server 801 to close the store, a closing command to close the store to each CU 3 is simultaneously distributed. The store closing time may be set and stored in the hall management computer or the hall server 801, and control may be performed so that the store closing command is simultaneously distributed to the respective CUs 3 automatically when the store closing time is reached. As another method, a sales termination signal may be transmitted to the IR photosensitive unit 320 by remote control operation of sales termination by a store clerk, and the CU control unit 323 may determine the termination of sales at the game arcade. As still another method, each CU 3 is provided with a clock function, and when it is the closing time (for example, 10 o'clock), the time (for example, 10:20) after a predetermined time (for example 20 minutes) of the closing time is over Control may be performed to transmit a status information request including CU opening status = OFF from the respective CUs 3 to the P-unit 2 when clocked by the function.

  In P stand 2 that received it, serial number = n + 2, the number of gaming balls at the current time = 50, "1" added to the received counting serial number m, updated counting number of m + 1, counting ball number = 50 and counting request = ON Send a status information response to CU3. That is, since P unit 2 requests CU 3 to count remaining game balls, it notifies CU 3 of the number of game balls = 50, count acceptance request, and count serial number count-up, and the last transmission count last time Back up the serial number update and count ball request status ON information.

  In response to that, CU3 adds the number of counting balls = 50 sent from P 2 to the number of holding balls. Note that the number of counting balls = 50 added to the number of balls has not been determined, and the CU 3 backs up the information of the last transmission count serial number update last time while keeping the number of balls at the current position = 0. Then, the CU 3 sends a reply to the P-table 2 to notify the reception of the counting ball. Specifically, a status information request including serial number = n + 3, CU opening status = OFF, card return preparation status = ON, counting serial number = m + 1, and counting response = ON is transmitted to P-base 2. The counting balls received from the P-table 2 are stored in the storage means (for example, RAM or the like) of the CU 3 as the number of balls held by the card of card ID = 0 and card insertion time = 0 which is a virtual card.

  In the P platform 2 that has received it, the number of counting balls is subtracted from the number of gaming balls (number of gaming balls = 50−number of counting balls = 50), and the number of gaming balls = 0 is displayed. Then, P stand 2 subtracts the number of counting balls from the number of gaming balls and there is no remaining gaming ball (number of gaming balls = 0) to notify the state that counting request is unnecessary (counting request state OFF). A state information response including: = n + 3, gaming ball number = 0, counting serial number = m + 1, counting ball number = 0 and counting request = OFF is sent to CU3.

  If all the remaining game balls have been counted, processing is performed to return the virtual card (card ID = 0, card insertion time = 0) inserted in CU3. Specifically, the CU 3 transmits a card return notification including the serial number = n + 4 to the P-base 2 in order to notify the P-base 2 that the virtual card (card ID = 0, card insertion time = 0) has been returned. P receiving this recognizes that the virtual card inserted in CU3 has been returned, and transmits a response of a card return response including sequence number = n + 4, card ID = 0, and card insertion time = 0 to CU3.

  Next, the CU 3 notifies the P-unit 2 that the CU state has become the card insertion state = OFF. Specifically, the CU 3 transmits a status information request including the serial number = n + 5 and the card insertion status = OFF to the P-base 2. In response to this, the P-table 2 transmits a state information response including the serial number = n + 5, the number of gaming balls = 0, the counting serial number = m + 1, and the number of counting balls = 0 to the CU3.

  As described above, in the case of the counting process at the time of closing the store in the game arcade, the counting process is automatically executed without the store clerk inserting the card and performing the pressing operation of the counting button 28, and the remaining game balls All of the numbers can be collectively counted as the number of balls possessed by the virtual card (card ID = 0, card insertion time = 0) and stored in the storage means of CU3. In addition, CU3 may transmit the number of balls possessed by counting the number of remaining game balls to the hall server 801 together with identification information of P platform 2 or CU3. The hole server 801 can return the ball to the player later by storing the ball count sent from the CU 3 separately for each of the P units 2 or CU 3 on the date. In addition, the CU 3 may transmit the card ID inserted immediately before closing the store to the hole server 801 in association with the counted number of balls (remaining game balls). Since the remaining game balls are highly likely to be game balls of the player of the card ID inserted immediately before the store is closed, it is possible to reduce the task of identifying the owner of the counted number of balls, which will be counted later It is possible to more easily return the number of balls held to the player.

  In the above-described embodiment, the closing process when the card is not inserted but the game ball remains in the P platform 2 has been described, but the closing process when the card is inserted will be described later. The same processing as the processing of “card return)” (see FIG. 17) is executed. However, with regard to the counting process of the remaining game balls, the store clerk may perform the counting process by performing the pressing operation of the counting button 28 or the counting process may be performed automatically according to the closing setting. In any case, when a card is inserted, the card is returned by closing processing and the card is in a removal waiting state, and the card needs to be collected by the clerk.

<< Counting history processing >>
Next, processing of the count history data stored in the P-unit 2 will be described. FIG. 16 is a sequence diagram for explaining the process of the count history data stored in P table 2. In FIG. 16, the initial number of game balls is 600. First, CU3 transmits a command of a status information request including serial number = n (not shown), counting serial number = m and counting response = OFF to P-base 2. In the P platform 2, the player operates the counting button 28 from the response of the status information response transmitted before receiving the command of the status information request until the response to the command of the status information request is transmitted. The counting process is started.

  Then, in the P platform 2, the response of the state information response including the serial number = n (not shown), the number of gaming balls = 600, the counting serial number = m + 1, the number of counting balls = 100 and the counting request = ON is sent back to CU3. Here, in the P-table 2, since the counting request changes from the OFF state to the ON state, processing of the counting history is started. More specifically, P unit 2 uses the history of the number of gaming balls paid out from the P unit 2 side to CU3 as the count request ball count from the count request ON state to the count request OFF state as one count history Remember. That is, when there are a plurality of counting requests, the history from the counting request ON state to the counting request OFF state as the first counting request is stored as the first counting history. After that, as the second counting request, the history from when the counting request is turned on to when the counting request is turned off is stored as the second counting history. Depending on the period during which the counting button 28 is pressed, the response of the status information response including a plurality of counting request ON states is from when the counting request is ON until the counting request OFF state. It has been sent back to CU3. Among the counting history to be stored, “card ID” at the time of counting request, “counting reception time” included in status information response from counting response ON from CU 3, count ball number paid out by counting request OFF state The information includes the cumulative number “cumulative counting ball number” and the “playing ball number” at the end of counting.

  Next, CU3 transmits a command of status information request including sequence number = n + 1 (not shown), counting sequence number = m + 1 and counting response = ON to P 2 and notifies that it has completed the requested counting. . At this stage, the number of counting balls = 100 is tentatively determined.

  The P unit 2 having received this status information request subtracts the number of gaming balls by the number corresponding to the number of counting balls = 100, collates the number of gaming balls, and if it is 500 balls, decides 100 balls that have been temporarily determined. . Then, the display of the game ball number indicator 29 is updated from 600 to 500. Furthermore, when the operation of the counting button 28 by the player continues, the P-table 2 has a serial number = n + 1 (not shown), the number of gaming balls = 500, a counting serial number = m + 2, a number of counting balls = 100 and a counting request. The response of the status information response including = ON is sent back to CU3. Next, CU3 transmits a command of status information request including sequence number = n + 2 (not shown), counting sequence number = m + 2 and counting response = ON to P 2 and notifies that it has finished the requested counting. . At this stage, the number of counting balls = 100 is tentatively determined.

  The P unit 2 having received this status information request subtracts the number of gaming balls by the number corresponding to the number of counting balls = 100, collates the number of gaming balls, and if it is 400 balls, determines 100 balls that have been temporarily determined . Then, the display of the game ball number indicator 29 is updated from 600 to 500. Thereafter, when the operation of the counting button 28 by the player has been completed, the P platform 2 has a serial number = n + 2 (not shown), the number of gaming balls = 400, a counting serial number = m + 3, a number of counting balls = 100 and a counting request Send a response of status information response including OFF to CU3. When changing to the counting request OFF state, the P-table 2 stores 100 balls + 100 balls = 200 balls as the counting history 1 as the “cumulative counting ball number” in the counting history. In addition, the P unit 2 stores the number of gaming balls when the counting request is switched to the OFF state as the “number of gaming balls” at the end of the counting in the counting history 1. Further, the P-table 2 stores the “count reception time” included in the status information response of the count response ON state from the CU 3 in the count history 1. When new history is stored in the counting history 1, if the counting history 1 already exists, the counting history 1 is stored as the counting history 2, and then the new history is stored in the counting history 1. . In addition, in P stand 2, since the history for the past 2 times is held, it is stored as the counting history 1 and the counting history 2. However, even if the history for the past 1 time or the history for the past 3 times or more is stored Good.

  As described above, it becomes possible to recover the number of gaming balls counted by storing the counting history, and by storing a plurality of past portions, the accuracy of the recovery processing can be improved.

<< game ball count (card return) >>
Next, the process of counting the game balls when returning the card will be described. FIG. 17 is a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process when the player performs a card return operation. In FIG. 17, the number of balls possessed by the card specified by the inserted recording medium (member's card etc.) is zero, and the initial number of gaming balls is 800. First, CU3 transmits a command of a state information request including serial number = n, CU open state = ON, card return preparation state = OFF, counting serial number = m and counting response = OFF to P-base 2. In response to this, the P-table 2 sends back to CU3 a response of a state information response including serial number = n, gaming ball number = 800, counting serial number = m, counting ball number = 0 and counting request = OFF.

  Thereafter, the player presses the "card return" button when stopping the game or moving to another game stand. However, when the player presses the "card return" button, it is determined that the number of gaming balls in P platform 2 is 800, and CU3 determines that the number of gaming balls in P platform 2 is not zero. In addition, CU3 sets the card return preparation state = ON because the player presses the “card return” button, and the status information request including serial number = n + 1, CU opening state = ON, counting serial number = m and counting response = OFF Send a command to P unit 2. In addition, CU3 notifies notice of card return preparation state = ON to P stand 2 for 10 seconds. Further, since the number of game balls in P 2 is 800 balls and it is not 0 ball, CU3 performs a display prompting the counting operation on the display 54 etc. as a card return standby.

  In response to the display prompting the counting operation, the player presses the counting button 28 to perform an operation of converting the game balls into balls. The P-table 2 determines that the counting operation to press the counting button 28 is the counting operation in the card return preparation state = ON, and processes counting collectively instead of counting in units of 100 balls, for example.

  In order to notify CU3 of the counting acceptance request for the number of gaming balls 800 and the counting ball number 800 for the batch counting of 800 gaming balls, P stand 2 has a serial number = n + 1, number of gaming balls = 800, counting serial number = A response of the status information response including m + 1, the number of counting balls = 800 and the counting request = ON is sent back to CU3. However, at this stage, the P unit 2 does not execute counting for the counting request. Therefore, in the state information response of serial number n + 1, the number of gaming balls is still 800. Further, since this status information response is a message of counting request, the P-unit 2 counts up the counting sequence number to "m + 1", updates the last transmission counting sequence number of the previous time, and updates the last transmission counting sequence number of the previous time Back up the data with counting request status ON.

  In response to this, the CU 3 adds 800 counting balls to the ball holding number, and subtracts 800 counting balls from the 800 game balls to 0 balls. Also, the CU 3 backs up the data of the last transmission count sequence number updated last time. Then, the CU 3 notifies the reception of the counting ball that the status information request command including the serial number = n + 2, the CU opening state = ON, the card return preparation state = ON, the counting serial number = m + 1 and the counting response = ON is P2 Send to

  In response to the response from CU 3, P stand 2 subtracts 800 counting balls from 800 playing balls to display 0 playing balls on display 54 or the like. Further, P unit 2 has 0 game balls, and in order to notify CU 3 that the counting is completed, serial number = n + 2, game ball number = 0, counting serial number = m + 1, counting ball number = 0 and counting request = OFF The response of the status information response including is sent back to CU3. In addition, since the counting request is turned OFF, the counting serial number is transmitted to the CU 3 without counting up while keeping m + 1.

  Before 10 seconds have elapsed since the player pressed the card return button 322, that is, during the card return preparation state, the CU3 presses the count button 28 to count the game balls at once, and counts the number of game balls. Since it is 0 ball, card return processing is executed. That is, CU3 transmits a command of the card return notification including the serial number = n + 3 to P unit 2. In response to this, the P-base 2 sends back to the CU 3 a response of a card return response including the card ID held at the payout control board 17 and the card insertion time, with serial number = n + 3. After the card ID and the card insertion time are sent back to the CU 3, the card ID and card insertion time data held in the payout control board 17 are cleared.

  In response to this, the CU 3 determines whether the card ID stored in the inserted card matches the card ID received from the P-base 2 and, if the two match, returns the inserted card, If they do not match, error processing is performed and a report is sent to the hall server 801 or the like. When the card ID matches, the CU 3 stores the ball number 800 in the card (inserted card) inserted in the card insertion / ejection slot 309 and returns the card to the player. In addition, when the player has started the game by the deposit operation without inserting a card into the card insertion / ejection slot 309, the cards (stock cards) stocked in the card stock unit provided in CU3 The ball number 800 is stored and the card is returned to the player. At the time of return of the inserted card or stock card, the CU 3 transmits the card ID of the card and the data of the number of balls to the hole server 801, and the hole server 801 associates the data of the number of balls with the card ID of the card. May be stored.

  Thereafter, since the card returned from the CU 3 can be removed from the card insertion / ejection slot 309, a part of the card is held in a protruding state from the card insertion / ejection slot 309 (card removal enabled state). In CU3, a sensor capable of determining whether or not the card can be removed is attached near the card insertion / ejection slot 309, and when the signal of the sensor is in the ON state, it is determined that the card can be removed. In the case of the OFF state, it is determined that the card removal completion state.

  When the card return processing is executed and the card can be removed, the CU 3 notifies the P-unit 2 of the information on the card return preparation state OFF and the card removal waiting ON state. Therefore, CU3 sends a status information request command including serial number = n + 4, CU opening status = ON, card return preparation status = OFF, waiting for card removal = ON, counting serial number = m + 1 and counting response = OFF to P2 Send. In response to this, the P-unit 2 displays on the variable display device 278 as "Please remove the card" for the player in order to prevent the card removal failure. In addition, the P unit 2 may turn on an LED or may output an audio message “Please remove card” using the speaker 270 to notify removal of the card. Furthermore, the P-table 2 transmits to the CU 3 a command of state information response including serial number = n + 4, gaming ball number = 0, counting serial number = m + 1, counting ball number = 0 and count response = OFF.

  If the sensor attached in the vicinity of the card insertion / ejection slot 309 is in the ON state, the CU 3 transmits a command of a state information request including waiting for card removal = ON to the P-base 2. However, when the player removes a card from the card insertion / ejection slot 309, the sensor attached near the card insertion / ejection slot 309 is turned OFF, so CU3 has a serial number = n + 5 and waiting for card extraction = OFF. Send a command of status information request including P to P2.

  In response to this, the P-base 2 stops the display of "Please remove card" displayed on the variable display device 278, and ends the notification of removal of the card. It should be noted that notification of card removal continues after notification of a status information request command including waiting for card removal = ON until reception of a status information request command including waiting for card removal = OFF. Furthermore, the P-unit 2 transmits a command of status information response including the serial number = n + 5 to the CU3.

  In addition, the sequence of the counting process of the game ball at the time of returning the card | curd demonstrated in FIG. 17 is not limited at the time of a card return, The same process can be applied also at simple leaving / eating break. Here, the simple leaving means that the game is interrupted for a short time of about 5 to 10 minutes in order for the player to finish the small use. A meal break is a game or the like where the game is interrupted for, for example, 30 minutes, which is longer than simple leaving, for example.

<< Abnormal sequence 1 >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 18, a recovery process of the number of gaming balls when the status information request has not been reached due to power failure / communication circuit disconnection will be described. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power failure, a communication circuit disconnection, and a command of status information request from the card unit to the pachinko gaming machine has not arrived yet. In particular, there is a power failure / communication circuit disconnection (for example, when the power of P unit 2 is turned off and then on again), the status information request has not been reached (the command has not arrived from CU3 to P unit 2) And a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process when the communication counterparts match after recovery.

  Referring to FIG. 18, CU 3 transmits a status information request including sequence number = n to P-unit 2 before power-off occurs during the game. In response to that, the P-unit 2 sends a state information response including the serial number = n, the number of gaming balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3 and the number of subtracted balls = 23 to CU3 to notify the game table information CU3. . The P unit 2 updates the last transmission sequence number of the previous time, which is the previous game table information, to “n”.

  The CU 3 receives the status information response of serial number = n, updates the last transmission serial number last time to “n”, and backs up. Further, based on the information on the number of gaming balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3 and the number of subtracted balls = 23, the number of game balls, the number of added balls, and the number of subtracted balls stored therein are updated.

  Then, after a power failure occurs in the P-unit 2 during the game, if a status information request including the serial number = n + 1 is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P-unit 2, the P-unit 2 is in the power-off state and Unable to receive status information request. After that, since no status information response is sent from the P-unit 2, the CU 3 performs control to detect and stop the communication line disconnection after 3 seconds. After P unit 2 transmits the response of the status information response to CU 3, the game continues on P unit 2 until the power is turned off, and the gaming machine information changes, the number of gaming balls = 450, the number of additional balls = 6 and the number of subtracted balls = 36, which becomes the latest gaming machine information. On the other hand, the gaming machine information of the game ball number = 480, the addition ball number = 3, and the subtraction ball number = 23 which has already been transmitted becomes the previous game machine information.

  After that, the power failure of the P-unit 2 is recovered and turned ON, and the P-unit 2 starts to operate. When P unit 2 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between CU 3 and P unit 2 and information including main chip ID and payout chip ID is transmitted from P unit 2 to CU 3 Ru. Does CU3 transmit the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (key management server 800 via hall server 801) and the main chip ID and payout chip ID are properly registered? Have them check whether they are not or not and reply the result. If it is registered properly, it will be an appropriate authentication result.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 19 is started, and when the counting history request command is transmitted from CU3 to P 2, the counting history data stored in P 2 is transmitted to CU 3 . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1 and the previous last transmission serial number = n to the P-base 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P-unit 2 to notify of recovery information. In P stand 2 that received it, first, P stand 2 backs up in the last transmission serial number = n of the received recovery request and inside P stand 2 (specifically, delivery control board 17). It is determined whether or not the transmission serial number = n matches. If they match, it can be determined that the status information response transmitted last from P2 to CU3 before communication disconnection has reached CU3, and in this case, it is included in the status information response. The game information is also updated on the side of the CU 3 based on the received game information. Therefore, in this case, the P platform 2 sends back a recovery response (serial number = 1, ball unit price) to CU3 as no game information storage (specifically, no previous game table information). If the last transmission sequence number of the received recovery request = n and the last transmission sequence number of the last backup = n backed up in P platform 2 (specifically, the delivery control substrate 17) do not match, communication disconnection occurs Since it can be determined that the status information response transmitted last from P unit 2 to CU 3 before has not reached CU 3, in such a case, gaming information is stored (specifically, the previous game information is Returns a recovery response (serial number = 1, ball unit price) including gaming information to CU3 as existence). In addition, when the response of the recovery response is transmitted to CU 3, the P-unit 2 transmits the ball unit price and the ball unit price of the game ball played before the recovery processing to CU 3. As a result, it is possible to play a game even after the recovery process with the unit price of the game ball played before the recovery process. Although the information of the ball unit price is also included in the response of the recovery response transmitted from P base 2 to CU 3 to be described later, the information of the ball unit price is not directly described in the content of the described sequence.

  In FIG. 18, CU3 does not perform the addition recovery process because there is no game information storage included in the recovery response. Note that the CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the recovery response checks whether the number of gaming balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P-base 2 as a recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the first check process. This first check process will be described later based on FIG. 32 (a). Since there is no game information storage, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request including the serial number 2 to the P unit 2 without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2. When the CU 3 transmits a command of the communication start request to the P-base 2, the counting serial number is cleared to “0” (initial value). In response to the communication start request, the P-unit 2 transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU3. In addition, after receiving the communication start request, the P-unit 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and also clears the counting serial number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P-unit 2 is started, the CU 3 transmits a status information request including the serial number = 3 to the P-unit 2. In P stand 2 which received that, while it notifies CU3 with the state information response which is not notified game stand information (the number of game balls which is latest game stand information = 450, the number of addition balls = 6, the number of subtraction balls = 36). Lastly update the last transmission serial number and back up the data. Specifically, it includes transmission serial number = 3, the number of gaming balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6 and the number of subtracted balls = 36 as the state information response. The CU 3 receives the status information response including the unnotified gaming machine information, updates the last transmission serial number last time, and backs up the data. In addition, the CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response checks whether the number of gaming balls included in the game table information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value or not. Execute the process This second check process will be described later based on FIG. 32 (b).

<< Counting history sequence >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 19, a process of reading the counting history stored in the P-unit 2 to the CU 3 will be described. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a process of reading out the counting history stored in the P-unit 2 to the CU 3. First, CU3 transmits a command of counting history request including serial number = n, shop code and SC substrate ID to P-base 2. The P-unit 2 compares the store code transmitted and stored from the CU 3 with the card insertion notification command and the store code transmitted from the CU 3 with the counting history request command. When the store code matches as a result of comparison, the P unit 2 sets the stored data of the counting history 1 and the counting history 2 to the response of the counting history response so as to be able to be transmitted to the CU 3. Then, in the P-unit 2, a response of a counting history response including serial number = n, counting history 1 and counting history 2 is sent back to CU3.

  On the other hand, if the store codes do not match as a result of comparison, the P-table 2 sets data as no counting history in the response of the counting history response transmitted to the CU 3. Although not shown, in the P platform 2, a response of a counting history response including serial number = n and no counting history is sent back to CU3.

  As described above, the counting history sequence can recover the number of gaming balls counted by transmitting the counting history stored in the P platform 2 to the CU 3, and a plurality of past portions (counting history 1 and counting history) can be further processed. By transmitting 2) to CU3, the accuracy of the recovery process can be improved. Note that the plurality of counting histories transmitted to the CU 3 are not limited to two, and may be three or more counting histories.

<< Abnormal sequence 2 >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, recovery processing of the number of gaming balls when the status information response has not been reached due to power supply disconnection / communication circuit disconnection will be described. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power failure, communication circuit disconnection and the response of the status information response from the pachinko gaming machine to the card unit has not arrived yet. In particular, there is a power failure / communication circuit disconnection (for example, when the power of P stand 2 is turned off and then turned on again), the status information response has not arrived (the command has not arrived from P stand 2 to CU3) And a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process when the communication counterparts match after recovery.

  Referring to FIG. 20, after power-off occurs during the game, status information response including serial number = n, number of gaming balls = 480, number of added balls = 3 and number of subtracted balls = 23 from P unit 2 to CU If it is sent, the CU can not receive the status information response because the CU is in a power-off state. After that, since no status information request from the CU 3 is transmitted, the P unit 2 detects that the communication line is disconnected after 3 seconds and performs control to stop the game. Specifically, the payout control unit 171 transmits a stop command to the launch control board 31, and the launch control board 31 stops the rotational drive of the launch motor 18. During these three seconds, the game continues on the P platform 2 and the gaming machine information changes, and the number of gaming balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6, and the number of subtracted balls = 36, which become the latest gaming machine information. On the other hand, the gaming machine information of the game ball number = 480, the addition ball number = 3, and the subtraction ball number = 23 which has already been transmitted becomes the previous game machine information.

  On the other hand, in CU3, since the power is cut off, control is performed to forcibly eject the inserted card and return it to the player. At that time, the number of balls at the current point is stored in the card and discharged. If the number of balls can not be stored in the card due to a failure of the CU, etc., the hole server 801 periodically receives (for example, every 5 seconds) the number of balls from CU 3 and stores it as a backup. The player may be compensated for the loss based on the stored data (number of balls held) of the player. After that, the power supply of CU3 is restored and turned ON, and CU3 starts operating. When CU3 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between CU3 and P platform 2, and information including main chip ID and payout chip ID is transmitted from P platform 2 to CU3. Does CU3 transmit the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (key management server 800 via hall server 801) and the main chip ID and payout chip ID are properly registered? Have them check whether they are not or not and reply the result. If it is registered properly, it will be an appropriate authentication result.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 19 is started, and when the counting history request command is transmitted from CU3 to P 2, the counting history data stored in P 2 is transmitted to CU 3 . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1 and the previous last transmission serial number = n−1 to the P-unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P-unit 2 to notify of recovery information. On P unit 2 that received it, the last transmission sequence number of the received recovery request last time = n -1, and on the P unit 2 inside (specifically, the delivery control board 17) the last transmission sequence number on previous time = n Compare and judge. As a result, since the two do not match, it is determined that the state information response transmitted last before the occurrence of the power failure has not reached CU3. Therefore, P unit 2 returns a recovery response (serial number = 1) to CU3 including presence of gaming information storage (specifically, last time gaming machine information is present) as having gaming information not notified to CU3. Do. That is, the game response information includes the number of gaming balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23, which are the previous game table information, in the recovery response and transmits it to CU3.

  CU3 executes recovery processing based on the game information included in the recovery response. However, since the game ball addition request is not transmitted immediately before the detection of the communication line disconnection, the addition recovery process is unnecessary. Therefore, after receiving the recovery response, the communication start request is transmitted without transmitting the recovery request 2. The CU 3 executes the first check process before transmitting the communication start request. In the first check processing, whether or not the number of gaming balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from P base 2 as a recovery response has become an appropriate value by the CU control unit 323 of CU3 that has received the recovery response. It is checked. This first check process will be described later based on FIG. 32 (a). The CU 3 transmits a communication start request including the serial number 2 to the P-unit 2 without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P-unit 2. In addition, CU3 processes the last game machine information received from P stand 2, updates the last transmission serial number last time, and backs up the said data. When CU 3 transmits a command of communication start request to P 2, the counting serial number is cleared to “0” (initial value). In response to the communication start request, the P-unit 2 transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU3. In addition, after receiving the communication start request, the P-unit 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and also clears the counting serial number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P-unit 2 is started, the CU 3 transmits a status information request including the serial number = 3 to the P-unit 2. In P unit 2 that received it, unannounced gaming machine information (number of gaming balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls) included in the status information response that did not reach CU3 before the power failure occurred The state information response is sent to the CU3 and the last transmission serial number is updated last time to back up the data. Specifically, it includes transmission serial number = 3, the number of gaming balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6 and the number of subtracted balls = 36 as the state information response. The CU 3 receives the status information response including the unnotified gaming machine information, updates the last transmission serial number last time, and backs up the data. In addition, the CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response checks whether the number of gaming balls included in the game table information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value or not. Execute the process This second check process will be described later based on FIG. 32 (b).

  If the card ID of the reinserted card is properly read by the card information reading process, whether or not the read card ID matches the card ID included in the recovery response The CU control unit 323 of the CU3 determines the insertion time of the card inserted at the game start before the power failure occurs, the RAM of the CU control unit 323 stores the insertion time of the stored card, and recovery The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 may determine whether or not there is a match by comparing the card insertion time included in the response. In that case, it is determined that the two match, and if there is no additive recovery, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request to the P-unit 2. The P unit 2 having received it clears the recovery data (game information) and sends a communication start response to the CU 3.

  In this embodiment, a card ID and a card insertion time are used as player specifying information that can specify a player when determining the identity of the player. This card ID includes not only the card ID of a member's card identifying a player individual of a member but also the card ID of a visitor card used by a player who comes as a visitor. In the case of this visitor card, it is used by an unspecified player and does not identify a specific individual player. That is, in the case of this card ID, whether the player who was playing the game before the occurrence of the power-off / communication circuit disconnection is the same player as the player who is about to play the game after recovery of the power-off. Although it can be specified whether or not it is possible, it is not possible to specify which specific individual the player is. Therefore, the above-mentioned "player identification information" is not limited to the identification of a specific player individual, but the player who has played a game before the occurrence of the power off / communication circuit disconnection performs the game after the power off recovery. This is a broad concept including information that can be used to identify the identity of a player who is trying to move.

<< Abnormal sequence 3 >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 21, another recovery process of the number of gaming balls when the status information response has not been reached due to the power failure / communication circuit disconnection will be described. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing another example of processing when there is a power failure, communication circuit disconnection, and a response from the pachinko gaming machine to the card unit has not arrived yet. In particular, there is a power failure / communication circuit disconnection (for example, when the power of CU3 is turned off and then turned on again), and the status information response has not arrived (the command has not arrived from P2 to CU3). The sequence diagram for explaining the counting process when the communication partner does not match after recovery is shown. The power is turned off and on also by, for example, a failure of the CU 3 or manually turning the power on and off or by inserting and removing the CU 3 from the card unit holder.

  Referring to FIG. 21, after power-off occurs during the game, status information response including serial number = n, number of gaming balls = 480, number of added balls = 3 and number of subtracted balls = 23 from P unit 2 to CU If it is sent, the CU can not receive the status information response because the CU is in a power-off state. After that, since no status information request from the CU 3 is transmitted, the P unit 2 detects that the communication line is disconnected after 3 seconds and performs control to stop the game. Specifically, the payout control unit 171 transmits a stop command to the launch control board 31, and the launch control board 31 stops the rotational drive of the launch motor 18. During these three seconds, the game continues on the P platform 2 and the gaming machine information changes, and the number of gaming balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6, and the number of subtracted balls = 36, which become the latest gaming machine information. On the other hand, the gaming machine information of the game ball number = 480, the addition ball number = 3, and the subtraction ball number = 23 which has already been transmitted becomes the previous game machine information.

  On the other hand, in CU3, since the power is cut off, control is performed to forcibly eject the inserted card and return it to the player. After that, the power failure of the CU3 is recovered and turned ON, and the CU3 is replaced and the new CU3 starts operation.

  When the CU 3 operating before the CU replacement stores the number of balls, the number of balls may be stored in another card (for example, a card in the CU) and discharged. At this time, if it is not possible to store the number of balls in the card due to a failure of the CU, etc., the number of balls from CU3 is periodically received (for example, every 5 seconds) The player may be compensated for losses based on stored data (number of balls held) of the server 801.

  When CU3 after exchange starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between CU3 and P platform 2 and information including main chip ID and payout chip ID is transmitted from P platform 2 to CU3 Be done. Does CU3 transmit the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (key management server 800 via hall server 801) and the main chip ID and payout chip ID are properly registered? Have them check whether they are not or not and reply the result. If it is registered properly, it will be an appropriate authentication result.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 19 is started, and when the counting history request command is transmitted from CU3 to P 2, the counting history data stored in P 2 is transmitted to CU 3 . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1 to the P-unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P-unit 2 to notify of recovery information. However, CU3 does not have the last transmission serial number last time since it replaced. On P unit 2 that received it, the last transmission sequence number of last time transmitted from CU3 after replacement = 0, and the last transmission sequence number on last time backed up in P unit 2 (specifically, delivery control board 17) = n Compare and judge. As a result, since the two do not match, the game information stored in the P-unit 2 is transmitted to the CU 3 in order to perform recovery processing. More specifically, the P unit 2 sends a recovery response (serial number = 1) including storage of game information to the CU 3 as having game information for performing recovery processing on the CU 3 after replacement. In the recovery information notified to the CU 3 by this recovery response, the last transmission serial number = n, the card ID of the inserted card, the card insertion time, the last transmission addition serial number as the last game information = m, and the last game information It is included. The previous game table information includes the number of gaming balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23.

  The CU control unit 323 of the CU3 that has received the recovery response checks whether the number of gaming balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P-base 2 as the recovery response is an appropriate value or not Execute check processing. This first check process will be described later based on FIG. 32 (a). The CU 3 transmits a communication start request including the serial number 2 to the P-unit 2 without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P-unit 2. In addition, CU3 performs recovery processing (number of gaming balls = 480, total number of added balls = + 3, total number of subtracted balls = + 23) using the previous game table information received from P platform 2, and the last transmitted serial number last time Update to back up the data, card ID and card insertion time. When CU 3 transmits a command of communication start request to P 2, the counting serial number is cleared to “0” (initial value). In response to the communication start request, the P-unit 2 transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU3. In addition, after receiving the communication start request, the P-unit 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and also clears the counting serial number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P-unit 2 is started, the CU 3 transmits a status information request including the serial number = 3 to the P-unit 2. In the P platform 2 that has received it, CU3 is notified of unannounced gaming table information (number of gaming balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36) by a status information response. Specifically, it includes transmission serial number = 3, the number of gaming balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6 and the number of subtracted balls = 36 as the state information response. In response to the status information response including unnotified game stand information, the CU 3 waits for the insertion of the card that was being inserted last time, or waits for the store clerk remote control operation (game ball count). When a card is inserted in this state, the CU 3 reads the ID of the inserted card by the card reader / writer. Then, it is determined whether or not the read card ID matches the recovery card ID stored on the basis of the recovery response (the card ID of the previously inserted card). If it is determined that they match, it becomes a wait for the store clerk's remote control operation to resume the game. If there is a remote control operation, a command for card insertion notification including a store code, an SC board ID, etc. is transmitted from CU3 to P platform 2. In the P unit 2, the store code and SC board ID data received at the time of the last card insertion prior to the communication disconnection are backed up in the RAM etc. of the payout control unit 171, and the backed up data and CU3 are sent. The store code and the SC substrate ID are compared to determine whether they match. If the two match, the game can be resumed. A command for card insertion notification including the store code and the SC board ID may be transmitted from the CU 3 to the P base 2 without waiting for the remote control operation. In the case of non-coincidence, error processing is performed such as, for example, invalidating the game ball count data of the P platform 2. Alternatively, instead of or in addition to this, an error notification may be made. Furthermore, control may be performed to forcibly eject the inserted card and return it to the player. If the card inserted during the previous insertion is not inserted, the state of waiting for the store clerk remote control operation (playing ball counting) is continued.

  In addition, the CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response checks whether the number of gaming balls included in the game table information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value or not. Execute the process This second check process will be described later based on FIG. 32 (b).

<< Abnormal sequence 4 >>
Next, recovery processing of the number of added balls when the addition request has not been reached due to power off / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power failure, communication circuit disconnection, and the addition request command from the card unit to the pachinko gaming machine has not arrived yet. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process in the case where the communication partner matches after recovery due to power disconnection or communication line disconnection, and the addition request has not arrived (the command of the addition request from CU3 to P 2 has not arrived yet) A diagram is shown.

  In FIG. 22, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, CU3 transmits a command of a status information request including serial number = n and addition serial number = m to P-base 2. In response to this, the P-table 2 sends back to CU3 a response of the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of gaming balls = 50 and the addition serial number = m. In addition, since the counting request included in the response of the state information response is OFF (not shown), the counting serial number is transmitted to CU3 without counting up while keeping m.

  Thereafter, the player presses the re-play button. Therefore, the CU 3 determines consumption of the balls, transmits a command of a state information request including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of added balls = 125 balls and the added serial number = m + 1 to the P-base 2 The information which converted the ball into the game ball is notified. At this time, the CU 3 determines the consumption of the storage balls, sets the number of additional balls = 125, and backs up the data of the last transmission addition serial number of last time and the addition request state ON.

  However, after the player presses the replay button, the power of the P-unit 2 is interrupted before the command of the state information request is received, and the operation is stopped. Therefore, the P-unit 2 can not receive the command of the status information request from the CU 3.

  Since the P unit 2 is stopped, the CU 3 can not receive a response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission, and thus retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU 3 detects disconnection of the communication line by not being able to receive a response even if the command is resent.

  After that, the power failure is restored in the P-unit 2 and the P-unit 2 starts operation. When P unit 2 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between CU 3 and P unit 2 and information including main chip ID and payout chip ID is transmitted from P unit 2 to CU 3 Ru. CU3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, inquires whether main chip ID and payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned . If it is registered properly, it will be an appropriate authentication result.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 19 is started, and when the counting history request command is transmitted from CU3 to P 2, the counting history data stored in P 2 is transmitted to CU 3 . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P-unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P-unit 2 to notify of recovery information. The P unit 2 that has received the request returns the recovery information backed up in the P unit 2 (specifically, the payout control substrate 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command. Here, the last transmission addition serial number = m is transmitted last time.

  In CU3 that has received the recovery response, it is determined whether or not the previous last transmission addition serial number of the recovery information matches the stored last transmission addition serial number of the previous time. CU3 is the case where the value of the previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1 stored in CU3 being backed up is larger (new) than the final transmission addition serial number = m of the recovery data of P unit 2 (unmatched) Then, it is determined that the command of the previous state information request has not been reached, and addition recovery processing is performed.

  As a specific additive recovery process, recovery of the number of additive balls = 125 balls is requested to P platform 2. Therefore, the CU 3 transmits the recovery request 2 (number of added balls = 125, previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1) to the P-base 2.

  The P unit 2 executes an addition process to the number of added balls included in the recovery request 2, updates the last transmission addition serial number of the previous time, and backs up the data. At this timing, the addition process that is not realized due to the power-off is realized, and the number of game balls is matched between the CU 3 side and the P base 2 side. Furthermore, in the P-unit 2, the fact that the addition processing is OK is sent back to the CU 3 as the recovery response 2 (recovery response 2 (processing result = processing OK)). Upon receiving it, CU3 clears the addition request state. In addition, the CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the recovery response 2 determines whether the number of gaming balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P-base 2 as the above-mentioned recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the third check process to check the The third check process will be described later based on FIG.

  Furthermore, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request to the P-unit 2. The P unit 2 having received it clears the recovery data (game information) and sends a communication start response to the CU 3. Also, the CU 3 transmits a status information request to the P-unit 2. In the P-base 2 that has received it, CU3 is notified of the unreported gaming machine information (the number of gaming balls = 175) by the state information response. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response performs a second check process of checking whether the number of gaming balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later based on FIG. 32 (b).

  Here, although the case where the replay button for starting the game was pressed by the deposit of balls was described, the same operation is performed when the bonus button for starting the game is pressed by the withdrawal of balls.

<< Abnormal sequence 5 >>
Next, recovery processing of the number of added balls when the added response has not been reached due to power supply disconnection / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power failure, communication circuit disconnection, and a response of addition response from the pachinko gaming machine to the card unit has not arrived yet. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process in the case where the communication partner matches after recovery due to power failure, communication circuit disconnection, and addition response not reaching (response of addition response from P 2 to CU 3 not reaching). A diagram is shown.

  In FIG. 23, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, CU3 transmits a command of a status information request including serial number = n and addition serial number = m to P-base 2. In response to this, the P-table 2 sends back to CU3 a response of the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of gaming balls = 50 and the addition serial number = m. In addition, since the counting request included in the response of the state information response is OFF (not shown), the counting serial number is transmitted to CU3 without counting up while keeping m.

  Thereafter, the player presses the re-play button. Therefore, the CU 3 determines consumption of the balls, transmits a command of a state information request including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of added balls = 125 balls and the added serial number = m + 1 to the P-base 2 The information which converted the ball into the game ball is notified. At this time, the CU 3 determines the consumption of the storage balls, sets the number of additional balls = 125, and backs up the data of the last transmission addition serial number of last time and the addition request state ON.

  After that, a power failure occurs at CU3, and the operation of CU3 stops. However, the P-unit 2 can not detect that the operation of the CU 3 has stopped immediately after a power failure occurs in the CU 3. In order for the P unit 2 to detect a communication line disconnection, a period in which the next command can not be received from the CU 3 for one second or more is required.

  Therefore, in P stand 2, without knowing that the operation of CU3 is stopped, in response to the command of state information request of CU3, serial number = n + 1, number of game balls = 175, result of game ball addition = OK and addition number The response of the status information response including = m + 1 is sent back to CU3. However, the response of the state information response sent back to CU3 has not arrived at CU3 because the operation of CU3 has stopped. In addition, in P 2, the response of the status information response is sent back to CU 3, the last transmission addition serial number is updated last time, and the updated data and the number of gaming balls = 175 are backed up.

  After that, the power supply is restored at CU3 and CU3 starts operation. When CU3 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between CU3 and P platform 2, and information including main chip ID and payout chip ID is transmitted from P platform 2 to CU3. CU3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, inquires whether main chip ID and payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned . If it is registered properly, it will be an appropriate authentication result.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 19 is started, and when the counting history request command is transmitted from CU3 to P 2, the counting history data stored in P 2 is transmitted to CU 3 . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1 to the P-unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P-unit 2 to notify of recovery information. The P unit 2 that has received it returns the recovery information backed up in the P unit 2 (specifically, the payout control substrate 17) as a response to CU3 based on the received recovery request command (recovery response) (Previous final transmission serial number = n + 1, previous final transmission addition serial number = m + 1). The recovery information includes the previous last transmission serial number = n + 1, the card ID, the card insertion time, and the last transmission additional serial number = m + 1.

  The CU 3 having received the recovery response determines whether the card ID of the recovery information and the card insertion time coincide with the stored card ID and the card insertion time. In CU3, if the card ID and the card insertion time match, and the previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1 of the recovery data of P base 2 and the previous final transmission addition serial number = m + 1 stored in CU 3 coincide, addition recovery Clears the add request state without requesting a process. In addition, the CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the recovery response checks whether the number of gaming balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P-base 2 as the recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the first check process. This first check process will be described later based on FIG. 32 (a).

  CU3 matches the card ID and the card insertion time, depending on whether the previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1 of the recovery data of P base 2 and the previous final transmission addition serial number = m + 1 stored in CU 3 coincide. The addition recovery processing determination as to whether or not the addition recovery processing is to be performed is performed. In addition recovery processing determination, when the card ID and the card insertion time match, the previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1 of the recovery data of P base 2 and the previous final transmission addition serial number = m + 1 stored in CU 3 coincide It is determined that the addition recovery process is not to be performed, and otherwise it is determined that the addition recovery process is to be performed.

  Basically, if it is determined that the addition recovery processing is not performed in the addition recovery processing determination, the CU 3 does not transmit the command of the recovery request 2 to the P-unit 2. However, even if CU3 determines that addition recovery processing is not performed in the addition recovery processing determination, if the command of recovery request 2 is erroneously transmitted to P base 2, recovery processing is performed, and There is a disadvantage of being changed to a different number of game balls.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when CU3 transmits the command of the recovery request 2 to the P base 2 after the determination of the additional recovery processing determination, the P base 2 and the previous last transmission addition serial number included in the command of the recovery request 2 It is determined whether or not the previous last transmission addition serial number stored in P table 2 matches, and it is re-determined whether or not the addition recovery processing is to be performed.

  Specifically, the CU 3 transmits the command of the recovery request 2 including the serial number = 2, the previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1, and the number of added balls = 125 to the P-base 2. The P unit 2 that has received it matches the previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1 included in the command of the recovery request 2 of CU 3 and the previous final transmission addition serial number = m + 1 stored in the P unit 2, so It is determined that recovery processing is not to be performed, and information on processing NG is notified to CU3. Therefore, the P-unit 2 transmits the recovery response 2 including the serial number = 2 and the processing result = processing NG to the CU3.

  Furthermore, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request to the P-unit 2. The P unit 2 that has received it sends a communication start response back to CU3.

  Here, although the case where the replay button for starting the game was pressed by the deposit of balls was described, the same operation is performed when the bonus button for starting the game is pressed by the withdrawal of balls.

<< Abnormal sequence 6 >>
Next, another recovery process of the number of added balls when the added response has not been reached due to the power supply disconnection / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing another example of processing when there is a power failure, communication circuit disconnection, and the response of the addition response from the pachinko gaming machine to the card unit has not arrived yet. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process in the case where the communication partner matches after recovery due to power failure, communication circuit disconnection, and addition response not reaching (response of addition response from P 2 to CU 3 not reaching). A diagram is shown.

  In FIG. 24, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, CU3 transmits a command of a status information request including serial number = n and addition serial number = m to P-base 2. In response to this, the P-table 2 sends back to CU3 a response of the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of gaming balls = 50 and the addition serial number = m. In addition, since the counting request included in the response of the state information response is OFF (not shown), the counting serial number is transmitted to CU3 without counting up while keeping m.

  Thereafter, the player presses the re-play button. Therefore, the CU 3 determines consumption of the balls, transmits a command of a state information request including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of added balls = 125 balls and the added serial number = m + 1 to the P-base 2 The information which converted the ball into the game ball is notified. At this time, the CU 3 determines the consumption of the storage balls, sets the number of additional balls = 125, and backs up the data of the last transmission addition serial number of last time and the addition request state ON.

  After that, a power failure occurs at CU3, and the operation of CU3 stops. However, the P-unit 2 can not detect that the operation of the CU 3 has stopped immediately after a power failure occurs in the CU 3. In order for the P unit 2 to detect a communication line disconnection, a period in which the next command can not be received from the CU 3 for one second or more is required.

  Therefore, the P-unit 2 processes the addition request in response to the command of the status information request of the CU 3 without knowing that the operation of the CU 3 is stopped. However, due to some cause (for example, the number of game balls has reached the upper limit, etc.), a situation occurs in which the game balls can not be added. In this case, P unit 2 sends back to CU 3 a response of a state information response including serial number = n + 1, number of gaming balls = 50, gaming ball addition result = NG, and addition serial number = m. However, the response of the state information response sent back to CU3 has not arrived at CU3 because the operation of CU3 has stopped. In addition, in the P stand 2, since the game ball addition abnormality has generate | occur | produced, the addition ball from CU3 can not be processed, and it has not updated, with last transmission addition serial number = m last time.

  After that, the power supply is restored at CU3 and CU3 starts operation. In addition, in P stand 2, it is a state of game ball addition abnormality. When CU3 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between CU3 and P platform 2, and information including main chip ID and payout chip ID is transmitted from P platform 2 to CU3. CU3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, inquires whether main chip ID and payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned . If it is registered properly, it will be an appropriate authentication result.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 19 is started, and when the counting history request command is transmitted from CU3 to P 2, the counting history data stored in P 2 is transmitted to CU 3 . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1 to the P-unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P-unit 2 to notify of recovery information. The P unit 2 that has received it returns the recovery information backed up in the P unit 2 (specifically, the payout control substrate 17) as a response to CU3 based on the received recovery request command (recovery response) (Previous final transmission serial number = n + 1, previous final transmission addition serial number = m)). The recovery information includes the previous last transmission serial number = n + 1, the card ID, the card insertion time, and the last transmission additional serial number = m.

  The CU 3 having received the recovery response determines whether the card ID of the recovery information and the card insertion time coincide with the stored card ID and the card insertion time. In CU3, if the card ID and the card insertion time match, and the previous last transmission addition serial number = m of the recovery data of P base 2 and the previous final transmission addition serial number = m + 1 stored in CU3 do not match, addition recovery Request processing Therefore, the CU 3 transmits, to the P-base 2, the recovery request 2 including the previous final transmission addition serial number = m + 1 and the number of added balls = 125.

  In response to that, the P-base 2 notifies the game ball addition is not processed by the game ball addition abnormality (game ball addition NG) by the recovery response 2. Recovery response 2 includes recovery result = process NG.

  When the CU 3 receives the recovery response 2 including the recovery result = process NG, the CU 3 clears the game ball addition request state and puts it in the OFF state, and performs the third check described later. Furthermore, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request to the P-unit 2. The P unit 2 that has received it sends a communication start response back to CU3.

  Further, since the game ball addition request state is cleared and the CU 3 is in the OFF state, state information including the game ball addition request = OFF and the addition serial number = m + 1 without notifying the P base 2 of the addition request again. Send a request to P2 If it is not possible to add the number of added balls = 125 of the recovery request 2 to the number of gaming balls = 50 because of the addition abnormal state, the P base 2 that received it notifies CU3 of the current number of gaming balls = 50 without addition. Do. Specifically, the P-base 2 transmits a state information response including the number of game balls = 50 and the addition serial number = m to the CU3. In addition, since the game ball addition result is NG, the addition serial number remains “m” without being updated to “m + 1” transmitted in the state information request. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response performs a second check process of checking whether the number of gaming balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later based on FIG. 32 (b). The CU 3 cancels the consumption of the determined balls based on the information on the current number of gaming balls = 50 included in the state information response transmitted from the P-base 2.

  Here, although the case where the replay button for starting the game was pressed by the deposit of balls was described, the same operation is performed when the bonus button for starting the game is pressed by the withdrawal of balls.

<< abnormal system sequence 7 >>
Next, another recovery process of the number of added balls when the addition request has not been reached due to the power off / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing another example of processing when there is a power failure, communication circuit disconnection, and the addition request command from the card unit to the pachinko gaming machine has not arrived yet. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process in the case where the communication partner is not matched after the addition request has not been reached (the command of the addition request from CU3 to P 2 has not been reached) due to power off or communication line disconnection. A diagram is shown.

  In FIG. 25, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, CU3 transmits a command of a status information request including serial number = n and addition serial number = m to P-base 2. In response to this, the P-table 2 sends back to CU3 a response of the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of gaming balls = 50 and the addition serial number = m. In addition, since the counting request included in the response of the state information response is OFF (not shown), the counting serial number is transmitted to CU3 without counting up while keeping m.

  Thereafter, the player presses the re-play button. Therefore, the CU 3 determines consumption of the balls, transmits a command of a state information request including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of added balls = 125 balls and the added serial number = m + 1 to the P-base 2 The information which converted the ball into the game ball is notified. At this time, the CU 3 determines the consumption of the storage balls, sets the number of additional balls = 125, and backs up the data of the last transmission addition serial number of last time and the addition request state ON.

  However, after the player presses the replay button, the power of the P-unit 2 is interrupted before the command of the state information request is received, and the operation is stopped. Therefore, the P-unit 2 can not receive the command of the status information request from the CU 3.

  Since the P unit 2 is stopped, the CU 3 can not receive a response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission, and thus retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU 3 detects disconnection of the communication line by not being able to receive a response even if the command is resent.

  After that, the power failure is restored in the P-unit 2, and the P-unit 2 is further replaced, and a new P-unit 2 starts operation. When P unit 2 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between CU 3 and P unit 2 and information including main chip ID and payout chip ID is transmitted from P unit 2 to CU 3 Ru. CU3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, inquires whether main chip ID and payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned . If it is registered properly, it will be an appropriate authentication result.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 19 is started, and when the counting history request command is transmitted from CU3 to P 2, the counting history data stored in P 2 is transmitted to CU 3 . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P-unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P-unit 2 to notify of recovery information. In addition, CU3 implements addition recovery even if P stand 2 is exchanged. The P unit 2 that has received the request returns the recovery information backed up in the P unit 2 (specifically, the payout control substrate 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command. However, since the P-unit 2 is newly exchanged, the last transmission addition serial number is not backed up last time, and the initial value "0" is transmitted to CU3.

  In CU3 that has received the recovery response, it is determined whether or not the previous last transmission addition serial number of the recovery information matches the stored last transmission addition serial number of the previous time. When the last transmission addition serial number of recovery data of P unit 2 = 0 and the previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1 stored in the backup CU 3 do not match, the command of the previous state information request has not been sent. It is determined that it has been reached and addition recovery processing is performed. As a specific additive recovery process, recovery of the number of additive balls = 125 balls is requested to P platform 2. Therefore, the CU 3 transmits the recovery request 2 (number of added balls = 125, previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1) to the P-base 2.

  The P unit 2 executes an addition process to the number of added balls included in the recovery request 2, updates the last transmission addition serial number of the previous time, and backs up the data. Furthermore, in the P-unit 2, the fact that the addition processing is OK is sent back to the CU 3 as the recovery response 2 (recovery response 2 (processing result = processing OK)). Upon receiving it, CU3 clears the addition request state. In addition, the CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the recovery response 2 determines whether the number of gaming balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P-base 2 as the above-mentioned recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the third check process to check the The third check process will be described later based on FIG.

  Furthermore, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request to the P-unit 2. The P unit 2 having received it clears the recovery data (game information) and sends a communication start response to the CU 3. Also, the CU 3 transmits a status information request to the P-unit 2. In the P-base 2 that has received it, CU3 is notified of the unreported gaming machine information (the number of gaming balls = 175) by the state information response. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response performs a second check process of checking whether the number of gaming balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later based on FIG. 32 (b).

  Here, although the case where the replay button for starting the game was pressed by the deposit of balls was described, the same operation is performed when the bonus button for starting the game is pressed by the withdrawal of balls.

<< Abnormal sequence 8 >>
Next, recovery processing of the number of counting balls when the counting response has not been reached due to the power off / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power failure, communication circuit disconnection and the response of the count response from the pachinko gaming machine to the card unit has not arrived yet. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process in the case where the communication partner matches after recovery due to power failure, communication line disconnection, and the count response not reaching (the command of the count response from CU3 to P 2 not reached). A diagram is shown.

  In FIG. 26, the initial number of balls held is 0 and the number of gaming balls is 500. First, CU3 transmits a command of a status information request including sequence number = n, counting sequence number = m and counting response = OFF to P-base 2. Thereafter, in the P-table 2, the counting button 28 is pressed to transmit a counting request to the CU3. Specifically, the P platform 2 sends back to CU3 a response of a state information response including serial number = n, gaming ball number = 500, counting serial number m + 1, counting ball number = 100 and counting request = ON. In addition, in P stand 2, the number of gaming balls = 500, counting balls = 100 and counting serial number = m + 1 are notified to CU3, and the last transmission transmission serial number is updated last time, updated data and counting request state ON Back up your data.

  In response to this, the CU 3 adds the number of counting balls to the number of balls to set the number of balls to 100, updates the last transmission serial number last time, and backs up the updated data. However, after receiving the command of the status information request, the P-unit 2 is powered off and the operation is stopped. Therefore, the P-unit 2 can not receive the command of the status information request including the serial number = n + 1, the counting serial number = m + 1, and the counting response = ON from the CU3. That is, the counting response from CU 3 has not been reached for P unit 2.

  Since the P unit 2 is stopped, the CU 3 can not receive a response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission, and thus retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU 3 detects disconnection of the communication line by not being able to receive a response even if the command is resent.

  After that, the power failure is restored in the P-unit 2 and the P-unit 2 starts operation. When P unit 2 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between CU 3 and P unit 2 and information including main chip ID and payout chip ID is transmitted from P unit 2 to CU 3 Ru. CU3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, inquires whether main chip ID and payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned . If it is registered properly, it will be an appropriate authentication result.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 19 is started, and when the counting history request command is transmitted from CU3 to P 2, the counting history data stored in P 2 is transmitted to CU 3 . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1 and the previous last transmission counting serial number = m + 1 to the P-unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P-unit 2 to notify of recovery information. On P unit 2 that received it, the previous last transmission count sequence number of the received recovery request = m + 1, and on the P unit 2 inside (specifically, payout control board 17) the last transmission count sequence number = m + 1 Are identical to each other, it can be determined that the status information response transmitted last from P unit 2 to CU 3 before communication disconnection has reached CU 3. In this case, the P platform 2 executes a process of subtracting the counted number of balls from the number of gaming balls, and turns off the counting request state. That is, the P platform 2 is updated from the number of gaming balls = 500 to the number of gaming balls = 400 at this time. Also, based on the received recovery request command, the P-unit 2 sends back a recovery response, which is a response, to the CU3.

  The CU control unit 323 of the CU3 that has received the recovery response checks whether the number of gaming balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P-base 2 as the recovery response is an appropriate value or not Execute check processing. This first check process will be described later based on FIG. 32 (a). In addition, since the CU 3 does not perform the addition recovery process, the CU 3 transmits the communication start request including the serial number = 2 to the P unit 2 without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2. In addition, CU3 processes the last game machine information received from P stand 2, updates the last transmission serial number last time, and backs up the said data. When CU 3 transmits a command of communication start request to P 2, the counting serial number is cleared to “0” (initial value). In response to the communication start request, the P-unit 2 transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU3. In addition, after receiving the communication start request, the P-unit 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and also clears the counting serial number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P-unit 2 is started, the CU 3 transmits a status information request including the serial number = 3 to the P-unit 2. In P stand 2 which received that, CU3 is notified of status information response which is not notified game stand information (number of game balls = 400). Specifically, the transmission serial number = 3 and the number of gaming balls = 400 are included as the status information response. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response performs a second check process of checking whether the number of gaming balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later based on FIG. 32 (b).

<< Abnormal sequence 9 >>
Next, the recovery process of the number of counting balls when the counting request is not reached due to the power off / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power failure, communication circuit disconnection, and the command of counting request from the pachinko gaming machine to the card unit has not arrived yet. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process in the case where the communication partner matches after recovery due to power failure, communication line disconnection, and counting request not reaching (a command of counting request from P 2 to CU 3 not reaching). A diagram is shown.

  In FIG. 27, the initial number of balls is 0 and the number of gaming balls is 500. First, CU3 transmits a command of a status information request including sequence number = n, counting sequence number = m and counting response = OFF to P-base 2. Thereafter, in the P-table 2, the counting button 28 is pressed to transmit a counting request to the CU3. Specifically, the P platform 2 sends back to CU3 a response of a state information response including serial number = n, gaming ball number = 500, counting serial number m + 1, counting ball number = 100 and counting request = ON. In addition, in P stand 2, the number of gaming balls = 500, counting balls = 100 and counting serial number = m + 1 are notified to CU3, and the last transmission transmission serial number is updated last time, updated data and counting request state ON Back up your data.

  However, before receiving a command of status information response, CU3 generates a power-off and stops its operation. That is, in CU3, the counting request from P unit 2 has not arrived yet. After that, since no status information request from the CU 3 is transmitted, the P unit 2 detects that the communication line is disconnected after 3 seconds and performs control to stop the game. Specifically, the payout control unit 171 transmits a stop command to the launch control board 31, and the launch control board 31 stops the rotational drive of the launch motor 18.

  After that, the power supply is restored at CU3 and CU3 starts operation. When CU3 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between CU3 and P platform 2, and information including main chip ID and payout chip ID is transmitted from P platform 2 to CU3. CU3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, inquires whether main chip ID and payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned . If it is registered properly, it will be an appropriate authentication result.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 19 is started, and when the counting history request command is transmitted from CU3 to P 2, the counting history data stored in P 2 is transmitted to CU 3 . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1 and the previous last transmission counting serial number = m to the P-unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P-unit 2 to notify of recovery information. On P unit 2 that received it, the previous last transmission count sequence number of the received recovery request = m, and on the P unit 2 inside (specifically, the payout control board 17) the last transmission count sequence number = m + 1 Are not matched (mismatched), it can be determined that the status information response transmitted last from P unit 2 to CU 3 before communication disconnection has not reached CU 3. In this case, the P-table 2 does not execute the process of subtracting the counted number of balls from the number of gaming balls, and turns the counting request state OFF. That is, the P-unit 2 cancels the counting request transmitted immediately before the occurrence of power interruption, and maintains the number of gaming balls = 500 at this time. Also, based on the received recovery request command, the P-unit 2 sends back a recovery response, which is a response, to the CU3.

  The CU control unit 323 of the CU3 that has received the recovery response checks whether the number of gaming balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P-base 2 as the recovery response is an appropriate value or not Execute check processing. This first check process will be described later based on FIG. 32 (a). Since the CU 3 does not perform the addition recovery process, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request including the serial number = 2 to the P-unit 2 without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P-unit 2. In addition, CU3 processes the last game machine information received from P stand 2, updates the last transmission serial number last time, and backs up the said data. When CU 3 transmits a command of communication start request to P 2, the counting serial number is cleared to “0” (initial value). In response to the communication start request, the P-unit 2 transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU3. In addition, after receiving the communication start request, the P-unit 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and also clears the counting serial number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P-unit 2 is started, the CU 3 transmits a status information request including the serial number = 3 to the P-unit 2. In P stand 2 which received that, CU3 is notified of status information response which is not notified game stand information (number of game balls = 500). Specifically, it includes transmission serial number = 3 and the number of gaming balls = 500 as a status information response. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response performs a second check process of checking whether the number of gaming balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later based on FIG. 32 (b).

<< Abnormal sequence 10 >>
Next, another recovery process of the number of counting balls when the counting response has not been reached due to the power off / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing another example of processing when there is a power failure, a communication circuit disconnection, and the response of the count response from the card unit to the pachinko gaming machine has not arrived yet. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process in the case where the communication partner matches after recovery due to power failure, communication line disconnection, and the count response not reaching (the command of the count response from CU3 to P 2 not reached). A diagram is shown.

  In FIG. 28, the initial number of balls is 0 and the number of gaming balls is 500. First, CU3 transmits a command of a status information request including sequence number = n, counting sequence number = m and counting response = OFF to P-base 2. Thereafter, in the P-table 2, the counting button 28 is pressed to transmit a counting request to the CU3. Specifically, P unit 2 sends back to CU 3 a response of a status information response including serial number = n, gaming ball number = 500, counting serial number m + 1, counting ball number = 100, counting serial number m + 1 and counting request = ON. . In addition, in P stand 2, the number of gaming balls = 500, counting balls = 100 and counting serial number = m + 1 are notified to CU3, and the last transmission transmission serial number is updated last time, updated data and counting request state ON Back up your data.

  In response to this, the CU 3 executes processing for adding the number of counting balls to the number of balls having balls, but some abnormality occurs and the addition processing can not be performed. For this reason, a command of the status information request including the counting serial number = m and the counting response = OFF (because of the counting abnormal state) is transmitted from the CU3. However, after receiving the command of the status information request, the P-unit 2 is powered off and the operation is stopped. Therefore, the P-unit 2 can not receive the command of the status information request from the CU 3. That is, the counting response from CU 3 has not been reached for P unit 2.

  Since the P unit 2 is stopped, the CU 3 can not receive a response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission, and thus retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU 3 detects disconnection of the communication line by not being able to receive a response even if the command is resent.

  After that, the power failure is restored in the P-unit 2 and the P-unit 2 starts operation. When P unit 2 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between CU 3 and P unit 2 and information including main chip ID and payout chip ID is transmitted from P unit 2 to CU 3 Ru. CU3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, inquires whether main chip ID and payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned . If it is registered properly, it will be an appropriate authentication result.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 19 is started, and when the counting history request command is transmitted from CU3 to P 2, the counting history data stored in P 2 is transmitted to CU 3 . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1 and the previous last transmission counting serial number = m to the P-unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P-unit 2 to notify of recovery information. In P unit 2 that received it, the previous last transmission counting sequence number of the received recovery request = m (not updated as "m" because of counting abnormality) and P unit 2 inside (specifically, the payout control Since the previous last transmission counting serial number = m + 1 backed up on the board 17) does not match (mismatch), the status information response transmitted last from P 2 to CU 3 before communication disconnection reaches CU 3 It can be judged that it is not done. In this case, the P-table 2 does not execute the process of subtracting the counted number of balls from the number of gaming balls, turns the counting request state OFF, and decrements the last transmission serial number of the previous time by one (-1). At this time, the P-base 2 cancels the counting request before the power interruption and keeps the number of gaming balls = 500. Also, based on the received recovery request command, the P-unit 2 sends back a recovery response, which is a response, to the CU3.

  The CU control unit 323 of the CU3 that has received the recovery response checks whether the number of gaming balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P-base 2 as the recovery response is an appropriate value or not Execute check processing. This first check process will be described later based on FIG. 32 (a). Since the CU 3 does not perform the addition recovery process, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request including the serial number = 2 to the P-unit 2 without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P-unit 2. In addition, CU3 processes the last game machine information received from P stand 2, updates the last transmission serial number last time, and backs up the said data. When CU 3 transmits a command of communication start request to P 2, the counting serial number is cleared to “0” (initial value). In response to the communication start request, the P-unit 2 transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU3. In addition, after receiving the communication start request, the P-unit 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and also clears the counting serial number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P-unit 2 is started, the CU 3 transmits a status information request including the serial number = 3 to the P-unit 2. In P stand 2 which received that, CU3 is notified of status information response which is not notified game stand information (number of game balls = 500). Specifically, it includes transmission serial number = 3 and the number of gaming balls = 500 as a status information response. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response performs a second check process of checking whether the number of gaming balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later based on FIG. 32 (b).

<< Addition request error >>
Next, the process of the addition request abnormality will be described. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of processing when the result of the game ball addition is abnormal at the time of ball lending / ball-dropping / ball-rolling-out. In particular, a sequence diagram for explaining the processing in the case where the addition result of the game balls at the time of the ball lending, the ball dispensing, and the ball dispensing is abnormal is shown.

  In FIG. 29, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, CU3 transmits a command of a state information request including serial number = n, game ball addition request = OFF and addition serial number = m to P-base 2. In response to this, the P-table 2 sends back to CU3 a response of the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of gaming balls = 50 and the addition serial number = m. In addition, since the counting request included in the response of the state information response is OFF (not shown), the counting serial number is transmitted to CU3 without counting up while keeping m.

  After that, the player presses the ball withdrawal button. Therefore, CU3 determines the consumption of balls and balls, and sends a command of state information request including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of added balls = 125 balls and addition serial number = m + 1 to P-base 2 Then, the information (number of added balls = 125 balls) obtained by converting the balls / pools into the game balls is notified. At that time, the CU 3 backs up the data of the number of gaming balls = 50 (the number of gaming balls before update) +125 (the number of additional balls) = 175, and the updated last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  Thereafter, an abnormality occurs in the process of adding the game balls in P platform 2. Therefore, P unit 2 receives the command of state information request of CU3, and serial number = n + 1, number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before game ball addition), game ball addition result = NG and addition serial number = m + 1 The response of the status information response including is sent back to CU3. The P-base 2 notifies the CU 3 of information on the game ball addition result = NG and the last transmission addition serial number of the previous time.

  The CU 3 that has received the response of the state information response including the game ball addition result = NG is the command of the state information request including the serial number = n + 2, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of addition balls = 125 balls and the addition serial number = m + 1 Retransmit to the unit 2. Although CU3 is a retransmission of the command of the status information request, the serial number is updated and is incremented from n + 1 to n + 2, and the command of the status information request is retransmitted while the addition serial number is m + 1.

  However, P stand 2 remains in the state where abnormality has occurred in the process of adding the game balls. Therefore, P unit 2 receives the command of the retransmitted state information request of CU3, and the serial number = n + 2, the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before the game ball addition), the game ball addition result = NG and the addition serial number = The response of the status information response including m is sent back to CU3.

  Furthermore, CU3 which has received the response of the status information response including the game ball addition result = NG again is the status information request of which the serial number = n + 3, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of addition balls = 125 balls and the addition serial number = m + 1 Perform the second retransmission of the command to P2. Although CU3 is a retransmission of the command of the status information request, the serial number is updated, and is incremented from n + 2 to n + 3, and the addition serial number is m + 1 and the command of the status information request is retransmitted.

  P stand 2 is still in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the process of adding the game balls. Therefore, P unit 2 receives the command of the retransmitted state information request of CU 3, serial number = n + 3, number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before game ball addition), result of game ball addition = NG, and addition serial number = The response of the status information response including m is sent back to CU3.

  CU3 is a process of adding gaming balls in P platform 2 when receiving a response of response of status information response including gaming ball addition result = NG from P platform 2 even if the command of status information request is resent twice It is in the state of waiting for addition error recovery, assuming that an error occurs in the

  After the addition error is restored in P stand 2, CU 3 resends the command of the state information request including serial number = n + X, gaming ball addition request = ON, number of added balls = 125 balls and addition serial number = m + 1 to P stand 2. . Since the addition abnormality has been restored in the P stand 2, the addition processing to the game ball is executed, and the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before addition of the game balls) +125 (the number of addition balls) = 175. The last transmission addition serial number is updated to back up the data.

  After carrying out the addition processing to the game ball, the P-base 2 transmits a state information response including the serial number = n + X, the number of game balls = 175, the addition serial number = m + 1 and the game ball addition result = OK to CU3. In response to this, the CU 3 turns off the addition request state.

<Operation concerning addition serial number>
FIG. 30 is a conceptual diagram for illustrating the operation of P base 2 and CU 3 regarding the addition serial number. When a game ball addition request is not generated, a message including a normal serial number and an addition serial number as shown in (1) to (4) of FIG. 30 is transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  In (1), a message including the normal sequence number n and the addition sequence number m is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P base 2. P base 2 which received the telegram of (1) returns the telegram of (2) including the same normal serial number n and added serial number m as the received telegram as in (2).

  The CU 3 that has received the telegram of (2) transmits the telegram of (3) (normal serial number n + 1, addition serial number m) in which the normal serial number is updated. P base 2 which received the telegram of (3) sends back the telegram of (4) including the same normal serial number n and the additional serial number m as the received telegram.

  As described above, each time the CU 3 receives a message from the P-unit 2, the CU 3 normally updates one serial number and transmits the next message. On the other hand, P stand 2 does not usually renew a serial number. Also, the addition serial number is not updated unless an addition request occurs.

  Next, when an addition request (due to a ball lending operation or a storage ball withdrawal operation) occurs, a request message of (5) in which one addition serial number is updated is transmitted from CU3 to P platform 2 (normal serial number n + 2 , Add serial number m + 1). The request message includes data in which the addition request bit is turned ON. At this stage, the CU 3 has already established processing (debit balance of the card and withdrawal of the balls) for the addition request.

  P 2 receives the request message of (5), and recognizes the addition request based on the fact that the addition serial number has been updated one from the previous time. Then, it is determined whether to accept the current addition request. This determination is performed, for example, by the payout control unit 171 of the P-unit 2. The payout control unit 171 determines whether or not the process of adding the game balls is possible on the side of the P-table 2. The case where the addition process of the game ball is not possible is, for example, the case where the game ball has already reached the predetermined upper limit value.

  When the request is accepted, the acceptance message of the two messages of (6) is transmitted, and when the request is rejected, the rejection message of the two messages of (6) is transmitted. In the consent message, the addition serial number is the addition serial number m + 1 included in the request message of (5). On the other hand, in the rejection message, the addition serial number is set to the addition serial number m included in the message transmitted and received one before the (6). The normal serial number is n + 2, which is included in the request message of (5), for both the acceptance message and the rejection message.

  The CU 3 includes an area for backing up and storing the added serial number included in the immediately preceding transmission message, and an area for backing up and storing the normal serial number included in the received telegram. These areas are provided, for example, in the microcomputer of the CU control unit 323 of CU3. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the message of (6) compares and determines the addition serial number stored in the backup with the addition serial number included in the message of (6). As a result, if the stored add sequence number and the add sequence number included in the transmitted message are the same (in this example, m + 1), it is determined that the request has been accepted. On the other hand, when the added serial number sent is delayed by one (m in this example), it is determined that the request is rejected.

  (5) 'of FIG. 30 shows the case where the requested message has not reached P table 2 due to noise or other factors. In this case, since the P base 2 waits for the telegraphic message arrival from the CU 3, no telegraphic message is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. After transmitting the request message of (5) ', the CU 3 waits for a predetermined period (200 ms), and resends the same request message (5)' because there is no response from the P-unit 2.

<Operation concerning counting serial number>
FIG. 31 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the operation of base 2 and CU 3 in relation to the counting serial number. When the counting request is not generated, the telegram including the normal serial number and the counting serial number as shown in (1) to (3) of FIG. 31 is transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P base 2.

  In (1), a message including the normal sequence number n and the counting sequence number m is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2. P base 2 which received the telegram of (1) sends back the telegram of (2) including the same normal serial number n and counting serial number m as the received telegram as in (2).

  The CU 3 that has received the telegram of (2) transmits the telegram of (3) (normal serial number n + 1, counting serial number m) in which the normal serial number is updated. As described above, each time the CU 3 receives a message from the P-unit 2, the CU 3 normally updates one serial number and transmits the next message. On the other hand, P stand 2 does not usually renew a serial number. Also, the counting serial number is not updated unless a counting request occurs.

  Next, when a counting request (detection of counting operation) occurs, a request message of (4) in which one counting serial number is updated is transmitted from P 2 to CU 3 (normal serial number n + 1, counting serial number m + 1 ). The request message includes data in which the counting request bit is turned ON. In addition, P stand 2 is not performing the counting process at this stage.

  The P unit 2 receives the request message of (4), and recognizes the counting request based on the fact that the counting serial number has been updated by one from the previous time. Then, it is determined whether to accept this counting request. This determination is performed by, for example, the CU control unit 323 of CU3. The CU control unit 323 determines whether or not counting processing (processing for adding balls) is possible. The case where the counting process is not possible is, for example, the case in the middle of the process (wagon service etc.) using balls.

  When the request is accepted, the consent message of the two telegrams of (5) is transmitted, and when the request is rejected, the denial telegram of the two telegrams of (5) is transmitted. In the consent message, the counting serial number is the counting serial number m + 1 included in the request message of (4). On the other hand, in the rejection telegram, the counting serial number is set to the counting serial number m included in the telegram transmitted and received one before the (4). The normal serial number has been updated from the request message of (5) for both the acceptance message and the rejection message, and is n + 2.

  The P-unit 2 has an area for backing up and storing the counting serial number included in the immediately preceding transmission message and the normal serial number. Such an area is provided, for example, in the microcomputer of the payout control unit 171 of the P-table 2. The payout control unit 171 of the P-base 2 that has received the message of (5) compares and determines the counting serial number stored in the backup with the counting serial number included in the message of (5). As a result, if the stored counting serial number and the counting serial number included in the transmitted message are the same (in this example, m + 1), it is determined that the request has been accepted. On the other hand, when the transmitted serial number is delayed by one (m in this example), it is determined that the request is rejected.

  (4) 'of FIG. 31 shows the case where the request message does not reach the P base 2 due to noise and other factors. In this case, the CU 3 waits for a predetermined period (200 ms) after transmitting the message of (3), and resends the same message (3) because there is no response from the P-unit 2. The P series 2 which received the telegram of (3) which has been retransmitted has a normal serial number included in the telegram of n + 1, and usually transmits the serial number of the request telegram of (4) '. Since it has not changed, it is determined that the request message of (4) 'has not arrived. Then, the P-table 2 retransmits the same request message (4) ′ ′ as (4) ′.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a request serial number (addition serial number, counting serial number) different from the normal serial number is included in the message and transmitted. These request sequence numbers are added and updated when the communication partner is requested to perform operations such as addition request and counting request. Otherwise, addition and update are not performed even if transmission and reception of a message are performed.

  On the other hand, the normal serial number is updated each time a message is sent from CU 3 regardless of the presence or absence of a request for the communication partner (note that the normal serial number is mutually updated in both CU 3 and P 2 You may operate.).

  For this reason, in the case of a normal serial number, although it can be determined using the serial number included in the received telegram from the other party, whether the transmitted request telegram has arrived at the other party, is the received telegram indicating an acceptance telegram indicating request acceptance? It can not be specified until it is a denial message indicating rejection of request.

  However, as described above, the request message having the updated request sequence number is transmitted using the request sequence number such as the addition sequence number and the counting sequence number as in the present embodiment, and the request sequence number included in the request message as a response thereto. When a telegram including the same request serial number as that of is received, depending on the value of the serial number, not only whether the transmitted request telegram has arrived at the other party, but also whether the telegram sent back from the other party is an acceptance telegram Can identify. Of course, as in the present embodiment, since the request telegram includes data in which the request bit (addition request bit or counting request bit) is turned ON, the received telegram is also the acceptance telegram even when this data is determined. It can identify whether it is a rejection message or not. However, it is possible to delete such a request bit from the message by using the request sequence number. As a result, the message data amount can be reduced, and the process of determining the request bit of the message data can be made unnecessary.

  In the present embodiment, although the update value for the request serial number when the request occurs is +1, this is an example, and other update values such as +2, +3, -1, or -2 are adopted. May be

<First to third check processing>
Next, the first check process, the second check process, and the third check process executed by the CU control unit 323 will be described based on FIGS. 32 (a), (b) and FIG.

  First, the first check process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S (hereinafter simply referred to as "S") 300, it is determined whether or not there is storage of gaming machine information. This is to determine whether or not the gaming machine information is included in the recovery response transmitted from the P unit 2. In the case of FIG. 20 and FIG. 21 described above, the gaming machine information (specifically, Since the last time the game table information is included, the determination of YES is made in S300. If it is determined that the gaming machine information is not included, the first check process ends.

  If it is determined that there is storage of the gaming machine information, the control proceeds to S301, and the additional balls included in the received gaming machine information (specifically, the previous gaming machine information) has a predetermined threshold value. It is determined whether it is N1 or more. This threshold N1 is the maximum addition number (for example, the maximum addition ball at the time of a big hit) of the game ball accompanying the prize during one cycle (200 ms) of the state information request and the state information response between CU3 and P platform 2 It is set to a value slightly larger than the number 120) (for example, 125). Therefore, in the normal case, the received added ball number should be smaller than the threshold value N1. However, the fact that the number of added balls is larger than the threshold N1 means that the gaming machine information including the number of added balls and the number of game balls illegally increased due to a fraud etc. being performed on the P-unit 2 while offline is a recovery response There is a possibility that it has been sent to CU3. In that case, the control proceeds to S304, and control is performed to notify the occurrence of an error by the abnormality notification lamp or the indicator 312, and control is performed to transmit an error notification signal to the hole server 801 indicating that an error has occurred. (In this case, an error notification may be issued by the hole server 801). In place of or in addition to the hall server 801, control may be performed to transmit an error notification signal to the hall management computer.

  Next, control proceeds to step S305, and the CU control unit 323 waits for reset. After entering the reset waiting state, the CU control unit 323 stops the control until the reset release signal is input to the IR photosensitive unit 320 by remote control operation by a game arcade clerk, and the CU is input when the reset signal is input. The control unit 323 is reset and returns to the same state as power on (see FIG. 8).

  Even if an abnormality is determined as a result of the check processing in S301 and S303, the information stored in the CU3 side is that the CU3 or P unit 2 is replaced with a new one after the communication is disconnected and the communication is restored thereafter. And the recovery process may be caused by the fact that the information transmitted from the P-unit 2 is completely different. Even if it is not such a fraudulent act, it may be judged as an anomaly, so that it is possible to release the reset waiting state by remote control operation by a game arcade clerk, and make it intervene by artificial judgment by a game arcade clerk To be able to respond properly.

  On the other hand, when the determination in S301 is NO, the control proceeds to S302, and the number of additional balls received from P is added to the number of gaming balls stored in the CU control unit 323 and the number of subtractive balls is calculated. An operation of subtracting R1 which is the calculation result is performed. That is, when it is determined that the number of added balls included in the game table information received from P platform 2 is appropriate, the latest number of played balls R1 is calculated using the number of added balls and the number of reduced balls. It is calculated. Next, at S303, the calculated absolute value of the R1-received game ball number, that is, the difference between R1 and the received game ball number is calculated, and it is determined whether the difference is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold N2. A judgment is made. Originally, R1 and the number of received game balls are habits of the same value, and the difference is a mean of zero. However, with the progress of control on the CU side and P side during the game, an error ball may be generated between the two. The error balls (for example, five pieces) are set as the threshold value N2. Therefore, if the difference between R1 and the number of received game balls is greater than or equal to this threshold N2, the possibility of the occurrence of a fraud is assumed as described above, and the control proceeds to S304 and onward as described above.

  On the other hand, if the difference between R1 and the number of received game balls is less than the threshold N2, it is determined that the number of received game balls is an appropriate value, and the number of received game balls is determined as the number of new game balls. Is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323.

  Next, the second check process will be described based on FIG. The number of added balls in the game machine information (specifically, the current game machine information) included in the state information response from P 2 sent back in response to the state information request immediately after the communication start response is predetermined. It is determined in S310 whether the threshold value N3 is equal to or greater than the threshold value N3. This received additional ball number is from when the P unit last transmitted the status information response to the CU 3 to when the power is interrupted at the P unit or until the P unit detects the communication line disconnection and the game is stopped. The fluctuation amount of the number of added balls in such a relatively short limited period does not become so large, and falls within a certain upper limit. Therefore, a value (for example, 125) slightly larger than the upper limit (for example, 120) is set as the threshold N3. Then, if the number of added balls received is equal to or more than the threshold value N3, the control proceeds to S314, and control is performed to notify the occurrence of an error by the abnormality notification lamp or the indicator 312, and an error occurs in the hole server 801. Control is performed to transmit an error notification signal to the effect (in this case, error notification may be performed by the hole server 801). In place of or in addition to the hall server 801, control may be performed to transmit an error notification signal to the hall management computer.

  Next, control proceeds to step S315, and the CU control unit 323 waits for reset. After entering the reset waiting state, the CU control unit 323 stops the control until the reset release signal is input to the IR photosensitive unit 320 by remote control operation by a game arcade clerk, and the CU is input when the reset signal is input. The control unit 323 is reset and returns to the same state as power on (see FIG. 8).

  On the other hand, if NO is determined in S310, the control proceeds to S311, and the CU number added is added to the game ball number stored in the CU control unit 323 and the received ball number is subtracted. Then, an operation to calculate R2 is performed. As described above, the “stored number of game balls” mentioned here is the number of game balls received from the P-base 2 when the determination of NO is made in S303. Then, in S312, it is determined whether or not the difference between the R2 and the number of gaming balls received from the P platform 2 is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold N4. Originally, R2 and the number of received game balls are habits of the same value, and the difference is a mean of zero. However, with the progress of control on the CU side and P side during the game, an error ball may be generated between the two. The error balls (for example, five pieces) are set as the threshold value N4. Therefore, if the difference between R1 and the number of received game balls is greater than or equal to this threshold N4, the possibility of the occurrence of a fraud is assumed as described above, and the control proceeds to S314 and onward as described above.

  If NO is determined in S312, the control proceeds to S313, and the CU control unit 323 stores the number of gaming balls received from the P platform 2 as the number of gaming balls as the initial value, and then performs the second check process. Control ends.

  After the processing of S313 is performed, transmission and reception of normal status information request and status information response are performed between the CU 3 and the P base 2. At this time, the CU control unit 323 determines that the initial value is set in S313. With the number of gaming balls stored as the number of gaming balls as an initial value, the current number of gaming balls is calculated based on the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls, and transmitted from P 2 based on the current number of gaming balls It is determined whether or not the difference from the number of coming game balls exceeds the predetermined number of error balls (for example, 5), and if it exceeds, it is determined as abnormal, and the above-mentioned S304, S305, S314, and S315. Similar control is performed.

  Next, control of the third check process will be described based on FIG. The CU control unit 323 executes this third check processing immediately after receiving the recovery response 2 from the P-unit 2 (see FIGS. 22, 24, and 25).

  The recovery request 2 and the recovery response 2 are, as described above, the game balls according to the game ball addition request according to the game ball addition request although the CU 3 outputs the game ball addition request to the P base 2 The addition recovery of the number of game balls is performed when the addition process of is not performed. Then, the recovery response 2 sent from the P unit 2 to the CU 3 notifies of the processing result as to whether or not the addition recovery processing has been normally performed. In S320, the CU control unit 323 determines whether the recovery result is a process failure. If the process NG, that is, the addition recovery is not properly performed, the control proceeds to S324, and control is performed to notify the occurrence of an error by the abnormality notification lamp or the display 312, and an error occurs in the hole server 801. Control is performed to transmit an error notification signal to the effect (in this case, error notification may be performed by the hole server 801). In place of or in addition to the hall server 801, control may be performed to transmit an error notification signal to the hall management computer.

  Next, control proceeds to step S325, and the CU control unit 323 waits for reset. After entering the reset waiting state, the CU control unit 323 stops the control until the reset release signal is input to the IR photosensitive unit 320 by remote control operation by a game arcade clerk, and the CU is input when the reset signal is input. The control unit 323 is reset and returns to the same state as power on (see FIG. 8).

  On the other hand, when the recovery result is the processing OK, the control proceeds to S321, and the CU control unit 323 performs processing to add the number of additional balls transmitted to P base 2 to the number of gaming balls currently stored. . This is because the addition recovery for the number of added balls in the game ball addition request outputted by the CU 3 is normally performed in the P-base 2, so the number of added balls is added to the number of game balls and the normal game balls at the current time It is a process for calculating the number.

  Next, the control proceeds to S322, and an arithmetic operation is performed to calculate R3 by adding the number of added balls transmitted from P base 2 to the number of gaming balls after the addition and subtracting the number of subtracted balls. The number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls are game table information (specifically, the previous game table information) transmitted from P platform 2 as a recovery response, and the previous game platform information is included in the recovery response. If not, the number of added balls and the number of reduced balls are both zero, and as a result, the number of game balls after addition = R3 is calculated.

  Next, in S323, it is determined whether the calculated difference between R3 and the number of gaming balls received by CU3 is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold N2. Originally, R1 and the number of received game balls are habits of the same value, and the difference is a mean of zero. However, with the progress of control on the CU side and P side during the game, an error ball may be generated between the two. The error balls (for example, five pieces) are set as the threshold value N2. Therefore, if the difference between R1 and the number of received game balls is greater than or equal to this threshold N2, the possibility of the occurrence of a fraud is assumed as described above, and the control proceeds to S324 and onward as described above.

  On the other hand, if the difference between R1 and the number of received game balls is less than the threshold N2, it is determined that the number of received game balls is an appropriate value, and the number of received game balls is determined as the number of new game balls. The CU control unit 323 stores it as

  As described above, the previous game platform information is transmitted first as game platform information from P platform 2 to CU 3, and then the game platform information is transmitted this time so that both game platform information can be distinguished on the CU 3 side. In order to be transmitted, the CU control unit 323 can determine the suitability of each of the two pieces of gaming machine information. As a result, for example, the game ball number data in the previous game table information sent from the P platform 2 is not to differ greatly from the game ball number data currently stored by the CU control unit 323, and For example, the game ball number data in the current game table data to be sent thereafter is also not so much different from the game ball number data in the previous game machine information received by the CU 3. If there is a large difference in the difference between these data, it can be determined that the game ball number data is improperly padded.

  Temporarily, when the sum total data which totaled the last game table data and this time game data is collectively transmitted to P3 from CU2 compared with the case where the last time game data and this time game data are distinguished separately, respectively. Therefore, only rough judgment can be made, and it becomes difficult to judge fraud accordingly. In order to prevent such inconveniences, the game console data is transmitted in two steps so that both data can be distinguished in the CU control section 323, and it becomes possible to finely distinguish abnormal conditions for each game console data, which is abnormal It is easy to distinguish.

  In the first check process to the third check process described above, after the propriety of the number of added balls is first determined, if it is appropriate, the current number of game balls is calculated based on the number of added balls, and the number is determined. Although the number of gaming balls sent is compared between the number of gaming balls and the number of gaming balls transmitted from P platform 2 to determine whether the number of gaming balls transmitted is appropriate or not, it is simply transmitted from P platform 2 It is also possible to compare the number of game balls with the number of game balls stored in the CU 3 to determine the propriety.

  Furthermore, CU3 is the number of final game balls stored before the recovery process (hereinafter referred to as "number of CU game balls") and the number of game balls in the information of the previous game platform received from P 2 (hereinafter "The last game ball number in the last game" and the number of game balls in the latest game table information received from the P platform 2 (hereinafter referred to as "the number of latest game balls in the P car") The determination may be made. As a specific example of comparison and determination among three parties, the number of CU gaming balls is compared with the number of P last game balls, and if correct, the number of P last game balls and the number of P latest game balls are compared and determined. Do. Alternatively, the number of CU gaming balls is compared with the number P of the previous game balls, and if it is correct, the number of CU gaming balls is compared with the number of P latest gaming balls. Furthermore, the number of P previous game balls and the number P latest game balls are compared and determined first, and if correct, the number of CU game balls and the number P last game balls are compared and determined, and further the number of CU game balls and P The table latest game ball number is compared and determined.

  The first to third check processes described above are preferably performed when the CU 3 or the P base 2 is not replaced (replaced). When exchange (replacement) is performed at the time of communication interruption, it is common for the number of game balls on the CU side and P side to be largely different in recovery processing, which is why the above-mentioned first This is because an error is determined as a result of check processing to third check processing. Therefore, when CU3 or P unit 2 is replaced after communication disconnection, control may be performed so that the first check processing to the third check processing are not performed in the recovery processing at the time of communication recovery. Specifically, when the difference between the previous last transmission sequence number transmitted from P base 2 as the recovery response and the previous latest transmission sequence number stored in CU control section 323 is 2 or more, CU3 or P base 2 The CU control unit 323 determines that the replacement has been made, and controls so that the CU control unit 323 does not perform the first check processing to the third check processing.

  Furthermore, regardless of whether the CU 3 or the P unit 2 is exchanged, control may be performed so that the previous game data and the current game data are not checked on the CU 3 side at the time of recovery. In this way, it is possible to prevent the annoyance of the check abnormality determination caused by the replacement of the CU 3 or the P base 2.

<Operation regarding request serial number>
Next, the method of updating the serial number described in the communication sequence shown in FIGS. 6 to 31 is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this method. For example, the method of updating the serial number as described below may be applied to the communication sequence shown in FIGS.

<< Update both serial number and request serial number >>
FIG. 34 is a conceptual diagram for illustrating the operation of the P-unit 2 and the CU 3 regarding the request sequence number. One of the devices A and B shown in FIG. 34 is the P base 2 and the other is CU3. A device that generates a request for the other party is A device, and a device that receives the request from A device is B device.

  When the A device is CU3 and the B device is P platform 2, the request serial number is an addition serial number, and the request is a game ball addition request. A specific communication sequence in this case is as shown in FIG.

  When the A device is P 2 and the B device is CU 3, the request serial number is a counting serial number, and the request is a counting request of gaming balls. A specific communication sequence in this case is as shown in FIG.

  Here, these two cases are conceptualized and explained. While there is no request for the device B, the device A transmits a message in which the request sequence number m is not updated as in (1). However, the normal serial number n is updated each time a message is sent. Device B receives this and sends back a telegram as shown in (2). In this message, the normal serial number is updated to n + 1. However, the request serial number is not updated as m.

  As long as no request occurs in the A device, as in (1) and (2), while updating the normal serial number, both sides transmit the telegram. During this time, the normal sequence number included in the telegram received from the other party is checked to determine whether the telegram transmitted immediately before has reached the other party.

  When a request occurs in the A device, the A device updates the request sequence number to m + 1, and transmits a request message including the updated request sequence number m + 1 to the B device as shown in (3). At this time, the normal serial number is also updated to n + 2. The request message includes data in which a request bit (addition request bit or counting request bit) is turned on.

  The device B that has received the request message including the request sequence number m + 1 determines whether or not to accept the request. For example, if it is a counting request, the CU 3 determines whether it is possible to add balls at the CU 3 side. Alternatively, if it is an addition request, it is determined whether or not the process of adding game balls is possible on the side of the P platform 2. The case where addition processing of balls is not possible is, for example, the case in the middle of processing (wagon service etc.) using balls. Further, the case where the addition process of the game balls is not possible is, for example, the case where the game balls have already reached the predetermined upper limit value.

  If the request is accepted, an acceptance message in which the request serial number is updated to m + 2 is transmitted to the A-device, as described above (4). On the other hand, when rejecting the request, as described under (4), a rejection message not updated with the request serial number being m + 1 (also referred to as a rejection telegram; the same applies hereinafter) to the A device Send. The normal serial number is updated to n + 3 in each case.

  The A-apparatus has storage means for storing the request sequence number included in the immediately preceding transmission message. The A-device which has received the message of (4) compares and determines the request sequence number stored in the storage means with the request sequence number included in the message of (4). As a result, if the stored request sequence number and the request sequence number included in the transmitted message are the same (in this example, m + 1), it is determined that the request is rejected. On the other hand, if the value obtained by adding a predetermined number (1 in this example) to the stored request sequence number is the same as the request sequence number included in the transmitted message (in this example, m + 2) (in other words, , If the request serial number sent is one in advance), it is determined that the request has been accepted. If it is determined that the request has been accepted, the request serial number is further updated by one, and a message including the specific request value (the number of counting balls and the number of adding balls) is transmitted to the B-device. On the other hand, when it is determined that the request has been rejected, a message including the received request sequence number is transmitted to the B-device.

  The case where the request message of (3) does not reach the B apparatus due to noise or other factors is shown in (3) 'of FIG. In this case, the B-device determines that there is no response when a predetermined standby time (for example, 200 ms) has elapsed since the telegram of (2) was transmitted, and retransmits the telegram of (2). As a result, the message of (2) arrives at the device A that has transmitted (3) '. Then, although the device A transmits the request message of the request sequence number m + 1, the request sequence number of the reply message to it does not correspond to either the request acceptance or the request rejection (from the request sequence number included in the request message Because of the delayed request sequence number), it is determined that the request message has not arrived. In addition, it is also possible to make such determination using the direction of a normal serial number. That is, while the normal sequence number included in the request sequence number is n + 3, the normal sequence number included in the reply message is n + 2, so it can be determined that the request message has not arrived based on such a situation.

  If the device A determines that the request message has not arrived, it resends the request message of (3).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the request serial number is included in the message and transmitted separately from the normal serial number. This request sequence number is started to be updated upon requesting the communication partner to perform an operation such as addition request or counting request, and is stopped at the end of the request operation or upon rejection of the request. Other than that, even if telegrams are sent and received, they are not updated.

  On the other hand, the normal serial number is updated each time a message is exchanged regardless of the presence or absence of a request to the communication partner (note that the normal serial number is updated only in one of the A device and the B device, The other may send back the serial number received from the other party as it is.)

  Therefore, in the case of a normal serial number, although it can be determined using the serial number included in the received telegram from the other party, whether or not the transmitted request telegram has arrived at the other party, but the received telegram is an acceptance telegram indicating request acceptance. It can not be specified whether it is a rejection message indicating rejection of the request.

  However, as described above, when the request serial number is used as in the present embodiment, not only whether the transmitted request message has arrived to the other party according to the request serial number, but also the telegram sent back from the other party is accepted. It can be specified whether it is a message or a rejection message. Of course, as in the present embodiment, since the request telegram includes data in which the request bit (addition request bit or counting request bit) is turned ON, the received telegram is also the acceptance telegram even when this data is determined. It can identify whether it is a rejection message or not. However, it is possible to delete such a request bit from the message by using the request sequence number. As a result, the message data amount can be reduced, and the process of determining the request bit of the message data can be made unnecessary.

<< update only one of the serial number and request serial number >>
FIG. 35 is a diagram for describing a modified example of the operation of P base 2 and CU 3 with respect to a normal serial number and a request serial number. This modification is different from the example shown in FIG. 34 in that the normal serial number is not updated when the request serial number is updated.

  That is, in this modification, of the normal serial number and the request serial number, when the request is not generated, only the normal serial number is updated and the message is exchanged. However, when a request occurs, the update of the normal serial number is stopped and only the request serial number is updated. After that, when the series of processing for the request ends, or when the rejection telegram for the request is sent, the update of the request sequence number is stopped and the update of the normal sequence number is started instead.

  Therefore, in the message exchange before the request occurrence shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. 35, while the normal serial number is updated to n and n + 1, the request serial number m is not updated. However, in the request message of (3) transmitted upon the occurrence of a request, the normal sequence number remains n + 1 and is not updated, while the request sequence number is updated to m + 1. Similarly, neither the acceptance message nor the rejection message of (4) for the request message is updated with the normal serial number being n + 1.

  Even in this case, the A-device that has received the message of (4) can determine whether the message is an acceptance message or a rejection message by determining the request sequence number included in the message.

  Also, as shown in (3) ', even when the message of (2) is retransmitted from the device B without the request message reaching the device B, the device A reaches the request message based on the request serial number. It can be determined that it did not do.

  As in this modification, even if the update of the normal serial number is stopped from the time when the request occurs to the end of processing for the request, there is no problem because the request serial number takes over the function of the normal serial number during that time It does not occur. In addition, during the period, there is also an effect that the process of updating the normal serial number or checking the normal serial number becomes unnecessary.

<Origin of registration (update) and deletion (clear) of recovery information>
In the abnormal system sequence illustrated in FIGS. 18 to 28, the sequence for performing the recovery process and recovering the system using the recovery information stored in the P unit 2 or CU 3 has been described. The recovery information used for the recovery process includes, for example, "previous final transmission serial number", "previous final transmission addition serial number", "previous final transmission counting serial number", "number of requested counting balls", "card ID", "card insertion""Time","storecode","SC substrate ID", "game ball information", "game information", "number of game balls", "ball unit price" and the like.

  The recovery information is newly registered or updated and the timing (trigger) to be stored in the P-unit 2 or the CU 3 differs in each information. FIG. 36 is a diagram for explaining a trigger of registration (updating) and erasure (clearing) of recovery information. The timing (trigger) of registration or update of each piece of recovery information will be described with reference to FIG. The “previous final transmission sequence number” is newly registered or updated when P 2 transmits a response of the status information response to CU 3 (during status information response transmission). The “previous final transmission addition serial number” is CU3 Bit3 = “1” (at the time of game ball addition request) included in the command of the status information request transmitted from CU3 and the P unit 2 responds to the status information as a CU3 Are newly registered or updated when transmitting to (when transmitting a status information response).

  The “previous final transmission counting serial number” and the “counting request ball number” are Bit4 = “1” (when counting is requested) of gaming machine status 1 included in the response of the status information response that P unit 2 sends to CU3 When a response of the status information response is sent to the CU 3 (when the status information response is sent), it is newly registered or updated. The “card ID” and the “card insertion time” are newly registered or updated when P base 2 transmits a response of a card insertion response to CU 3 (card insertion response transmission).

  “Store code” and “SC board ID” are sent when P platform 2 sends a response to card insertion response to CU 3 (when card insertion response is sent) or when P platform 2 receives a counting history request command from CU 3 It is newly registered or updated (when counting history is requested). “Game ball information”, “game information”, “game ball number” and “ball unit price” are newly registered when P base 2 transmits a response of status information response to CU 3 (when status information response is transmitted) It will be updated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the timing (trigger) of erasing (clearing) of respective recovery information will be described. “Previous final transmission serial number”, “previous final transmission counting serial number” and “number of requested counting balls” are when P 2 transmits a response to communication start response to CU 3 (at the time of communication start response transmission) or P 2 When an instruction to clear the provided RAM is issued (at the time of instruction to clear the RAM), the information is erased. The “last transmission addition serial number in the last time” is cleared of information when an instruction to clear the RAM provided in the P-unit 2 is issued (at the time of instruction to clear the RAM).

  "Card ID" and "card insertion time" are when P stand 2 transmits a response of card return response to CU 3 (card return response transmission) or when an instruction to clear the RAM provided in P stand 2 is issued. The information is erased (when the RAM clear is instructed). In addition, “card ID” and “card insertion time” are when P stand 2 detects a store code mismatch and sends a response to communication start response to CU 3 (when a store mismatch detection is detected) Information is erased.

  The “store code” and the “SC substrate ID” erase the information when an instruction to clear the RAM provided to the P-unit 2 is issued (at the time of the instruction to clear the RAM). “Game ball information” and “Game information” are sent when P platform 2 sends a response to communication start response to CU 3 (when communication start response is sent) or when an instruction to clear the RAM provided in P platform 2 is issued. The information is erased (when the RAM clear is instructed). The "number of game balls" and the "ball unit price" are erased when an instruction to clear the RAM provided to the P-table 2 is issued (at the time of instruction to clear the RAM).

<Encryption key used for communication between key management server and communication control IC>
Next, an encryption key used for communication between the key management server and the communication control IC will be described. FIG. 37 is a diagram for explaining an encryption key used for communication between the key management server and the communication control IC 325a. First, the encryption key used for communication from the key management server to the communication control IC 325a mainly includes a board shipping key, a board initial key, a board authentication key, a real authentication key, a temporary authentication key, and a valid key (commercial) , Communication key 1 (session key) and communication key 2 (session key). The board shipping key is used for communication between the CU control unit and the SC, and is used only for encryption of the communication test message before shipping. The substrate initial key is used for communication of the CU control unit-SC, and is received by the CU control unit 323 at the time of the first communication with the hall server, and stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323. The SC 325 b generates the substrate initial key from the embedded information at the time of manufacture and stores it in the RAM. The communication for authentication (substrate initial key mode) using the substrate initial key is permitted (limited operation) only for a limited period. Here, in the substrate initial key mode, as described above, since it is necessary to properly communicate with the hall server at least once to obtain the substrate initial key, security is secured.

  Here, the "limited period" is, for example, a limited period of 2 days. In this way, by enabling time-limited operation, even if key exchange with the key management server can not be performed immediately after introducing the system to the hall, the hall will start operating immediately after the introduction of the system. It becomes possible. In addition, as a limited period, you may set the fixed period in one day, for example, every morning from 9 o'clock to 17 o'clock.

  In addition, although the above-mentioned board | substrate initial key mode has provided the restriction | limiting which enables the communication for authentication which used the board | substrate initial key for a limited period, this invention is not limited to this, The amount of money which can be used You may limit the remaining amount of card, or cash). Alternatively, the game may be forcibly terminated to control the gaming machine to the inactivated state when the number of times of variation of the symbol in the variable display device reaches a predetermined number. Alternatively, when the cumulative number of jackpots reaches a certain number, the game may be terminated to control the gaming machine to be in a disabled state. In addition, it is possible to allow only the game by inserting cash and prevent the game using the remaining amount of the card from being performed, or to limit the game to only the game using balls.

  The board authentication key is an encryption key that is used for communication between the CU control unit and the SC and is received from the key management server as part of the board security information. By performing authentication communication using the substrate authentication key, the communication mode (substrate authentication key mode) is switched from timed operation using the substrate initial key to permanent operation (normal operation). The board authentication key is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit and the RAM of the SC.

  The CU control unit 323 receives the valid key stored in the hall server and the SC 325 b receives the valid key for the communication control IC 325 a for both the timed operation using the substrate initial key and the permanent operation using the substrate authentication key. This is realized by enabling communication between P units and CUs by setting for.

  This authentication key is used for communication between the SC and the communication control IC, is generated by the SC 325 b from the update information received from the key management server, and is stored in the RAM of the SC 325 b, and the communication control IC 325 a is also similar to the SC 325 b. The update information is generated from the update information and stored in the RAM of the communication control IC 325a. The main authentication key may be acquired from the key management server or the like. Further, the CU control unit 323 and the communication control IC 325a may generate themselves without receiving update information from the key management server or the like. Furthermore, while acquiring predetermined first data from a key management server or the like, the CU control unit 323 and the communication control IC 325a themselves generate predetermined second data, and the real authentication key is generated from the first data and the second data. It may be generated.

  The temporary authentication key is used for communication between the SC and the communication control IC, and during the period until the main authentication key is generated (or until the set allowable time (for example, 2 days) elapses), SC 325b and It is used for cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325a. Encrypted communication (provisional authentication key mode) using this temporary authentication key is permitted (limited operation) only for a limited period (for example, 2 days). The SC 325 b and the communication control IC 325 a store temporary authentication keys in their respective ROMs from the manufacturing stage. The valid key (commercial) is a key that the SC 325 b receives via the CU control unit 323 at the time of the first communication with the hall server and transmits (sets) the communication control IC 325 a. Communication with P units becomes possible by setting the effective key. The valid key is data for activating the communication control IC 325a. In other words, the valid key is permission information for permitting communication between the CU and the P units.

  The communication key 1 (session key) is used for communication between the CU control unit and the SC, is used for business message communication for a pair of gaming machines, and is created every business day by the SC 325 b using some variable. For example, a counter value (random number) or date and time information may be used as the variable. The communication key 2 (session key) is used for communication between the SC and the communication control IC, and is used for business message communication for a pair of gaming machines.

  Note that, even if the key described above has a configuration in which key data is embedded as it is in each part, information for generating key data is stored in each part, and the information May be used to generate key data.

  Next, a method of acquiring an encryption key and a method of performing encryption communication using the acquired encryption key will be described. First, the SC 325 b acquires a valid key via the CU control unit 323 at the time of the first communication with the hall server. The SC 325 b can communicate with the P units by transmitting (setting) the acquired valid key to the communication control IC 325 a. The CU control unit 323 receives the substrate initial key at the time of the first communication with the hall server, and is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323. The SC 325 b generates the substrate initial key from the embedded information at the time of manufacture and stores it in the RAM. The SC 325 b performs cryptographic authentication with the CU control unit 323 using the obtained substrate initial key, and performs cryptographic communication with the CU control unit 323 in a timely manner using the substrate initial key. Also, the hall server that has received the connection request sent from the CU control unit 323 when the power is turned on sends back to the CU control unit 323 a unified store code for identifying the game arcade in which the hall server is installed. Specifically, the unified store code is transmitted from the input / output interface of the hole server to the CU control unit 323 according to the control of the CPU of the hole server.

  On the other hand, between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b, authentication is performed using a substrate maker code stored as initial information in both. The substrate maker code is a code that specifies the maker that manufactured the security substrate 325. Exchange of the substrate connection request and the substrate connection response is performed on condition that the authentication using the substrate maker code is successful (see FIG. 43). The unified store code is included in the substrate connection request transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325 b, and the SC 325 b acquires the unified store code by receiving the substrate connection request.

  Next, the CU control unit 323 requests substrate security information from the key management server, and is included in the substrate security information by receiving the substrate security information transmitted by the key management server via the hall server. Get board authentication key. The CU control unit performs cryptographic authentication with the SC using the acquired substrate authentication key, and performs cryptographic communication with the SC using the substrate authentication key. The CU control unit 323 does not change the key from the board initial key to the board authentication key immediately after acquiring the board authentication key, but on the condition that the gaming machine is in a non-operating state as described later. Change the key.

  This board authentication key may be generated by the CU control unit 323 itself instead of being acquired from the key management server or the like, and the CU control unit 323 may be acquired by itself while acquiring predetermined first data from the key management server or the like. The predetermined second data may be generated, and the substrate authentication key may be generated from the first data and the second data.

  Next, the SC 325 b performs encrypted communication with the communication control IC 325 a using the stored temporary authentication key. Then, the SC performs encrypted communication with the CU control unit using the substrate authentication key, thereby decrypts the update information acquired from the key management server with the temporary authentication key, and inquires about the substrate inquiry number. When the inquired substrate inquiry numbers match, the SC generates a main authentication key from the update information, and performs cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325a using the generated main authentication key. The authentication key is not stored in the communication control IC 325a from the time of shipping, and is generated from the update information as in the case of the SC 325b.

  Next, the SC notifies the CU control unit of the communication key 1, and by performing communication with the CU control unit thereafter using the communication key 1, business message communication with the gaming machine is possible. It becomes. Further, the SC receives notification of the communication key 2 from the communication control IC by setting the valid key to the communication control IC, and performs communication with the communication control IC thereafter using the communication key 2 Thus, business telegraphic communication with the gaming machine becomes possible.

<Command and Response Transmitted and Received Between CU Control Unit and SC>
Next, communication in the CU 3 shown in FIG. 4 will be described. In particular, communication between the CU control unit 323 and the security chip (SC) 325 b of the security board 325 will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39, an outline of commands and responses transmitted and received between the CU control unit 323 and the security chip (SC) 325 b will be described.

  FIGS. 38 and 39 show the transmission direction and whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, and the names of transmission information and their outlines.

  First, a command named substrate connection request is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325 b. This board connection request command requests the SC 325 b to connect to the game machine (P unit 2). A response named “substrate connection response” is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the substrate connection response is to notify the CU control unit 323 of the response of the substrate connection request.

  The CU control unit 323 transmits a substrate shipping key request command to the SC 325 b. The command of the substrate shipping key request is for requesting the SC 325 b for the substrate shipping key. The response of the board shipping key response is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the board shipping key response is to notify the CU control unit 323 of the board shipping key.

  The command of the substrate maker code authentication request 1 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325 b. The board maker code is a code for specifying the maker that manufactured the security board 325, and is stored in the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b. The command of the substrate maker code authentication request 1 requests the SC 325 b to authenticate the substrate maker code. The response of the substrate maker code authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the substrate maker code authentication response 1 notifies the CU control unit 323 of the authentication information of the substrate serial ID.

  The command of the substrate maker code authentication request 2 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325 b. The command of the substrate maker code authentication request 2 requests the SC 325 b to authenticate the substrate serial ID. The response of the substrate maker code authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the substrate maker code authentication response 2 notifies the CU control unit 323 of the authentication information of the substrate maker code.

  The command of substrate serial ID authentication request 1 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325 b. The command of the board serial ID authentication request 1 requests the SC 325 b to authenticate the board serial ID. The response of the board serial ID authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the board serial ID authentication response 1 notifies the CU control unit 323 of the authentication information of the board serial ID.

  The command of the board serial ID authentication request 2 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325 b. The command of the board serial ID authentication request 2 requests the SC 325 b to authenticate the board serial ID. A response of the board serial ID authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the board serial ID authentication response 2 notifies the CU control unit 323 of the authentication information of the board serial ID.

  A command of substrate initial key authentication request 1 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325 b. The command of the board initial key authentication request 1 requests the SC 325 b to authenticate the board initial key. The response of the board initial key authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the substrate initial key authentication response 1 is to notify the CU control unit 323 of the authentication result of the substrate initial key.

  The command of the board initial key authentication request 2 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325 b. The command of the substrate initial key authentication request 2 requests the SC 325 b to authenticate the substrate initial key. The response of the board initial key authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the substrate initial key authentication response 2 is to notify the CU control unit 323 of the authentication result of the substrate initial key.

  A command of substrate authentication key authentication request 1 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325 b. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 requests the SC 325 b to authenticate the board authentication key. The response of the substrate authentication key authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the substrate authentication key authentication response 1 notifies the CU control unit 323 of the authentication result of the substrate authentication key.

  The command of the substrate authentication key authentication request 2 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325 b. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 2 requests the SC 325 b to authenticate the board authentication key. The response of the board authentication key authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the substrate authentication key authentication response 2 notifies the CU control unit 323 of the authentication result of the substrate authentication key.

  The command of the board shipping key authentication request 1 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325 b. The command of the board shipping key authentication request 1 requests the SC 325 b to authenticate the board shipping key. The response of the substrate authentication key authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the board shipping key authentication response 1 is to notify the CU control unit 323 of the authentication result of the board shipping key.

  The command of the board shipping key authentication request 2 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325 b. The command of the board shipping key authentication request 2 requests the SC 325 b to authenticate the board shipping key. A response of the board shipping key authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the board shipping key authentication response 2 notifies the CU control unit 323 of the authentication result of the board shipping key.

  The CU control unit 323 transmits a version information notification command to the SC 325 b. The version information notification command is to notify the SC 325 b of the version of the board authentication key. The response of the version information response is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the version information response is to notify the CU control unit 323 that the version information has been received.

  A command of substrate authentication result notification is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325 b. The command of the substrate authentication result notification notifies the SC 325 b of the authentication result between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b. The response of the substrate authentication result response is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the substrate authentication result response notifies the CU control unit 323 of the authentication result between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b.

  A command of security substrate inquiry instruction notification is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325 b. The command of the security substrate inquiry instruction notification requests the SC 325 b for security substrate inquiry information. The response of the security substrate inquiry result is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the security board inquiry result notifies the CU control unit 323 of the security board inquiry information.

  A command of security board information notification is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325 b. The command of the security substrate information notification is for notifying the SC 325 b of the security substrate information. The response of the security board information result is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the security board information result is to notify the CU control unit 323 that the security board information has been received.

  A command of counter information request is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325 b. This counter information request command is for requesting counter information from the SC 325 b. The response of the counter information response is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the counter information response is to notify the CU control unit 323 of the counter information.

  A command of communication key request is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325 b. The communication key request command requests the SC 325 b for a communication key. A response of the communication key response is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the communication key response is to notify the CU control unit 323 of the communication key.

  The command of the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325 b. The command of the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification requests the SC 325 b for inquiry information of the gaming machine chip. The response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result is to notify the CU control unit 323 of inquiry information of the gaming machine chip.

  A command of gaming machine chip information notification is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325 b. The command of the gaming machine chip information notification is for notifying the SC 325 b of the collation result of the gaming machine chip information. The response of the gaming machine chip information result is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the gaming machine chip information result is to notify the CU control unit 323 that the gaming machine chip collation result has been received. The notification result included in the response of the gaming machine chip information result is the gaming machine chip information notification result by combining the collation result of the main control chip and the payout control chip. Therefore, the gaming machine chip information notification result indicates that the verification result of the main control chip is OK in the case of "0x00" and the verification result of the payout control chip is also OK in the case of "0x01". "OK" indicates that the result of collation of the dispensing control chip is not acquired yet, "0x02" indicates that the result of collation of the main control chip is not acquired and the result of collation of the dispensing control chip is OK, "0x03" In this case, it is indicated that the collation result of the main control chip is not acquired yet, and the collation result of the delivery control chip is also not acquired. Further, the gaming machine chip information notification result indicates that the verification result of the main control chip is OK and the payout control chip is the verification result of NG in the case of “0x04”, and the verification result of the main control chip in the case of “0x05”. "NG" indicates that the check result of the dispensing control chip is OK, "0x07" indicates that the check result of the main control chip is NG, and the check result of the payout control chip is not yet acquired, "Ox08" It is indicated that the collation result of the main control chip is not acquired and the collation result of the delivery control chip is NG. As described above, the notification result of the gaming machine chip information is notified to the CU control unit 323 as information representing the collation result of the main control chip and the payout control chip individually. As described above, since the verification result of each of the main control chip and the payout control chip obtained from the key management server 800 is output as information representing individually, it is easy to determine which control means has not been verified. Can.

  A command of substrate state request is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325 b. The substrate status request command requests the SC 325 b to display the substrate status. A response of the substrate state response is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the substrate state response notifies the CU control unit 323 of the substrate state.

<Main sequence in communication between CU control unit and SC>
Next, processing executed by the CPU in the CU control unit 323 and processing executed by the security chip (SC) 325 b will be described based on FIGS. 40 to 51.

  First, with reference to FIG. 40, the process of starting up the power of the CU control unit 323 at the time of power on / hole installation will be described. This FIG. 40 shows a sequence when the CU 3 is installed in the game arcade and power is first turned on, and in particular, a start-up sequence at the time of hall installation using the board initial key will be described.

  First, when the power of CU3 is turned on, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b are activated. When CU3 is installed in the game arcade and power is first turned on, the CU control unit 323 sends the board authentication key A and the board authentication key A message authentication code (more specifically, from the hall server) from the host device. For example, a MAC key, etc. (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a MAC key) and a valid key (for commercial / P shipment) are acquired. Here, the board initial key A is an encryption key downloaded from the hall server and stored in the CU control unit 323 when it is first communicated after being delivered to the game arcade and is installed in the key management center. The encryption key is used for communication between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b until the substrate information (substrate serial ID and substrate authentication key) stored in the key management server is acquired. The substrate initial key A is decrypted using the substrate maker code, while the MAC key of the substrate initial key A is similarly decrypted using the substrate maker code. These decryptions are performed by a decryption method according to encryption methods such as DES (Data Encryption Standard), AES (Advanced Encryption Standard), and IDEA (International Data Encryption Algorithm).

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b execute a board maker code authentication sequence, a board initial key authentication sequence, and a security board information inquiry sequence.

  The substrate maker code authentication sequence authenticates the substrate maker code between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b using a challenge / response method. After the processing of the substrate maker code authentication sequence, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b perform the substrate initial key authentication sequence using the substrate initial key acquired from the hall server as the encryption key, and the authentication is OK when the substrate initial key authentication is completed. It becomes. The detailed processing of the substrate initial key authentication sequence will be described later.

  After that, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b use the substrate initial key acquired from the hall server as the encryption key, perform the security substrate information inquiry sequence, and when security substrate information can be acquired, the acquisition becomes OK. The security board information is acquired from the key management server of the key management center, and includes the board serial ID, the board authentication key, and the like. The detailed processing of the security board information inquiry sequence will be described later. The board authentication key is an encryption key downloaded from the key management server installed in the key management center and used for communication between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b. The key management server stores the board authentication key in association with the board serial number or the like.

  If the security board information can be acquired by the security board information inquiry sequence, the SC 325 b performs authentication with the communication control IC 325 a.

  After that, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b perform a communication key exchange sequence using the substrate initial key acquired from the hall server as the encryption key, and exchange the communication key for business message communication.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b use the substrate initial key as the encryption key, perform the communication key exchange sequence, and generate the communication key. In the communication key exchange sequence, the substrate authentication key is used as the encryption key when the substrate information can be acquired by the substrate information acquisition sequence, but the substrate initial key is used as the encryption key timely when the substrate information can not be acquired. Specifically, the communication key is generated using random numbers and data of the current time. The method of generating this communication key (session key) is not limited to the random number and the data at the current time, and any variable data other than the key used for mutual authentication between devices performing encrypted communication may be used. It is also good. The communication key exchange sequence is to exchange a key (communication key) used for encryption communication with the gaming machine to enable a game by the gaming machine, and the detailed processing will be described later.

  When the communication key can be generated by the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325 b acquires gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC 325 a.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b use the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, perform a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, and inquire / notify gaming machine chip information. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip number, a payout control chip number, and the like. The detailed processing of the gaming machine chip information authentication sequence will be described later.

  Next, the CU control unit 323 transmits a command of substrate information request to the SC 325 b in order to request the SC 325 b for the status of the security substrate and the gaming machine. The SC 325 b sends back to the CU control unit 323 a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = operational enable. When the operation of the security board is not possible, the CU control unit 323 performs processing corresponding to each board state. Specifically, upon receiving a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable), the CU control unit 323 returns the process to the communication key exchange sequence. That is, when the SC 325 b determines that the communication key can not be generated normally in the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325 b transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable) to the CU control unit 323 .

  When the CU control unit 323 receives a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = P base chip inquiry request (unusable), the processing returns to the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence. That is, when the SC 325 b determines that the main control chip number and the payout control chip number can not be normally acquired in the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the board state includes the P platform chip inquiry request (unusable). The response of the substrate state response is transmitted to the CU control unit 323.

  When the CU control unit 323 receives a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = unusable, the CU control unit 323 repeatedly transmits the substrate state request to the SC 325 b. That is, when the SC 325 b determines that it is not normal except for the communication key exchange sequence and the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the SC 325 b transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = unusable to the CU control unit 323.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b can communicate with the gaming machine. By performing business message communication with this gaming machine, it becomes possible to play a game in the gaming machine. The business message communication with this gaming machine is operated using a communication key (session key). The communication at this time is, as described above, timed communication, and is permitted only for a fixed period (for example, two days). The communication mode performed through the above processing is the restricted communication mode (board initial key mode (board initial key operation)). If the fixed period (for example, 2 days) in this time-limited operation is over, the temporary operation is stopped, and the SC 325 b notifies the key management server via the CU control unit 323 and the hall server that the over has occurred. Ru.

  After that, CU3 makes a recovery request to P unit 2 and P unit 2 sets CU3 as a response (recovery response) of a recovery response including the last transmission sequence number of the last time, the card ID under insertion last time, and the last card insertion time. Send back.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, processing for turning on the power of the CU control unit 323 and for normal start-up will be described. FIG. 41 shows a sequence when the power is normally turned on after CU3 is installed in the game arcade, and in particular, a start-up sequence using a board authentication key will be described.

  First, when the power of CU3 is turned on, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b are activated. When CU3 is installed in the game arcade and power is first turned on, the CU control unit 323 is a board serial ID key, board from the host device (specifically, via the hall server from the key management server) The MAC key of the authentication key version, the substrate authentication key A, and the substrate authentication key A is acquired. The substrate serial ID key is decrypted by the substrate initial key, the substrate initial key A is decrypted by using the substrate serial ID, and the MAC key of the substrate initial key A is similarly decrypted by using the substrate serial ID. Be done. These decryptions are performed by a decryption method in accordance with an encryption method such as DES, AES or IDEA.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b execute a board maker code authentication sequence, a board authentication key authentication sequence, and a security board information inquiry sequence.

  The substrate maker code authentication sequence authenticates the substrate maker code between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b using a challenge / response method. After processing of the substrate maker code authentication sequence, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b perform the substrate authentication key authentication sequence using the substrate authentication key acquired from the key management server as the encryption key. The detailed processing of the substrate authentication key authentication sequence will be described later.

  After that, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b use the substrate authentication key acquired from the key management server as the encryption key only when the key is updated, and perform the security substrate information inquiry sequence.

  If the substrate authentication key can be authenticated by the substrate authentication key authentication sequence and there is no key update, or if there is a key update and authentication can be performed by the security substrate information inquiry sequence, the SC 325b executes authentication with the communication control IC 325a. .

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b use the substrate authentication key as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and generate a communication key. Specifically, the communication key is generated using random numbers and data of the current time. The method of generating this communication key (session key) is not limited to the random number and the data at the current time, and any variable data other than the key used for mutual authentication between devices performing encrypted communication may be used. It is also good. The communication key exchange sequence is to exchange a key (communication key) used for encryption communication with the gaming machine to enable a game by the gaming machine, and the detailed processing will be described later.

  When the communication key can be generated by the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325 b further acquires gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC 325 a.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b use the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, perform a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, and inquire / notify gaming machine chip information. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip number, a payout control chip number, and the like. The detailed processing of the gaming machine chip information authentication sequence will be described later.

  Next, the CU control unit 323 transmits a command of substrate information request to the SC 325 b in order to request the SC 325 b for the status of the security substrate and the gaming machine. The SC 325 b sends back to the CU control unit 323 a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = operational enable. When the operation of the security board is not possible, the CU control unit 323 performs processing corresponding to each board state. Specifically, upon receiving a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable), the CU control unit 323 returns the process to the communication key exchange sequence. That is, when the SC 325 b determines that the communication key can not be generated normally in the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325 b transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable) to the CU control unit 323 .

  When the CU control unit 323 receives a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = P base chip inquiry request (unusable), the processing returns to the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence. That is, when the SC 325 b determines that the main control chip number and the payout control chip number can not be normally acquired in the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the board state includes the P platform chip inquiry request (unusable). The response of the substrate state response is transmitted to the CU control unit 323.

  When the CU control unit 323 receives a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = unusable, the CU control unit 323 repeatedly transmits the substrate state request to the SC 325 b. That is, when the SC 325 b determines that it is not normal except for the communication key exchange sequence and the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the SC 325 b transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = unusable to the CU control unit 323.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b can communicate with the gaming machine. By performing business message communication with this gaming machine, it becomes possible to play a game in the gaming machine. A communication key (session key) is used for business message communication with this gaming machine. The communication at this time is a normal communication mode (substrate authentication key mode (substrate authentication key operation)) without restrictions such as the restricted communication mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, processing for turning on the power of the CU control unit 323 and setting it up at the time of shipping will be described. This FIG. 42 shows the sequence at the time of factory shipment before CU3 is shipped to the game arcade, and in particular, the factory shipment start-up sequence using the substrate shipping key will be described. The said sequence is a process in CU control part 323 and SC325b of the state which is not connected to a high-order apparatus at the time of factory shipment.

  First, when the power of CU3 is turned on, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b are activated. The CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b execute a board maker code authentication sequence and a board initial key authentication sequence.

  The substrate maker code authentication sequence authenticates the substrate maker code between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b using a challenge / response method. After processing of the substrate maker code authentication sequence, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b perform the substrate initial key authentication sequence using the substrate initial key as the encryption key. However, since CU3 is not yet installed in the game arcade because of the stage at the time of factory shipment, the CU control unit 323 can not acquire the substrate initial key from the hall server of the game arcade. The result is NG.

  After that, the CU control unit 323 determines that the substrate initial key authentication sequence is not successful, so that the CU control unit 323 requests the SC 325 b for the substrate shipping key used for the test of the security substrate 325. Send to After receiving the substrate shipment key request command from the CU control unit 323, the SC 325b transmits, to the CU control unit 323, a response for the substrate shipment key response including the substrate shipment key.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b perform a substrate shipping key authentication sequence using the substrate shipping key acquired from the SC 325 b as the encryption key. The detailed processing of the board shipping key authentication sequence will be described later.

  If the substrate shipping key can be authenticated by the substrate shipping key authentication sequence, the SC 325 b performs authentication with the communication control IC 325 a.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b perform a communication key exchange sequence using the substrate shipping key as the encryption key, and generate a communication key. Specifically, the communication key is generated using random numbers and data of the current time. The method of generating this communication key (session key) is not limited to the random number and the data at the current time, and any variable data other than the key used for mutual authentication between devices performing encrypted communication may be used. It is also good. The communication key exchange sequence is to exchange a key (communication key) used for encryption communication with the gaming machine to enable a game by the gaming machine, and the detailed processing will be described later.

  When the communication key can be generated by the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325 b acquires gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC 325 a.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b use the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, perform a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, and inquire / notify gaming machine chip information. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip number, a payout control chip number, and the like. The detailed processing of the gaming machine chip information authentication sequence will be described later.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 sends a communication test request to the P unit 2, and the P unit 2 transmits a communication test response to the CU 3.

  Next, the CU control unit 323 transmits a command of substrate information request to the SC 325 b in order to request the SC 325 b for the status of the security substrate and the gaming machine. The SC 325 b sends back to the CU control unit 323 a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = operational enable. When the operation of the security board is not possible, the CU control unit 323 performs processing corresponding to each board state. Specifically, upon receiving a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable), the CU control unit 323 returns the process to the communication key exchange sequence. That is, when the SC 325 b determines that the communication key can not be generated normally in the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325 b transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable) to the CU control unit 323 .

  When the CU control unit 323 receives a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = P base chip inquiry request (unusable), the processing returns to the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence. That is, when the SC 325 b determines that the main control chip number and the payout control chip number can not be normally acquired in the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the board state includes the P platform chip inquiry request (unusable). The response of the substrate state response is transmitted to the CU control unit 323.

  When the CU control unit 323 receives a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = unusable, the CU control unit 323 repeatedly transmits the substrate state request to the SC 325 b. That is, when the SC 325 b determines that it is not normal except for the communication key exchange sequence and the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the SC 325 b transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = unusable to the CU control unit 323.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b can communicate only with the gaming machine and the communication test message. By performing communication of this communication test message, communication test at the time of factory shipment is performed. The CU3 that passed the communication test at the time of factory shipment is delivered to the game arcade, and the sequence at the first power-on is the hall installation start-up sequence described with reference to FIG. The sequence is the normal start-up sequence described in FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, processing of the authentication sequence of the substrate maker code will be described.
First, the CU control unit 323 transmits a command of the substrate maker code authentication request 1 for requesting authentication of the substrate maker code to the SC 325 b. In addition, since the board maker code authentication is performed using a challenge / response method, the CU control unit 323 requests the SC 325 b for a challenge code.

  The SC 325 b receiving the command of the substrate maker code authentication request 1 generates a challenge code based on the substrate maker code, and notifies the CU control unit 323 of the generated challenge code by a response of the substrate maker code authentication response 1.

  The CU control unit 323 that has received the command of the substrate maker code authentication response 1 generates a response code based on the challenge code, and notifies the generated response code to the SC 325b by the command of the substrate maker code authentication request 2. Specifically, the challenge code received using the substrate maker code as a key is encrypted to generate a response code.

  If the SC 325 b receives the command of the substrate maker code authentication request 2 checks the response code (specifically, if the challenge code is matched by decrypting the response code with the substrate maker code as a key and extracting the challenge code) Suppose that the check result is OK. Then, the check result is notified to the CU control unit 323 by the response of the substrate maker code authentication response 2. At this time, the CU control unit 323 acquires authentication log information such as a substrate maker code authentication result from the SC 325 b.

  On the other hand, if the challenge codes do not match, it is assumed that the check result is NG (incorrect). In that case, the authentication is repeated n times, and in the case of NG continuously n times, the SC 325 b becomes non-responsive state (HALT), and the substrate authentication key and the main authentication key are cleared. After entering the non-response state (HALT), the SC 325 b does not perform authentication with the communication control IC 325 a, and repairs will be performed at the factory.

  The CU control unit 323 notifies the SC 325 b of CU control unit specific information (unified store code, model number, current time), and transmits a command of a substrate connection request for requesting a connection with the gaming machine.

  After receiving the command of the substrate connection request from the CU control unit 323, the SC 325b holds the information on the unified store code, the date, and the current time, and the CU control unit 323 when the previous unified store code matches. A response to the board connection response notifying that the connection request has been received (OK) is returned.

  On the other hand, when it does not match the previous unified store code, a response of a substrate connection response notifying that the connection request is not received (NG) is sent back to the CU control unit 323, and the substrate stored in the RAM A transition is made to a substrate initial key mode (see FIG. 40) which is a mode in which processing is performed using the substrate initial key as an encryption key while clearing the authentication key. At this time, the CU control unit 323 acquires authentication log information such as a substrate connection request result from the SC 325 b.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, processing of the authentication sequence of the substrate initial key or the substrate shipping key will be described.

  First, as shown in FIG. 44, in the case of the state of the substrate initial key mode which is a mode in which processing is performed using the substrate initial key as an encryption key, authentication using the substrate initial key is performed in FIG. In the case of the state of the board shipping key mode, which is a mode in which processing is performed using the key as an encryption key, authentication using the board shipping key is performed in FIG. Therefore, “/” in FIG. 44 is a symbol representing either one. The CU control unit 323 encrypts the random number of the authentication information with the substrate initial key or the substrate shipping key for the SC 325 b, calculates an algorithm (for example, an H-MAC algorithm or the like using a hash function) with the MAC key, A command of substrate initial key / substrate shipping key authentication request 1 requesting authentication information is transmitted. Although the command of the substrate initial key / substrate shipping key authentication request 1 is not encrypted, it may be encrypted using the substrate initial key / substrate shipping key as the encryption key. The SC 325 b that has received the command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 1 decrypts the random number of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board initial key or the board shipping key.

  The SC 325 b receives the command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 1 and encrypts the random number A of the authentication information with the board initial key or the board shipping key to the CU control unit 323, and the H-MAC with the MAC key. It is calculated and sent back as a response of substrate initial key / substrate shipping key authentication response 1.

  The CU control unit 323 that has received the command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication response 1 decrypts the random number A of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board initial key or the board shipping key.

  After that, the CU control unit 323 encrypts the random number B of the authentication information with the board initial key or the board shipping key, calculates the H-MAC with the MAC key, and requests the board initial key / board shipping key authentication for the SC 325 b. Send with 2 commands. The command of the substrate initial key / substrate shipping key authentication request 2 is encrypted using the substrate initial key or the substrate shipping key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325 b receives the command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 2, decrypts the random number B of the authentication information to check the board initial key or the board shipping key to the CU control unit 323, and checks the MAC. Do. Then, the SC 325 b returns an authentication result to the CU control unit 323 in response to the substrate initial key / substrate shipping key authentication response 2. At this time, the CU control unit 323 acquires authentication log information such as a substrate initial key authentication result and a substrate shipping key authentication result from the SC 325 b.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, processing of the authentication sequence of the substrate serial ID and the substrate authentication key will be described.

  First, in the state of the substrate authentication key mode in which the communication between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b is a mode in which processing is performed using the substrate authentication key as an encryption key, the CU control unit 323 authenticates the substrate serial ID to the SC 325 b. To send a command of the board serial ID authentication request 1 to request. Note that, since the substrate serial ID authentication is performed using a challenge / response method, the CU control unit 323 requests the SC 325 b for a challenge code.

  The SC 325 b receiving the command of the substrate serial ID authentication request 1 generates a challenge code based on the substrate serial ID, and notifies the CU control unit 323 of the generated challenge code by a response of the substrate serial ID authentication response 1.

  The CU control unit 323 that has received the command of the board serial ID authentication response 1 generates a response code based on the challenge code (specifically, generates a response code by encrypting the challenge code using the board serial ID as a key), The generated response code is notified to the SC 325 b by a command of the substrate serial ID authentication request 2.

  The SC 325 b receives the command of the board serial ID authentication request 2 checks the response code (specifically, decrypts the response code using the board serial ID as a key and extracts the challenge code), and the challenge code matches. For example, suppose that the check result is OK. Then, the check result is notified to the CU control unit 323 by the response of the board serial ID authentication response 2. If the check result is NG, the SC 325 b includes the check result in the substrate authentication result notification and the authentication result in the substrate authentication result response, and notifies the CU control unit 323 of NG. At this time, the CU control unit 323 acquires authentication log information such as the substrate serial ID authentication result from the SC 325 b.

  After that, the CU control unit 323 transmits a command of version information notification to notify the version information of the board authentication key to the SC 325 b. The version information notification command is encrypted using the substrate authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325 b having received the command of version information notification sends back a response of version information response to notify the CU control unit 323 that the version information of the board authentication key has been received. Although the response of the version information response is not encrypted, it may be encrypted using a substrate authentication key as the encryption key.

  After that, the CU control unit 323 encrypts the random number of the authentication information with the substrate authentication key, calculates the H-MAC with the MAC key, and transmits the substrate authentication key authentication request 1 command for requesting authentication information to the SC 325 b. Send. In addition, although the command of the board | substrate authentication key authentication request 1 was encrypted by the board | substrate authentication key, you may encrypt using a board | substrate initial key or a board | substrate shipping key as an encryption key. In order to verify the board authentication key, the SC 325b that has received the command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 decrypts the random number of the authentication information and checks the MAC.

  The SC 325 b that has received the command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 encrypts the random number A of the authentication information with the board authentication key to the CU control unit 323, calculates H-MAC with the MAC key, and performs board authentication key authentication Reply in response 1 response.

  The CU control unit 323 that has received the command of the board authentication key authentication response 1 decrypts the random number A of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board authentication key.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 encrypts the random number B of the authentication information with the substrate authentication key, calculates the H-MAC with the MAC key, and transmits the substrate authentication key authentication request 2 command to the SC 325 b. The command of the substrate authentication key authentication request 2 is encrypted using the substrate authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325 b that has received the command of the board authentication key authentication request 2 decrypts the random number B of the authentication information and verifies the MAC to the CU control unit 323 in order to verify the board authentication key. Then, the SC 325 b returns an authentication result to the CU control unit 323 as a response of the board authentication key authentication response 2.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 transmits a command of substrate authentication result notification to the SC 325 b in order to notify the substrate authentication result. The command for substrate authentication result notification is encrypted using the substrate authentication key as the encryption key. The command of substrate authentication result notification notifies the substrate serial ID authentication and the authentication result of the substrate authentication key to the SC 325 b.

  The SC 325 b having received the command of substrate authentication result notification transmits a command of substrate authentication result response to the CU control unit 323 in order to notify the substrate serial ID authentication and the authentication result of the substrate authentication key. The command of the substrate authentication result response is encrypted using the substrate authentication key as the encryption key. At this time, the CU control unit 323 acquires authentication log information such as a substrate authentication result from the SC 325 b.

  Next, FIG. 46 is a figure for demonstrating the process in the case of inquiring about security board information. Referring to FIG. 46, first, CU control unit 323 transmits a command of security substrate inquiry instruction notification in order to request information for inquiring of the higher-level device from SC 325b. The command of the security substrate inquiry instruction notice to be transmitted is encrypted using the substrate initial key or the substrate authentication key as the encryption key.

  In order to notify the CU control unit 323 of information (substrate serial number and inquiry information) for inquiring of the higher-level device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server), the SC 325 b receives the command of the security substrate inquiry instruction notification, The response of the security board inquiry result is sent back to the CU control unit 323. Note that the response of the security board inquiry instruction notification to be sent back is encrypted using the board serial number as the encryption key using the board initial key or the board authentication key, and the key can not be decrypted by the CU control unit 323 and the hall server (see below The inquiry information is encrypted by the "key for secrecy". As a result, only the key management server can decrypt and decipher the inquiry information.

  Based on the board serial number and the inquiry information, the CU control unit 323 that has received the response of the security board inquiry result gives the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server) the information on the security board 325 (board serial number and Query the inquiry information) and wait for a response from the higher-level device. While inquiring about security board information, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b do not have to wait for a response from the host device, and perform the processing of the next step (for example, authentication processing of communication control IC, authentication processing of gaming machine chip information, gaming machine Business message processing, etc.) and execute necessary processing when security board information is received.

  Thereafter, upon receiving the inquiry result (substrate serial ID and substrate authentication key) of the security substrate information from the host device, the CU control unit 323 notifies the SC 325 b of the security substrate information. Specifically, the CU control unit 323 transmits, to the SC 325 b, a command of security board information notification including a board serial ID and a board authentication key which are inquiry results. The command of the security board information notification to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  After receiving the security board information notification command, the SC 325 b confirms the inquiry number, and sends a response of the security board information result in order to notify the CU control unit 323 that the security board information notification command has been received normally. Send back. The key update information is used at the next reset. The response of the security board information result to be returned may not be encrypted, but in the case of encryption, the board initial key or the board authentication key is used as the encryption key.

  Thereafter, when the reception result is OK, the CU control unit 323 stores the board serial ID key and the board authentication key A, and uses the board serial ID key and the board authentication key A as authentication key information at the next reset. Further, the CU control unit 323 acquires authentication log information of the substrate information inquiry and the substrate information notification.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, processing of the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence will be described.
First, the CU control unit 323 transmits a command of notification of gaming machine chip inquiry instruction to inquire gaming machine chip information to the SC 325 b. It should be noted that the command of the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification to be sent may not be encrypted, but in the case of encryption, a communication key is used as the encryption key.

  On the other hand, the SC 325 b acquires gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC. Thereafter, since the SC 325 b that has received the command of the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification has completed the acquisition of gaming machine chip information, CU control of the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result including the information of gaming machine chip inquiry result = OK Reply to part 323. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip ID, a payout control chip ID, and the like. The main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID are encrypted by the concealment key, and the other information is encrypted by using the communication key as the encryption key.

  Thereafter, when the CU control unit 323 receives a response of the result of the inquiry about the returned gaming machine chip, it includes the main control chip number and the payout control chip number in the host device (key management server or hall server: see FIG. 37). Inquires for gaming machine chip information and waits for a response from the host device. During the gaming machine chip information inquiry, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b execute the processing of the next step (business message processing with the gaming machine) without having a response from the host device. Since it takes time (for example, about 2 hours) to inquire about gaming machine chip information, it is impossible to stop the operation of the gaming machine during that time, so the process of the next step without a response from the host device Execute (business message processing with the gaming machine). During the inquiry about gaming machine chip information, even if the reset operation (for example, the operation of the reset button (not shown) or the power re-input) is performed, the request for the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification is not issued again.

  Thereafter, upon receiving the collation result of the gaming machine chip information from the host device, the CU control unit 323 notifies the SC 325 b of the collation result. Specifically, the CU control unit 323 transmits, to the SC 325 b, a command of gaming machine chip information notification including the collation result. It should be noted that the command for notification of the result of checking the gaming machine chip collation to be transmitted is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325 b returns a response to the gaming machine chip information result to notify the gaming machine maker code and the model code to the CU control unit 323 when the collation result is OK after receiving the gaming machine chip information notification command. The response of the gaming machine chip information result to be returned is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  At the same time, the CU control unit 323 acquires an authentication log such as a gaming machine chip information inquiry included in the gaming machine chip information result from the SC 325 b and a gaming machine chip information collation result.

Next, processing of a sequence of substrate authentication key authentication abnormality will be described with reference to FIG.
First, when the power of CU3 is turned on, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b are activated.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b execute a board maker code authentication sequence and a board authentication key authentication sequence.

  The substrate maker code authentication sequence authenticates the substrate maker code between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b using a challenge / response method. After processing of the substrate maker code authentication sequence, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b perform the substrate authentication key authentication sequence using the substrate authentication key acquired from the key management server as the encryption key. Here, if the substrate authentication key authentication is authentication NG, the SC 325 b clears the substrate authentication key information as an authentication error.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b execute a substrate initial key authentication sequence. At this time, the communication of the substrate initial key authentication sequence is encrypted using the substrate initial key as an encryption key.

  When the authentication of the substrate initial key authentication sequence is authentication OK, thereafter, the security substrate information inquiry sequence, the communication key exchange sequence, the gaming machine chip information inquiry as in the processing of the hole installation start-up sequence shown in FIG. Processing such as a sequence is performed, and the game machine and business message communication become possible. The subsequent communication is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325 b notifies the key management server 800 of the “substrate authentication key update abnormality” alarm indicating that the authentication of the substrate authentication key sequence has become an authentication NG.

  Next, FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining processing of a communication line disconnection (PIF) sequence. The communication line disconnection described with reference to FIG. 49 is a case where the communication line between the P-unit 2 and the CU 3 via the PIF circuit 326 (see FIG. 5) is disconnected.

  First, P base 2 and CU 3 are in communication via PIF circuit 326. At this time, the P unit 2 and the CU 3 encrypt information to be communicated using a communication key. Thereafter, a communication line disconnection between P unit 2 and CU 3 occurs. The CU control unit 323 transmits a command of the status information request to the SC 325 b, but since a communication line disconnection between the P base 2 and the CU 3 has occurred, a response of the status information response to the status information request is returned from the SC 325 b. There is nothing to do. When the communication in which the response of the status information response to the status information request is not returned is continued n times, the CU control unit 323 sends a command of the substrate status request for requesting the status of the security board 325 and the P base 2 to the SC 325 b. Send. The command of the substrate state request to be transmitted is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325 b having received the command of the substrate state request transmits, to the CU control unit 323, a response of the substrate state response including information on the state of the security substrate 325 and the state of the P base 2. The response of the substrate state response to be transmitted is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key. The information included in the substrate state response response includes the substrate state, error state, fraud detection state, installation change information, fraud detection information, and the like. For example, when a communication line disconnection occurs in communication via the PIF circuit 326, Bit0 = "1" (PIF line disconnection) in the error state included in the response of the substrate state response. If the store or the like where the CU 3 is installed is different, Bit2 of the fraud detection state included in the response of the substrate state response is “2” (installation combination change detection). In addition, when connected to a game board development jig or a P unit 2 connected to a development unit before connection, Bit3 = “1” of the fraud detection state included in the response of the substrate state response (illegal game machine Connection detection).

  As long as communication line disconnection continues to occur in communication via the PIF circuit 326, a command for substrate status request transmission and an error status Bit0 = "1" (PIF line disconnection for the substrate status request command) The response of the substrate state response including the information of) is repeated between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b.

  When the communication line between the P unit 2 and the CU 3 is restored via the PIF circuit 326, the SC 325b detects the restoration of the communication line, and the error state Bit0 = “0” in response to the transmitted substrate state request command. A response of a substrate state response including information of 0 ′ ′ (no PIF line disconnection) is transmitted to the CU control unit 323.

  Next, the CU control unit 323 acquires gaming machine chip information of the connected P 2 from the communication control IC 325a. Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b use the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, perform a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, and inquire / notify gaming machine chip information. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip number, a payout control chip number, and the like. The detailed processing of the gaming machine chip information authentication sequence is as described above.

  Next, the CU control unit 323 transmits a command of substrate information request to the SC 325 b in order to request the SC 325 b for the status of the security substrate and the gaming machine. The SC 325 b sends back to the CU control unit 323 a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = operational enable. When the operation of the security board is not possible, the CU control unit 323 performs processing corresponding to each board state. Specifically, upon receiving a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable), the CU control unit 323 returns the process to the communication key exchange sequence. That is, when the SC 325 b determines that the communication key can not be generated normally in the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325 b transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable) to the CU control unit 323 .

  When the CU control unit 323 receives a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = P base chip inquiry request (unusable), the processing returns to the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence. That is, when the SC 325 b determines that the main control chip number and the payout control chip number can not be normally acquired in the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the board state includes the P platform chip inquiry request (unusable). The response of the substrate state response is transmitted to the CU control unit 323.

  When the CU control unit 323 receives a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = unusable, the CU control unit 323 repeatedly transmits the substrate state request to the SC 325 b. That is, when the SC 325 b determines that it is not normal except for the communication key exchange sequence and the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the SC 325 b transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = unusable to the CU control unit 323.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b can communicate with the gaming machine. By performing business message communication with this gaming machine, it becomes possible to play a game in the gaming machine. A communication key (session key) is used for business message communication with this gaming machine. The communication at this time is a normal communication mode (substrate authentication key mode (substrate authentication key operation)) without restrictions such as the restricted communication mode.

  Next, FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining the process of the inquiry timeout sequence of the security board information.

  First, the CU control unit 323 transmits a command of security substrate inquiry instruction notification to request the SC 325 b for information to inquire of the higher-level device. The command of the security substrate inquiry instruction notice to be transmitted is encrypted using the substrate initial key or the substrate authentication key as the encryption key.

  In order to notify the CU control unit 323 of information (substrate serial number and inquiry information) for inquiring of the higher-level device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server), the SC 325 b receives the command of the security substrate inquiry instruction notification, The response of the security board inquiry result is sent back to the CU control unit 323. Note that the response of the security substrate inquiry instruction notification to be sent back is encrypted using the substrate serial number as the encryption key using the substrate initial key or the substrate authentication key, and the inquiry information is encrypted with the secret key. As a result, only the key management server can decrypt and decipher the inquiry information.

  Based on the board serial number and the inquiry information, the CU control unit 323 that has received the response of the security board inquiry result gives the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server) the information on the security board 325 (board serial number and Query the inquiry information) and wait for a response from the higher-level device. While inquiring about security board information, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b do not have to wait for a response from the host device, and perform the processing of the next step (for example, authentication processing of communication control IC, authentication processing of gaming machine chip information, gaming machine Execute business message processing etc.)

  After that, the CU control unit 323 determines that the waiting time of the security board information inquiry has timed out before receiving the inquiry result of the security board information (board serial ID and the board authentication key) from the host device. Send a command of status information request requesting information on the status of 2. The command of the status information request is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key. The SC 325 b having received the command of the state information request acquires the gaming machine chip information of the P-unit 2 via the communication control IC 325 a.

  Then, the SC 325 b returns a response of the status information response to the CU 3. At this time, the SC 325 b sends back a status information response including “substrate inquiry present” to request the key management center to inquire about security substrate information.

  In response to the above-described security substrate inquiry, the CU control unit 323 transmits a substrate status request command to request the SC 325 b for information to inquire of the higher-level device. The command of the substrate state request to be transmitted is encrypted using the substrate initial key or the substrate authentication key as the encryption key.

  In order to notify the CU control unit 323 of information (substrate serial number and inquiry information) to which the SC 325 b receives the command of the substrate state request, inquires of the higher-level device (specifically, key management server via hole server), the substrate state The response of the response is sent back to the CU control unit 323 again. In the response of the substrate status response to be sent back, the substrate serial number is encrypted using the substrate initial key or the substrate authentication key as the encryption key, and the inquiry information is encrypted with the concealment key. As a result, only the key management server can decrypt and decipher the inquiry information.

  The CU control unit 323 having received the response of the substrate state response, based on the substrate serial number and the inquiry information, informs the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server) the information (substrate serial number and inquiry of the security substrate 325). Inquires for information) and keeps waiting for responses from higher-level devices.

  Next, FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining processing of a query (collation) time-out sequence of gaming machine chip information.

  First, the CU control unit 323 transmits a command for gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification to request the SC 325 b for information (specifically, gaming machine chip information) for inquiring of the higher-level device. The command for notification of gaming machine chip inquiry instruction to be transmitted is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  On the other hand, the SC 325 b acquires gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC, and thereafter, the SC 325 b receives the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command and inquires of the host device (specifically, key management server via hall server). In order to notify the CU control unit 323 of information (main control chip information and payout control chip information), a response to the result of the gaming machine chip inquiry (authentication OK) is sent back to the CU control unit 323. The main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID are encrypted with the concealment key, and the other information is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  The CU control unit 323 that has received the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result sends the gaming machine chip information (mainly to the key management server via the hall server) based on the main control chip information and the payout control chip information. Inquires about control chip information and delivery control chip information) and waits for a response from the host device. While inquiring about gaming machine chip information, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b do not have to wait for a response from the host device, but perform the processing of the next step (for example, authentication processing of communication control IC, authentication processing of security board information, gaming machine Business message processing etc.) and execute necessary processing when gaming machine chip information is received.

  However, after that, the CU control unit 323 causes the gaming machine chip information inquiry waiting time to time out before receiving the inquiry result (main control chip information and payout control chip information) of the gaming machine chip information from the host device. , CU3 transmits a command of status information request requesting information on the status of P platform 2. The command of the status information request is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key. The SC 325 b that has received the command of the status information request acquires the gaming machine chip information of the P-unit 2 via the communication control IC 325 a.

  Then, the SC 325 b returns a response of the status information response to the CU 3. At this time, the SC 325 b sends back a status information response including “chip information inquiry existence” to request an inquiry to the key management center of gaming machine chip information.

  In response to the above-described gaming machine chip information inquiry, the CU control unit 323 transmits a gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to request the SC 325 b for information for inquiring of the higher-level device. The command for notification of gaming machine chip inquiry instruction to be transmitted is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  The SC 325 b that has received the command of the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification notifies the CU control unit 323 of information (main control chip information and payout control chip information) for inquiring of the upper apparatus (specifically, key management server via hall server). In order to do this, the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result is sent back to the CU control unit 323 again. The main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID are encrypted with the concealment key, and the other information is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  The CU control unit 323 that has received the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result sends the gaming machine chip information (mainly to the key management server via the hall server) based on the main control chip information and the payout control chip information. The control chip information and the payout control chip information are inquired, and the host device continues to wait for a response.

  In the sequence between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b described based on FIG. 40 to FIG. 51 above, characteristic portions will be collectively described below.

  There is a “board initial key authentication sequence” (see FIG. 40) as a sequence executed after CU3 is received and installed in the game arcade. In this "board initial key authentication sequence", at the time of the first power-on carried in and installed in the game arcade, the board initial key is downloaded and acquired from the host device (hall server), and authentication is performed using the board initial key. Sequence. Under the condition that the authentication result of the substrate initial key authentication sequence is OK, the “security substrate information inquiry sequence” is executed using this substrate initial key (see FIG. 40). The substrate authentication key is downloaded and stored from the host device (key management server) by this security substrate information inquiry sequence, and thereafter, various authentication sequences, communication key exchange sequences and the like are executed using this substrate authentication key, and the communication key is The gaming machine and the business message communication are executed using it (see FIG. 41).

  On the other hand, as a result of executing the security substrate information inquiry sequence (see FIG. 40) using the substrate initial key, there are cases where the substrate authentication key can not be acquired. When a CU maker ships a CU3 to a game arcade, the substrate authentication key transmits the substrate authentication key of the CU3 to the key management server to be stored in the key management server, and the CU carried into the game arcade is Although the board authentication key stored in advance in the key management server is downloaded and stored, the transmission of the board authentication key from the CU maker to the key management server may be delayed for some reason. Also, when the CU3 installed in the game arcade executes the security board information inquiry sequence and tries to download the board authentication key, an unexpected situation occurs between the key management server and the CU3 and communication is not possible. It may be offline. In such a case, the board authentication key can not be downloaded.

  If the board authentication key can not be downloaded, and if the operation of the business communication such as business message communication with the game machine after that can not be performed at all, an operation problem such as a decrease in the operation rate in the game arcade occurs. Therefore, when such an unexpected situation occurs, control is performed so that temporary operation of actual operation can be performed using a substrate initial key which is a temporary authentication key. Specifically, a communication key exchange sequence is executed using a substrate initial key already acquired from a host device (specifically, a hall server), and a communication key (session key) is generated using random numbers and time data. The CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b share the communication key (session key), and use the communication key (session key) to perform business message communication and perform operation control. The actual operation control by the communication key exchanged using this substrate initial key is permitted only for a certain period of time because the substrate initial key is a temporary key and the substrate authentication key can not be acquired in an unstable state. Temporary operation control is performed. Specifically, the actual operation control using this substrate initial key is permitted only for two days, and when the substrate authentication key can not be obtained even at the time of power supply start on the third day, the control after that is stopped. Control is performed to notify that the abnormality has occurred and to notify the hole server or the hall management computer that the abnormality has occurred. In addition, since the temporary control of temporary operation permitted only for a fixed period (for example, 2 days) with the substrate initial key is that the substrate initial key is stored in the hole server, at least the CU control unit 323 is the hole server. It is acceptable that it is secured that it is connected to.

  In addition, the above-mentioned “board initial key / shipping key authentication sequence” is executed at the time of factory shipment shown in FIG. If the board initial key authentication sequence is executed at this stage, the result of execution of this board initial key authentication sequence using the board initial key is derived because the board initial key is not obtained yet. Ru. Then, each sequence after the board shipping key request and the board shipping key response shown in FIG. 44 is executed, and communication of the communication test message with the gaming machine is executed. That is, it is judged by the “board initial key / shipping key authentication sequence” whether the board initial key is acquired or not acquired at the factory shipment stage. The sequence is also effectively used to determine whether the initial board key has been acquired or not acquired at the factory.

<Communication between main control unit and payout control unit>
Next, communication between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 in the P-table 2 will be described in more detail. First, in the P platform 2 shown in FIG. 4, communication between the main control board 16 provided on the game board 26 and the payout control board 17 provided on the front frame 5 is the main control provided on the main control board 16 This is performed between the unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 provided in the front frame 5. FIG. 52 is a schematic diagram for describing communication performed between the main control unit 161, the payout control unit 171, and the communication control IC.

  Although the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 illustrated in FIG. 52 are described below as being configured as one chip, a plurality of chips may configure the same function. The main control unit 161 includes a main control circuit 161a, a communication control circuit 161b, and a main control storage unit 161c. The main control circuit 161a performs various processes (for example, processes for counting winning balls based on a signal from the prize sensor 162, detecting irregularities based on a signal from the radio wave sensor 163, etc.) in the main control unit 161. ) Is a circuit that executes a control program for performing. The communication control circuit 161 b is a circuit for performing encryption communication between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171. The main control storage unit 161c is a storage device for storing a user program, a control program, and data to be executed by the main control unit 161, and is configured of, for example, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric Random Access Memory) of non-volatile memory. . In addition, since the main control storage unit 161 c includes the FeRAM, the information stored in the FeRAM does not need to be backed up by the external power supply.

  On the other hand, the payout control unit 171 includes a payout control circuit 171a, a communication control circuit 171b, and a payout control storage unit 171c. The payout control circuit 171a includes a CPU that is an arithmetic processing function, and the payout control unit 171 performs various processing (controls the firing motor 18 via the firing control board 31 or CU3 based on a signal from the counting button 28). On the other hand, it is a circuit that executes a control program for performing processing of requesting conversion of game balls to balls, etc., and a user program stored in the payout control storage unit 171c. The communication control circuit 171 b is a circuit for performing encryption communication between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 and encryption communication between the payout control unit 171 and the communication control IC 325 a. The payout control storage unit 171c is a storage device for storing a user program to be executed by the payout control unit 171, a control program, data, and the like, and is configured of, for example, a non-volatile memory FeRAM or the like. In addition, since the payout control storage unit 171 c includes the FeRAM, the information stored in the FeRAM does not need to be backed up by the external power supply.

  The payout control unit 171 transmits and receives data to and from the communication control IC 325 a of the CU 3 via the communication control circuit 171 b. Specifically, the payout control unit 171 receives various commands as shown in FIG. 7 described above from the communication control IC 325a of CU3. Then, the payout control unit 171 stores data included in various commands. These data are basically stored in the payout control storage unit 171 c configured by a RAM or the like. However, among these data, there are data which should preferably not be stored in the payout control storage unit 171 c in which the user program and the like are stored, from the viewpoint of security.

  Therefore, the payout control unit 171 (payout control circuit 171a) does not store predetermined data related to security (security related information) among the data received by the communication control circuit 171b in the payout control storage unit 171c, but pays out. It is stored in a predetermined storage area in the control circuit 171a. That is, the payout control circuit 171a stores the security related information received by the communication control circuit 171b in a register in the payout control circuit 171a without notifying the user program. This user program is not a program predetermined by the specification such as a control program for controlling the basic operation of the CU 3 but is a program that can be added at the development stage of the gaming machine. Therefore, security can be improved by not notifying predetermined data to a user program that is relatively easy to access from the outside. Further, by storing the predetermined data in the payout control storage unit 171c accessible from the outside, access to the predetermined data is prohibited to improve security.

  For example, the security related information is the “count reception time” included in the command of the status information request, the “store code” and the “SC substrate ID” included in the card insertion notification command, and the like. The security related information is not limited to this, and includes predetermined arbitrary data which is considered to be preferable not to be stored in the payout control storage unit 171 c from the viewpoint of security.

  Then, the payout control circuit 171a updates or deletes the security related information stored in its own register when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the payout control circuit 171a sets “Bit 4 =“ 1 ”of the gaming machine state 1 included in the response of the state information response in which the P unit 2 transmits the“ count reception time ”stored in the register. At the time of counting request), when the response of the status information response is transmitted to CU 3 (at the time of status information response transmission), updating is performed. The payout control circuit 171a causes the RAM (for example, the main control storage unit) provided when the P base 2 transmits a response to the communication start response to the CU 3 (when the communication start response is transmitted) or when the P base 2 transmits a response to the communication start response. 161c, the payout control storage unit 171c, etc.) is erased (at the time of instruction to clear RAM).

  Further, the payout control circuit 171a transmits the “store code” and the “SC substrate ID” stored in the register to the CU3 when the P base 2 transmits a response of the card insertion response (at the time of card insertion response transmission) or P When the command 2 of counting history request is received from the CU 3 (counting history request), it is newly registered or updated. The payout control circuit 171 a erases the “store code” and the “SC substrate ID” when an instruction to clear the RAM provided to the P-unit 2 is issued (at the time of the RAM clear instruction).

  As described above, the information on "counted reception time", "store code" and "SC substrate ID" is deleted or updated in the payout control circuit 171a when the above conditions are satisfied, so that security can be ensured. it can.

  As described above, as shown in FIG. 19, the “store code” is used in the counting history sequence when returning from the incommunicable state. Specifically, referring to FIG. 19, the payout control circuit 171a transmits a command of counting history request including serial number = n, store code and SC substrate ID via the communication control circuit 171b to the communication control IC 325a of CU3. Receive from In the payout control circuit 171a, the "store code" transmitted from the CU3 in response to the card insertion notification command and stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171a and the "store code" transmitted from the CU3 in the counting history request command Compare with When the “store code” matches as a result of comparing them, the payout control circuit 171a sets the stored data of the counting history 1 and the counting history 2 to the response of the counting history response so that it can be transmitted to the CU3. Then, the communication control circuit 171 b sends back to CU 3 (the communication control IC 325 a) a response of a count history response including serial number = n, count history 1 and count history 2. As described above, the communication control circuit 171 b can improve the accuracy of the recovery process by transmitting the counting histories (counting history 1 and counting history 2) for the past two times to the CU 3 (communication control IC 325 a). The plurality of counting histories transmitted from the communication control circuit 171 b to the CU 3 are not limited to the past two times, but may be counting histories of the past three times or more.

  On the other hand, when the “store code” does not match as a result of comparing the above, the payout control circuit 171a sets data as no counting history in the response of the counting history response transmitted to the CU3. Then, the communication control circuit 171 b sends back to CU 3 a response of a count history response including serial number = n and no count history. Here, when a response of counting history response including serial number = n and no counting history is sent from CU2 to CU3 (when the above-mentioned "store code" does not match), the payout control circuit 171a is configured to Prohibit the continuation of

  That is, when the "store code" stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171a matches the "store code" transmitted from the CU 3 by the command of the counting history request, the communication is disabled. It is possible to return to the previous gaming state using the counting history, but if it does not match, the previous gaming state is not returned from the incommunicable state.

  Although the case where the payout control circuit 171a compares “store code” has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this. The communication control circuit 171b refers to the register of the payout control circuit 171a and the payout control circuit The “store code” stored in the register in 171 a may be compared with the “store code” transmitted from the CU 3 by the command of the counting history request. In this case, the communication control circuit 171b notifies the payout control circuit 171a of the determination result. In the case of a determination result that "store code" matches, the payout control circuit 171a sets the stored data of counting history 1 and counting history 2 in the response of the counting history response, and "store code" matches. In the case of the judgment result that it does not, data is set to the response of the counting history response as no counting history. Then, the communication control circuit 171 b sends back to CU 3 a response of the count history response including the set data.

  Further, the communication control circuits 161b and 171b will be described in detail. FIG. 53 is a block diagram for describing a configuration of the communication control circuit 161 b for performing encrypted communication with the payout control unit 171. First, the communication control circuit 161 b has a plurality of functions, and has, for example, an authentication communication function, an encryption communication function, an interrupt function, a recovery function, and the like.

  The authentication communication function is a function of performing mutual authentication with the payout control unit 171 of the front frame 5. The encryption communication function is a function of encrypting and decrypting a message between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171. The encryption communication function can automatically insert a message of a tamper resistant code or automatically insert a code for detecting a communication error. Further, the encryption communication function can periodically pass the information of the main control unit 161 to the payout control unit 171 by the communication interval setting, and receive the information of the payout control unit 171.

  The interrupt function notifies, for example, an interrupt after the message is completely decoded, or notifies an interrupt when the authentication status changes. The recovery function is a function for performing recovery communication with the payout control unit 171 in the encrypted communication control unit 600 in response to a request from the user. Further, the communication control circuit 161 b can set a time-out time of the communication response, and can set a communication interval between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 53, the communication control circuit 161b performs encryption communication with a plurality of registers for performing input / output with the control program executed by the main control circuit 161a, and with the payout control unit 171. The control unit 600 is included.

  The registers included in the communication control circuit 161b include, for example, an authentication status register 611, an authentication interrupt setting register 612, a transmission data buffer 613, a transmission data number register 614, an information transmission clear register 615, a main control game information register 616, a payout control game It includes an information register 617, a recovery communication completion register 618, an encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 619, and the like.

  The authentication status register 611 is used to check whether the chip ID of the main control unit 161 has been authenticated or not, the communication between the card unit and the payout control unit, the authentication status, and the communication and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit. The state has been written. The authentication interrupt setting register 612 is set as to whether or not to permit an interrupt that changes the state of chip ID authentication, authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit.

  The transmission data buffer 613 is a buffer (for example, having a storage capacity of 128 bytes) for writing gaming information to be transmitted from the main control unit 161 to the payout control unit 171, and gaming information is stored in the buffer in the first in, first out (FIFO). Be written. In addition, by forming the transmission data buffer 613 with a non-volatile memory, a communication break occurs between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171, and game information written in the buffer not transmitted due to the communication failure. Is retained after return. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of the user program is not necessary to generate game information written in the transmission data buffer 613, and the processing load on the main control unit 161 becomes unnecessary. Can be reduced. In addition, the amount of data required for recovery processing can be reduced. In addition, since the transmission data buffer 613 is configured by a non-volatile memory, backup by the external power supply is unnecessary. The registers other than the transmission data buffer 613 are configured of volatile memory.

  The transmission data number register 614 is a register for writing the number of data transmitted to the main control unit 161 delivery control unit 171, and monitors the number of data in the transmission data buffer 613. The information transmission clear register 615 is a register for writing a request to clear data of the transmission data buffer 613.

  The main control game information register 616 is a register in which data transmitted from the main control unit 161 to the payout control unit 171 is written. The data written in the main control game information register 616 is encrypted by the encryption communication control unit 600 and transmitted to the payout control unit 171. The payout control game information register 617 is a register in which the data transmitted from the payout control unit 171 to the main control unit 161 is written. The data written in the payout control game information register 617 is data decrypted by the encryption communication control unit 600.

  The recovery communication completion register 618 is a register in which information indicating whether or not recovery communication has been completed between the main control unit and the payout control unit is written. The encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 619 is information for requesting clearing of data such as a serial number held by the encrypted communication control unit 600 in communication with the payout control unit 171, and that the data is erased. This is a register in which information indicating (clear completion) is written.

  The communication control circuit 171b is divided into a configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161 and a configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325a, and a portion of the configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161 is controlled. The circuit 171 b 1 and the part of the configuration for performing encrypted communication with the communication control IC 325 a will be described below as the communication control circuit 171 b 2.

  First, FIG. 54 is a block diagram for describing a configuration of a communication control circuit 171 b 1 for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161. First, the communication control circuit 171 b 1 has a plurality of functions, and has, for example, an authentication communication function, an encryption communication function, an interrupt function, a recovery function, and the like.

  The authentication communication function is a function of performing mutual authentication with the main control unit 161 of the game board 26, and mutual authentication with the communication control IC 325a of the CU3. The encryption communication function is a function of encrypting and decrypting a message between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171. The encryption communication function can automatically insert a message of a tamper resistant code or automatically insert a code for detecting a communication error. In addition, the encryption communication function can periodically pass the information of the payout control unit 171 to the main control unit 161 and can receive the information of the main control unit 161 by setting the communication interval.

  The interrupt function notifies, for example, an interrupt after the message is completely decoded, or notifies an interrupt when the authentication status changes. The recovery function is a function for performing recovery communication with the main control unit 161 and the communication control IC 325 a in the encryption communication control unit 700 in response to a request from the user. Further, the communication control circuit 171 b 1 can set a time-out time of the communication response, or can set a communication interval between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 54, the communication control circuit 171b1 performs encryption communication with the plurality of registers for performing input / output with the control program executed by the payout control circuit 171a, and with the payout control unit 171. The control unit 700 is included.

  The registers included in the communication control circuit 171b1 include, for example, an authentication status register 711, an authentication interrupt setting register 712, a data reception register 713, a reception data number register 714, an information reception clear register 715, a payout control game information register 716, a main control game It has an information register 717, a recovery request / completion register 718, an encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 719 and the like.

  The authentication status register 711 is used to check whether the chip ID of the payout control unit 171 has been authenticated, the communication between the card unit and the payout control unit, the status of authentication, and the communication and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit. The state has been written. The authentication interrupt setting register 712 is set as to whether or not to permit an interrupt that changes the state of chip ID authentication, authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit.

  The data reception register 713 is a buffer (for example, the storage capacity is 128 bytes) for writing the gaming information transmitted from the main control unit 161 and received by the payout control unit 171, and the buffer is FIFO (First In, First Out) in the buffer. Information is written. Further, by configuring the data reception register 713 with a non-volatile memory, a communication interruption occurs between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171, and the gaming information written in the register not transmitted due to the communication failure. Is retained after return. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of the user program is unnecessary to generate gaming information written in the data reception register 713, and the processing load on the main control unit 161 Can be reduced. In addition, the amount of data required for recovery processing can be reduced. In addition, since the data reception register 713 is configured by the non-volatile memory, the backup by the external power supply becomes unnecessary. The registers other than the data reception register 713 are configured of volatile memory.

  The reception data number register 714 is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the main control unit 161 and received by the payout control unit 171, and monitors the number of data in the data reception register 713. The information reception clear register 715 is a register for writing a request to clear data of the data reception register 713.

  The payout control game information register 716 is a register in which data transmitted from the payout control unit 171 to the main control unit 161 is written. The data written in the payout control game information register 716 is encrypted by the encryption communication control unit 700 and transmitted to the main control unit 161. The main control game information register 717 is a register in which the data transmitted from the main control unit 161 to the payout control unit 171 is written. The data written to the main control game information register 717 is data decrypted by the encryption communication control unit 700.

  The recovery request / completion register 718 is a register in which information indicating whether or not recovery communication is requested between the main control unit and the payout control unit and whether or not it is completed is written. The encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 719 is information that requests clearing of data such as a serial number held by the encrypted communication control unit 700 communicating with the main control unit 161, and that the data has been deleted. This is a register in which information indicating (clear completion) is written.

  The communication control circuit 171b1 further includes a communication timeout time setting register 719a, a communication interval time setting register 719b, and a main control unit transmission buffer write valid time setting register 719c.

  The main control unit transmission buffer write valid time setting register 719 c transmits the data of the transmission data buffer 613 of the main control unit 161 to the data reception register 713 after the authentication between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 is terminated. It is a register that sets the valid time that can be written. By setting the register, writing to the data reception register 713 can be performed even after the authentication between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 is terminated (for example, 5 seconds to 15 seconds). Seconds). Thereby, for example, even if floating balls (balls which are not caught and fall between nails and the like in the game area 27) exist when authentication is broken due to power off or disconnection, etc., the floating balls are won Information can be stored and protected securely. In addition, even in the case of a gaming machine having a stage in which the retention time of the balls is long, the effective period can be set to be longer so that the information that the floating balls have won can be reliably stored.

  Essentially, after the authentication between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 is terminated, information can not be written to the data reception register 713 via the encryption communication control unit 700 from the viewpoint of security. However, in the data reception register 713, for example, it is necessary to write information on the winning of the floating ball after the authentication between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 is broken. Therefore, the communication control circuit 171b1 sets an effective time in the main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719c, and the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 are set by the encryption communication control unit 700. The information can be written in the data reception register 713 via the encryption communication control unit 700 within the effective period even after the authentication between the above and the above has been terminated. The setting value of the main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719c can be read out after being set by the encryption communication control unit 700.

  FIG. 55 is a block diagram for describing a configuration of a communication control circuit 171 b 2 for performing cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325 a. As shown in FIG. 55, communication control circuit 171 b 2 performs, for example, encryption communication with communication control IC 325 a, for example, authentication status register 721, authentication interrupt setting register 722, transmission data buffer 723 a, data reception register 723 b, transmission data number register 724. , Reception data number register 725, recovery communication addition ball request register 726, recovery communication subtraction ball request register 727, recovery request / completion register 728, encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 729, communication timeout timer-prescaler setting register 729a and communication It has a timeout time setting register 729b and the like.

  The authentication status register 721 is used to check whether the chip ID of the payout control unit 171 has been authenticated, the communication between the card unit and the payout control unit, the status of authentication, and the communication between the main control unit and the payout control unit and authentication. The state has been written. The authentication interrupt setting register 722 is set as to whether or not to permit an interrupt that changes the state of chip ID authentication, authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit.

  The transmission data buffer 723a is a buffer (for example, having a storage capacity of 128 bytes) for writing a task message to be sent from the payout control unit 171 to the communication control IC 325a. The task message is written in the FIFO (First In, First Out) in the buffer. Be The data reception register 723b is a buffer (for example, having a storage capacity of 128 bytes) for writing the business message sent from the communication control IC 325a and received by the payout control unit 171, and the buffer is FIFO (First In, First Out). Will be written.

  Note that by configuring the transmission data buffer 723a and the data reception register 723b with non-volatile memory, a communication interruption occurs between the payout control unit 171 and the communication control IC 325a, and the buffer and register not transmitted due to the communication failure. The written task message is retained after return. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of the user program is not necessary to generate the business message written in the transmission data buffer 723a and the data reception register 723b, and the payout control unit It is possible to reduce the processing load of the communication control IC 325a and the communication control IC 325a. In addition, the amount of data required for recovery processing can be reduced. Since the transmission data buffer 723a and the data reception register 723b are composed of non-volatile memory, backup by the external power supply becomes unnecessary. The registers other than the transmission data buffer 723a and the data reception register 723b are configured of volatile memory.

  The transmission data number register 724 is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the payout control unit 171 to the communication control IC 325a, and monitors the number of data in the transmission data buffer 723a. The reception data number register 725 is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the communication control IC 325a and received by the payout control unit 171, and monitors the number of data in the data reception register 723b.

  The recovery communication addition ball request register 726 is a register in which the number of addition balls is written when an addition ball is generated as a result of recovery communication between the communication control IC and the payout control unit after power failure and recovery. The recovery communication addition ball request register 726 is updated only when the recovery communication is completed. The recovery communication subtraction ball request register 727 is a register in which a subtraction ball number is written when a subtraction ball is generated as a result of recovery communication between the communication control IC and the payout control unit after power failure and recovery. The recovery communication subtraction ball request register 727 is also updated only when the recovery communication is completed.

  The recovery request / completion register 728 is a register in which information indicating whether or not recovery communication is requested between the communication control IC and the payout control unit and whether or not it is completed is written. The encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 729 is a request for clearing data such as a serial number held by the encrypted communication control unit 700 communicating with the communication control IC 325a, and that the data has been deleted (see FIG. It is a register in which information indicating clear completion is written.

  The payout control unit 171 does not notify the user program executed by the payout control circuit 171a of the security related information among the data received by the data reception register 723b of the communication control circuit 171b2 in the encryption communication with the communication control IC 325a. , And stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171a. That is, since the user program being executed by the payout control circuit 171a is restricted from directly accessing the security related information received in the data reception register 723b, the security related information is stored in the payout control storage section 171c. I can not export. Although communication control circuit 171 b 2 has described the case where security related information is received by data reception register 723 b, a security related information reception register is additionally provided which can not be directly accessed by the user program being executed by payout control circuit 171 a. May be

  In addition, although the security related information received by the data reception register 723b is stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171a, the configuration of the payout control unit 171 which can not be directly accessed by the user program executed by the payout control circuit 171a. explained. However, the payout control unit 171 is not limited to this, and does not store the security related information received by the data reception register 723b in the register in the payout control circuit 171a, but holds it only in the data reception register 723b. The user program executed by the payout control circuit 171a may not be directly accessible.

<Recovery completion confirmation process>
Next, in communication between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171, when returning from a state in which communication can not be performed, such as power off, the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 select the main control storage unit 161c and the payout control storage. A recovery process of transmitting predetermined information stored in the unit 171 c is executed. Then, the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 perform recovery completion confirmation processing for resuming generation of predetermined information by execution of the user program, on the condition that the recovery processing ends. Specifically, recovery completion confirmation processing will be described using a flowchart. FIG. 56 is a flowchart for explaining recovery completion confirmation processing.

  First, when the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 are powered on in order to recover from the incommunicable state such as power off, the main control circuit 161a and the payout control circuit 171a start the process of the authentication sequence. When the authentication is completed, the authentication result is written in the authentication status registers 611 and 711 of the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171, respectively. Then, the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 check whether or not the authentication completion is written in the respective authentication status registers 611 and 711 (step S291). When the authentication completion is not written in the respective authentication status registers 611 and 711 (step S291: NO), the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 return to the process of step S291.

  When authentication completion is written in the respective authentication status registers 611 and 711 (step S 291: YES), the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 recover the recovery communication completion register 618 and the recovery request / completion register 718. It is checked whether a flag indicating completion is written (step S 292). If the recovery communication completion register 618 and the recovery request / completion register 718 do not write the flag indicating recovery completion in the recovery communication completion register 618 (step S292: NO), the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 return to the process in step S292.

  Main control unit 161 and payout control unit 171 start processing of the user program when a flag indicating recovery completion is written in recovery communication completion register 618 and recovery request / completion register 718 (step S 292: YES). (Step S293). As means for starting processing of the user program, for example, means for transmitting a signal for starting processing of the user program to start processing of the user program, and stopping means for stopping processing of the user program are provided. There is a means for starting the process of the user program by releasing the means.

  As described above, since the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 do not start the processing of the user program until the recovery processing is completed, new information by the processing of the user program before the information to be recovered by the recovery processing is determined. Can be properly resumed by preventing the user program from being written.

<Commands and responses transmitted / received between the main control unit and the payout control unit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, an outline of commands and responses transmitted and received between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 will be described.

  FIG. 57 shows the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, and the name of transmission information and its outline.

  First, a command named “power on notification” is transmitted from the main control unit 161 to the payout control unit 171. The command of the power on notification notifies the payout control unit 171 that the power is on and the communication is started. A response named “power on reception” is transmitted from the payout control unit 171 to the main control unit 161. The response to the power on reception is a response to the main control unit 161 that the power on notification is received and communication is started.

  Next, the main control unit 161 transmits a command named gaming state notification to the payout control unit 171. The command of the gaming state notification notifies the payout control unit 171 of the gaming state. The payout control unit 171 transmits, to the main control unit 161, a response named “playing state response”. The response of the game state response is a response to the main control unit 161 that the game state notification has been received.

<Main sequence processed between main control unit and payout control unit>
Next, based on FIG. 58 and FIG. 59, the main sequence processed between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 according to the process executed by the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 will be described.

<< Communication sequence >>
First, with reference to FIG. 58, a sequence processed between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 when the power is turned on will be described. The sequence shown in FIG. 58 is a process executed at the time of resuming communication after the communication between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 ends normally.

  Further, communication between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 is carried out by the polling method using the main control unit 161 as a primary station, and the polling interval is 200 ms. The communication of power on notification and power on reception is excluded. When the payout control unit 171 can not receive a request command from the main control unit 161 even if one second has passed after sending the response, the payout control unit 171 determines that “communication line disconnection” and stops the game.

  Furthermore, the payout control unit 171 transmits a response command to the main control unit 161 only when normal data is received. When the main control unit 161 does not receive a response command within the polling interval time, the main control unit 161 retransmits the command up to three times including the first time. Both the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 store the serial numbers used for transmission and reception in the storage unit, and are used for checking the normality of the command, recovering from the power failure, and recovering from the communication line disconnection.

  Specifically, to describe the communication sequence, first, when the power is turned on, communication of power on notification and power on / off is performed between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171, and the authentication new sequence is started further. . In the authentication sequence, as described above, the chip IDs of the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 are authenticated, and it is written in the authentication status registers 611 and 711 that the communication between the main control unit and the payout control unit has been authenticated. . Further, processing for generating an encryption key and a decryption key used for encryption communication between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 is performed according to the authentication sequence. For communication between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 after the processing is performed, encrypted communication is performed using the generated encryption key and decryption key.

  Next, after the authentication sequence is completed, the main control unit 161 transmits a command of gaming state notification to the payout control unit 171 with the serial number set to “n”. The payout control unit 171 returns a response of game state reception to the main control unit 161 as “n” without counting up the serial number. Furthermore, the main control unit 161 transmits a command of the gaming state notification to the payout control unit 171 with the serial number being “n + 1”. The payout control unit 171 returns a response of game state reception to the main control unit 161 as “n + 1” without counting up the serial number.

  After that, the main control unit 161 counts up the serial number and transmits a command of the gaming state notification to the payout control unit 171 as “n + 2”. Then, the payout control unit 171 sends back a response of game state reception to the main control unit 161 as “n + 2” without counting up the serial number.

  In the communication between the main control section 161 and the payout control section 171, an interval from the command transmission of the gaming state notification of the serial number "n" to the transmission of the command of the gaming state notification of the serial number "n + 1" The intervals from the command transmission to the command transmission of the game state notification of the serial number “n + 2” are each 200 ms intervals.

<< Sequence after power off >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the process when the status information request has not been reached due to the power-off / communication circuit disconnection will be described. In FIG. 59, in particular, there is a power failure / communication circuit disconnection (for example, when the power of the payout control unit 171 is once turned off and then turned on again), the gaming state notification has not been reached (from the main control unit 161) It is a sequence diagram for demonstrating the process in case a communication other party corresponds by the command that the delivery control part 171 has not been reached yet, and after recovery.

  Referring to FIG. 59, before power-off occurs during the game, main control unit 161 transmits to payout control unit 171 a gaming state notification including serial number = n. In response to this, the payout control unit 171 transmits, to the main control unit 161, the game state reception including the serial number = n.

  Then, after the power is turned off in the payout control unit 171 during the game, when the gaming state notification including the serial number = n + 1 is transmitted from the main control unit 161 to the payout control unit 171, the payout control unit 171 is turned off. Because it is a state, it can not receive the game state notice. After that, since the gaming state reception from the payout control unit 171 is not transmitted, the main control unit 161 performs control to stop the communication on the assumption that the power is cut off after one second.

  Thereafter, when the authentication sequence is started between the power on and between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171, the main control unit 161 is a power supply including serial number = 1 and main control serial number (previous final transmission serial number) = n + 1. The insertion notification is sent to the payout control unit 171. The payout control unit 171 determines that the serial number of the game state reception transmitted to the main control unit 161 before the occurrence of the power failure is “n”, so that the payout control serial number backed up by the payout control unit 171 is n. Therefore, the payout control sequence number n backed up by the payout control unit 171 and the main control serial number backed up by the main control unit 161 do not match. When the serial numbers do not match, the payout control unit 171 performs recovery processing on the information of the payout control unit 171 based on the recovery game information included in the power-on notification transmitted from the main control unit 161. Thereafter, the payout control unit 171 transmits the power on reception including the serial number = 1 to the main control unit 161.

  The main control unit 161 transmits the gaming state notification including the serial number = 2 to the payout control unit 171. The payout control unit 171 performs processing according to the content after the recovery processing, and transmits gaming state reception including the serial number = 2 to the payout control unit 171. Thereafter, similarly, the main control unit 161 transmits a gaming state notification including the serial number = 3 to the payout control unit 171. The payout control unit 171 transmits the gaming state reception including the serial number = 3 to the payout control unit 171.

  In addition, although the above-mentioned recovery processing was carried out because the serial numbers did not match, the information included in the recovery game information (for example, the number of game information, winning ball information, etc.) is the payout control with the main control unit 161 The recovery process may be performed even if there is a mismatch with the unit 171.

<Unauthorized gaming machine connection detection>
Next, the mechanism of the unauthorized gaming machine detection detected in CU3 will be described. The card unit connectable to the P unit 2 is not limited to a card unit used for commercial use (corresponding to the above-mentioned CU 3, hereinafter simply referred to as CU 3, commercial CU). It may be a game board development jig for developing a board, a card unit for development (CU for development) used for development of the P platform 2 or the like.

  However, it is conceivable to play a game on the P unit 2 illegally using a card unit connectable to the P unit 2 other than the commercial CU. For example, a large number of game balls are lent to a game console development jig other than a commercial CU or a P platform 2 connected to a development CU, separated from the game console development jig or a development CU, and then P platform 2 It is possible to connect a commercial CU to play a game illegally.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is detected whether the P unit 2 connected to the commercial CU has been connected to the game board development jig other than the commercial CU or the development CU in the past to operate the commercial CU. Stop. Concretely, the structure which detects whether it connected to the game board development jigs other than commercial CU or development CU in the past using a figure is demonstrated.

  FIG. 60 is a diagram for describing a mechanism of detection when the P unit 2 connected to the game board development jig is connected to a commercial CU by unit replacement. First, the game board development jig 3E shown in FIG. 60 is configured by the same CU control unit 323 and communication control IC 325a as the commercial CU except that it has the SC 325 Eb for P unit development. In addition, in the SC 325 Eb for P-unit development, an identification ID indicating that it is a game board development jig is embedded. Specifically, the identification ID is an identification code included in the SC substrate ID, and is stored in the SC 325 Eb as a part of the SC substrate ID.

  As shown in FIG. 60, when the P board 2 is connected to the game board development jig 3E, when the command of the card insertion notification is transmitted from the game board development jig 3E to the P board 2 as the gaming machine message notification, P board The identification ID is transmitted to the P-unit 2 from the SC 325 Eb for development. The identification ID transmitted to the P-unit 2 is stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171a. The SC substrate ID of the SC 325 Eb is also stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171 a together with the identification ID. Note that only the identification ID may be backed up to another storage device of the payout control circuit 171a.

  The SC substrate ID is stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171a as described above, but is not notified to the user program 171p executed by the payout control circuit 171a. Therefore, the P-table 2 can not read the SC substrate ID from the payout control circuit 171a, and the SC substrate ID can not be illegally copied, so the security is enhanced. The SC substrate ID (including the identification ID) stored in the register of the payout control circuit 171a can be erased by clearing the RAM of the payout control circuit 171a.

  Next, processing in the case of exchanging units from the game board development jig 3E to CU3 will be described. When the P base 2 connected to the game board development jig 3E is connected to the CU 3 by unit replacement, the gaming machine message notification is transmitted from the CU 3 in the processing of the authentication sequence after the power is turned on. The SC board ID including the identification ID (identification information indicating that it is a commercial CU) is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the P-unit 2 by the notification of the gaming machine message. The timing for transmitting the SC substrate ID to the P unit 2 is not limited during the process of the authentication sequence, and the player inserts a card, for example, after changing the unit to CU 3 and turning on the P unit 2. Then, it may be the timing when the command of the card insertion notification is transmitted from the CU 3 as the gaming machine message notification. That is, any timing may be used as long as it is possible to prevent the player from playing illegally using the number of game balls provided by the game board development jig 3E. In FIG. 60, in order to distinguish between the identification ID from SC325Eb for P unit development and the identification ID from SC325b for commercial, the identification ID from SC325Eb for P unit development is illustrated, and from SC325b for commercial The identification ID is not shown.

  The P base 2 that has received the identification ID from the commercial SC 325b is the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171a (the identification ID of the card unit connected in the past) is the identification ID of the game board development jig 3E. It is determined whether or not. It should be noted that it is determined whether the P unit 2 is a connecting device other than commercial CU3 without determining whether the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171a is the identification ID of the game board development jig 3E or not. It may be determined only by When the payout control circuit 171a determines that the stored identification ID is the identification ID of the game board development jig 3E, the card unit connected in the past without notifying the identification ID stored in the user program 171p. It is notified that only the game board development jig 3E has been made, and bit 6 of the fraud detection state 3 (connected to the game board development jig) = "1" included in the response of the state information response.

  As for CU3, the card unit connected in the past is the game board development jig 3E based on the information of Bit 6 of fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the state information response transmitted as a game machine message from P unit 2 connected. It detects that it was. Specifically, the SC 325 b reads out the information of Bit 6 of the fraud detection state 3 and detects that the card unit connected in the past is the game board development jig 3 E if the information is “1”. When the SC 325 b detects that the card unit connected in the past is the game board development jig 3 E, the SC 325 b stops communication with the CU control unit 323. As a result, the CU 3 can prevent an unauthorized game from being played without incorporating information from the gaming board development jig 3E connected in the past into the CU control unit 323. Further, when it is detected that the card unit connected in the past is the game board development jig 3E, the CU 3 may notify by a sound or light, or notify the upper server of the detection result.

  In FIG. 60, the identification ID is illustrated as being written in the user program 171 p in order to express that the information of Bit 6 = “1” in the fraud detection state 3 is written in the user program 171 p in an easy-to-understand manner. However, as described above, the stored identification ID itself is not notified. In addition, the identification ID is changed from P2 to CU3 so that the status information response response including the information of Bit6 = "1" of the fraud detection state 3 is transmitted from P2 to CU3 in an easy-to-understand manner. Although illustrated as being sent to the user, the stored identification ID itself is not notified.

  Of course, as described above, when the payout control circuit 171a determines that the stored identification ID is the identification ID of the game board development jig 3E, the flag included in the response of the state information response (in the fraud detection state 3 Instead of writing to the user program 171 p as Bit 6 (game board development jig connection) = “1”, information on the identification ID itself of the game board development jig 3 E is written to the user program 171 p as shown in FIG. It may be crowded. Furthermore, based on the identification ID stored in the user program 171p, it may be determined whether it is the identification ID of the game board development jig 3E. In addition, the information transmitted from P platform 2 to CU3 is not a flag (Bit 6 in the fraud detection state 3 (game board development jig connection) = “1”), but as shown in FIG. 60, the game board development jig Information of the identification ID 3E itself may be transmitted.

  Furthermore, the P platform 2 stores the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171a (the identification ID of the card unit connected in the past) without determining whether or not it is the identification ID of the game board development jig 3E. The identification ID may be transmitted to the SC 325 b via the user program 171 p. That is, the determination as to whether or not the card unit connected in the past is the game board development jig 3E may be performed not at the P platform 2 but at SC 325b to detect the game board development jig connection.

  Also, when exchanging units from the game board development jig 3E to another game board development jig 3E, the information of Bit6 = "1" of the fraud detection state 3 from the P base 2 connected as described in FIG. A response containing a status information response is sent. However, because another game board development jig 3E that has been unit-exchanged has the shipment maker code of the game machine development maker code set in SC325Eb for P unit development, Bit6 of the fraud detection state 3 that has been transmitted is 6 = “ It may be configured not to detect that the card unit connected in the past is the game board development jig 3E by ignoring the information of 1 ′ ′. That is, the card unit detects an error in the game board development jig connection when it is determined that the unit has been exchanged from the game board development jig 3E to another game board development jig 3E according to the shipping maker code set in SC. do not do. Thus, in the development process of repeating the connection between the game board development jig 3E and the P-base 2, the process of detecting an error in the game board development jig connection is not performed, so the work of development and maintenance becomes easy.

  FIG. 61 is a diagram for describing a mechanism of detection when the P-unit 2 connected to the development CU is connected to a commercial CU by unit replacement. First, the development CU 3D shown in FIG. 61 is configured by the same CU control unit 323 and communication control IC 325a as the commercial CU except that it has the development SC 325 Db. Further, in the SC 325Db for development, an identification ID indicating that it is a development CU is embedded. Specifically, the identification ID is an identification code included in the SC substrate ID, and is stored in the SC 325 Db as a part of the SC substrate ID.

  As shown in FIG. 61, when the P unit 2 is connected to the development CU 3 D, when the command of the card insertion notification is transmitted from the development CU 3 D to the P unit 2 as gaming machine message notification, the identification ID is from SC SC 325 Db for development. It is sent to P stand 2. The identification ID transmitted to the P-unit 2 is stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171a. The SC substrate ID of the SC 325 Db is also stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171 a together with the identification ID. Note that only the identification ID may be backed up to another storage device of the payout control circuit 171a.

  Next, processing in the case of exchanging a unit from CU3D for development to CU3 will be described. When the P unit 2 connected to the development CU 3 D is connected to the CU 3 by unit replacement, the gaming machine message notification is transmitted from the CU 3 in the processing of the authentication sequence after the power is turned on. The SC board ID including the identification ID (identification information indicating that it is a commercial CU) is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the P-unit 2 by the notification of the gaming machine message. The timing for transmitting the SC substrate ID to the P unit 2 is not limited during the process of the authentication sequence, and the player inserts a card, for example, after changing the unit to CU 3 and turning on the P unit 2. Then, it may be the timing when the command of the card insertion notification is transmitted from the CU 3 as the gaming machine message notification. That is, any timing may be used as long as it is possible to prevent the player from playing illegally using the number of game balls provided by the development CU 3D. In FIG. 61, in order to distinguish between the identification ID from the development SC 325 Db and the identification ID from the commercial SC 325 b, the identification ID from the development SC 325 Db is shown, and the identification ID from the commercial SC 325 b is shown. Not shown.

  The P base 2 having received the identification ID from the commercial SC 325 b determines whether the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171 a (the identification ID of the card unit connected in the past) is the identification ID of the development CU 3 D . It should be noted that the P-unit 2 determines whether or not the identification device stored in the payout control circuit 171a is a connection device other than a commercial CU3 without determining whether the identification ID is the identification ID of the development CU3D or not. It may be alone. When the payout control circuit 171a determines that the stored identification ID is the identification ID of the development CU 3D, the card unit connected in the past without notifying the identification ID stored in the user program 171p is for development Only the fact that it is CU3D is notified, and Bit5 (CU connection for development) of fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the status information response is set to "1".

  Based on the information of Bit 5 of fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the status information response transmitted from the connected P platform 2 as a gaming machine message response, the CU 3 was a development CU 3 D as a card unit connected in the past Detect that. Specifically, the SC 325 b reads out the information of Bit 5 of the fraud detection state 3 and detects that the card unit connected in the past is the development CU 3 D if the information is “1”. When the SC 325 b detects that the card unit connected in the past is the development CU 3 D, the SC 325 b stops communication with the CU control unit 323. As a result, the CU 3 can prevent an unauthorized game from being played without incorporating information in the development CU 3 D connected in the past into the CU control unit 323. In addition, when it is detected that the card unit connected in the past is the development CU 3D, the CU 3 may notify by sound or light, or notify the upper server of the detection result.

  In FIG. 61, the identification ID is illustrated as being written in the user program 171 p in order to express that the information of Bit 5 = “1” in the fraud detection state 3 is written in the user program 171 p in an easy-to-understand manner. However, as described above, the stored identification ID itself is not notified. In addition, the identification ID is changed from P2 to CU3 so that the status information response response including the information of Bit5 = "1" of the fraud detection state 3 is transmitted from P2 to CU3 in an easy-to-understand manner. Although illustrated as being sent to the user, the stored identification ID itself is not notified.

  Of course, as described above, when the payout control circuit 171a determines that the stored identification ID is the identification ID of the development CU 3D, the flag (bit 5 in the fraud detection state 3 (development of the fraud detection state 3) is included in the response of the state information response. Instead of writing in the user program 171 p as “CU connection for connection” = “1”), information of the identification ID itself of the development CU 3 D may be written in the user program 171 p as shown in FIG. Furthermore, based on the identification ID stored in the user program 171p, it may be determined whether it is the identification ID of the development CU 3D. In addition, the information transmitted from P unit 2 to CU3 is not the flag (bit 5 (CU connection for development) of fraud detection state 3 = “1”), but the identification ID of the development CU 3D as shown in FIG. Information may be sent.

  Furthermore, the P base 2 does not determine whether the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171a (the identification ID of the card unit connected in the past) is the identification ID of the development CU 3D, and stores the stored identification The ID may be transmitted to the SC 325 b via the user program 171 p. That is, the determination as to whether or not the card unit connected in the past is the development CU 3 D may be performed by the SC 325 b instead of the P base 2 to detect the development CU connection.

  Further, also when exchanging a unit from a development CU 3D to another development CU 3D, the response of the status information response including information of Bit 5 = "1" of fraud detection status 3 from the P base 2 connected as described in FIG. Will be sent. However, the unit for another CU3D for development has the shipment maker code of the game apparatus development maker code set in SC325Db for development, so the information of Bit5 = "1" of fraud detection state 3 transmitted , And may not detect that the card unit connected in the past is a development CU 3D. That is, the card unit does not detect an error in the development CU connection when it is determined that the unit exchange from the development CU 3 D to another development CU 3 D is performed by the shipping maker code set in the SC. As a result, in the development process of repeating the connection between the development CU 3D and the P base 2, the process of detecting an error in the development CU connection is not performed, so the work of development and maintenance becomes easy.

  As described above, in this embodiment, it is detected whether the P unit 2 connected to the CU 3 has been connected to the game board development jig 3 E other than the CU 3 or the development CU 3 D in the past, and the CU control unit Since the communication with H.323 is stopped and the operation of CU3 is stopped, it is possible to prevent the game from being played illegally by connecting to the game board development jig 3E or CU3D for development other than CU3 in the past. For example, before connecting P unit 2 to commercial CU3, it is connected to gaming board development jig 3E or CU3D for development to lend out a large number of gaming balls, and using the gaming balls rented after connecting to commercial CU3. It is possible to prevent unauthorized play of the game.

  Next, the case where a gaming machine simulator other than the P-unit 2 is connected to the commercial CU 3 will be described. FIG. 62 is a diagram for describing a mechanism of detection when a gaming machine simulator is connected to commercial CU3. Here, the gaming machine simulator is, for example, a device for connecting to check whether the commercial CU3 operates normally, and it is possible to virtually output signals and information necessary for the inspection to the commercial CU3. it can. Therefore, the commercial CU 3 is connected to the gaming machine simulator or connected to the P-unit 2 in order to prevent the intentional connection of the gaming machine simulator and transmission of illegal gaming information. It is necessary to detect.

  First, the gaming machine simulator 2A shown in FIG. 62 has a payout control section 171A as in the P platform 2. The payout control unit 171A includes a user program 171Ap executed by the payout control circuit 171Aa and the payout control circuit 171Aa. In the user program 171Ap, an identification ID indicating that it is the gaming machine simulator 2A is embedded.

  As shown in FIG. 62, when the gaming machine simulator 2A is connected to the commercial CU3, communication between a gaming machine message notification command and a gaming machine message response response is performed between the CU3 and the gaming machine simulator 2A. For example, CU3 transmits a command of a state information request to notify the state of CU3 to gaming machine simulator 2A. When the gaming machine simulator 2A receives the command of the status information request from the CU 3, the gaming machine simulator 2A transmits a response of the status information response notifying the gaming information, the gaming machine status and the like to the CU 3.

  The response of the status information response transmitted to the CU 3 includes information for notifying the CU 3 that the connection with the gaming machine simulator 2 A is made. Specifically, based on the identification ID embedded in the user program 171Ap, the gaming machine simulator 2A sets Bit7 (gaming machine simulator connection) = “1” of fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the status information response.

  In CU3, the connected gaming machine is the gaming machine simulator based on the information of Bit 7 of fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the status information response transmitted as the gaming machine message response from the connected gaming machine simulator 2A. Detect that. Specifically, the SC 325 b reads out the information of the Bit 7 of the fraud detection state 3 and detects that the connected gaming machine is a gaming machine simulator if the information is “1”. When the SC 325 b detects that the connected gaming machine is a gaming machine simulator, the SC 325 b stops communication with the CU control unit 323. As a result, the CU 3 can prevent an unauthorized game from being played without incorporating the information of the connected gaming machine simulator 2A into the CU control unit 323. In addition, when it is detected that the connected gaming machine is a gaming machine simulator, the CU 3 may notify by a sound or light, or notify the upper server of the detection result.

  It should be noted that the identification ID is from the gaming machine simulator 2A so that the response of the status information response including the information of Bit 7 = “1” of the fraud detection state 3 is transmitted from the gaming machine simulator 2A to the CU3 in an easy-to-understand manner. It is illustrated as being sent to CU3.

  Of course, the information transmitted from the gaming machine simulator 2A to the CU 3 is not the flag (bit 7 of fraud detection state 3 (game machine simulator connection) = "1"), but identification of the gaming machine simulator 2A as shown in FIG. Information of the ID itself may be transmitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is detected whether the gaming machine connected to CU3 is the commercial P unit 2 or the gaming machine simulator 2A, and the communication with the CU control unit 323 is stopped to control the CU3. Since the operation is stopped, it is possible to prevent unauthorized play by connecting the gaming machine simulator 2A to CU3 intentionally. For example, the gaming machine simulator 2A can count a large number of gaming balls for CU3 as balls and keep the counted balls after connection to the P-table 2 as gaming balls and prevent fraud in playing a game .

<Slot machine>
Next, a slot machine will be described as another example of the gaming machine. FIG. 63 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front door of the slot machine is opened. In the above explanation, the slot machine is also abbreviated as "S unit" in the following because of the abbreviation of "P unit" for pachinko gaming machines.

  The above-described gaming system using gaming balls and balls is similarly applied to the S car. However, since the game is performed without using balls in the S unit, in the following, the game ball is referred to as a game point, and the ball is referred to as a point.

  Referring to FIG. 63, a slot machine (hereinafter, may be abbreviated as a gaming machine or S set) 2S is provided so that a front door 2bS can be opened and closed with respect to a main body frame 2aS with its left edge as a swing center. It is done. Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 63, CU is connected to the left side of the drawing of S stand 2S similarly to P stand.

  In the S unit 2S, the bet number is set by using the gaming points, and the gaming points are added and updated according to the winning. For this reason, when playing a game in the S stand 2S, the insertion operation of the medal is unnecessary. Therefore, the medal input port and the medal payout port are not provided in the S stand 2S.

  Inside the chassis of the S stand 2S, reels 2L, 2C, 2R (hereinafter also referred to as left reel, middle reel, right reel) in which plural kinds of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. Of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, three consecutive symbols are arranged so as to be seen from a see-through window provided on the front door 2bS. On the outer peripheral part of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, a plurality of kinds of symbols are drawn in a predetermined order.

  A touch panel display 510 is provided in a portion surrounding each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 2bS. The display 510 is a display corresponding to the P displays 54. In addition to displaying various types of information (such as game points and points) the same as the display 54, the number of bets set in the game, etc. Is displayed. The display 510 is connected to the display control unit 350 of the CU in the same manner as the display 54 in FIG. 4, and the display is controlled on the CU side. The display unit 510 is not provided in the portion surrounding each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, but the panel portion further below (the position below the start switch 7S shown in FIG. You may provide in the panel part provided with the conventional S medal payout openings.

  In addition, the front door 2bS has one bet BET switch 5S operated when setting the number of bets using "gaming point = 1" equivalent to one medal, and the maximum determined according to the gaming state When setting the number of bets (for example, "playing point = 3" in RT (Replay Time) where the normal gaming state before occurrence of BB and the winning probability of replay become high probability, "playing point = 2" in bonus) Provided with a MAX BET switch 6S operated at the same time, a start switch 7S operated at the start of the game, and stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R operated when the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped respectively. There is.

  When playing a game in the S unit 2S, first, similarly to the P unit, after securing the gaming points using the adjacent CU, the bet number is set using the gaming points. The game points are obtained by deducting the remaining amount of prepaid cards inserted in the CU, points, or stored medals (corresponding to the P balls) deposited in the game arcade. In order to use the gaming points, one bet switch 5S or the max bet switch 6S may be operated. In the present embodiment, for example, the gaming points are deducted by 1 by setting the number of bets to one, and the display of the gaming points on the display 510 is also decremented and updated. When the bet number is set, the pay line determined in accordance with the bet number and the game state becomes effective, and the operation of the start switch 7S becomes effective, that is, the game can be started.

  When the start switch 7S is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously fluctuate. In this state, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the transparent window.

  And one game is ended by stopping all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and a combination of symbols (hereinafter referred to as a winning combination) predetermined on activated pay lines is each reel 2L, 2C, When the game is stopped as the display result of 2R, a winning occurs, the gaming points determined according to the winning are given to the player, and the display of the gaming points on the display 510 is also added and updated.

  In the case of the S unit, it is possible to count the game points in the same manner as the P unit. As shown in FIG. 1, the S-table 2S is provided with a count button 28S for counting the gaming points and converting them into points. The ball lending button, the card return button, and the replay button are provided on the CU side (see FIG. 4). The player executes the counting operation based on the display 510 prompting the user to perform the counting operation at any timing or in the same manner as the P car. Then, while the gaming points are counted and the gaming points decrease, the manner in which the points increase is displayed on the display 510. The ball lending button may be provided not on the CU side but on the P side and the S side. In that case, the operation signal of the ball lending button may be directly input to CU3 or may be transmitted to CU3 as a status information response via P unit 2 or S unit (slot machine) 2S. You may

  The types of winning combinations are determined according to the game status, but can be roughly divided into special roles with a transition to the Big Bonus (BB) and Regular Bonus (RB), and small roles with the payout of medals. There is also a replay role (replay) that can start the next game without requiring the setting of the bet number.

  The main control unit (S (S) controls the S 2 S when a start operation is detected, for example, which of the plural types of winning combinations is to be won or none of the winning combinations is not won. (Corresponding to the main control unit 161). This determination is determined, for example, by drawing random numbers generated from a predetermined random number generator or generated on software.

  After that, the main control unit waits for the stop operation of the reel by the player, and draws the symbol corresponding to the winning combination in the predetermined frame number range on the basis of the stop operation, otherwise the other symbols Control to draw in, stop the three symbols, and determine the presence or absence of a prize. When the main control base determines that a prize is to be won, the main control base gives the player the gaming points corresponding to the type of the prize (adding the gaming points).

  The payout control unit of the S-table 2S is mounted on a payout control board (not shown). The payout control board is delivered from the frame maker to the hole in a state of being attached to the main body frame 2aS by the frame maker.

  On the other hand, the main control board (not shown) of the S-table 2S is delivered to the hole from the slot machine maker separately from the main body frame 2aS in a state of being attached to the board mounting board for connecting the wiring. The board mounting board is a board corresponding to the game board 26 shown in FIG. 3, and is provided with a connector similar to the convex drawer connector 32 provided on the game board 26.

  To connect the mounting mechanism for mounting the board mounting board and the convex drawer connector on the board mounting board side at a predetermined position (for example, below the reels 2L, 2C, 2R) in the main body frame 2aS of the S stand 2S Connector is provided. The attachment mechanism and the connector have the same structure as the attachment mechanisms 34a and 34b and the concave drawer connector 33 shown in FIG. 3, and are devised so that the substrate attachment board can be easily fixed to the attachment mechanism. Wiring extending from the concave drawer connector is connected to the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, various operation switches (buttons), and the like.

  In addition, S stand 2S has a configuration for detecting the opening of front door 2bS corresponding to front frame 5 of P stand 2 and detecting the connection between main body frame 2aS and the board mounting board, and looped power line 500 The main control board is also connected in series.

  A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game value by the S unit, and a variable display capable of variably displaying plural types of identification information that can be identified respectively It is a slot machine in which one game is ended by the display result being derived to the device, and a prize can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device, and the display result is displayed on the variable display device. Before being derived, predetermining means for determining whether or not to allow occurrence of a plurality of types of winnings, and control for causing the variable display device to derive a display result according to the determination result of the predetermining means A slot machine including a derivation control means to perform and a giving means for giving a game value when the winning is generated is configured.

  FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various data stored in each of the card unit and the slot machine and the transmission / reception mode thereof. The transmission / reception mode shown in FIG. 64 is obtained by replacing the term of FIG. 6 described as the configuration of P units with that for S units, and the mode is the same as that described using FIG. Here, further description is omitted.

<Modification and feature points>
Next, modifications and feature points of the present embodiment described above will be listed.

  (1) In the present embodiment, the addition serial number and the counting serial number are defined in the message format as separate data respectively, but they may be standardized as the request serial number. In particular, since addition of game balls and counting of game balls are reverse processes, it is difficult to think that both processes occur simultaneously, and from that point of view it is possible to reduce both telegram data amounts by sharing both serial numbers It is.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a new request occurs until the request serial number reaches a predetermined upper limit value, the serial number is updated based on the previously updated value. However, instead of such control, when all the processes corresponding to one request are completed, the request serial number may be initialized to a predetermined initial value. For example, in the case of the example of FIG. 14, it is conceivable to set the counting serial number included in the last status information response indicating the completion of counting to a predetermined initial value instead of m + 6.

  In addition, request serial numbers such as addition serial numbers and counting serial numbers, and normal serial numbers are not counted up one by one, but updated according to a predetermined rule stored by both P unit 2 and CU 3 (additional update, subtraction It may be updated or updated by another arithmetic expression. In this case, the serial numbers are not "continuous numbers" such as 1, 2, 3 but data updated with a concept such as A, B, C and so on.

  (2) When a slot machine (S units) which is an example of a game machine is applied to the above-mentioned game system, for example, the reels and various sensor portions attached to the reels and a main control board for controlling the reels Corresponds to the board, the other configuration corresponds to the front frame of P units. However, in the S-unit, the various detection switches 41a, 701, and 33, the emission control board 31, and the emission motor 18 of the front frame shown in FIG. 4 are unnecessary.

  The conventional S car is provided with a credit function, and when this is enabled, the credit is subtracted when the bet number is set, and the credit is added when a winning occurs. However, an upper limit is set for the credit, and when a prize occurs while the number of credits has reached the upper limit, medals are paid out from the hopper.

  On the other hand, in the S unit according to the present embodiment, when the bet number is set, the gaming points are subtracted, and when the winning occurs, the gaming points are added. Further, when the number of gaming points reaches a predetermined number, a display prompting a counting operation is made, and the gaming points are converted into points by performing the counting operation. For this reason, it is not necessary for the credit to reach the upper limit and the medals to be paid out as in the conventional S car. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a hopper in S stand concerning this embodiment.

  As a result, the game arcade does not need to secure a large number of medals, and the economic burden is reduced. In addition, the game arcade is freed from the task of replenishment and recovery of medals and the maintenance task for dealing with medal clogging and the like. The game player is relieved from the inconvenience of inserting medals for each betting operation after the credits are full, and it becomes easier to concentrate on the game.

  On the other hand, if the S is medalless, the player who has won a large number of medals will not be able to act to show off his arms by piling up boxes containing medals beside his seat. An inconvenience arises. However, in the present embodiment, since the function of displaying a dollar box is provided as described above, it is possible to prevent such a problem from occurring. In addition, as for the dollar box display in the case of S, it is desirable to replace a large number of balls with a large number of medals being loaded.

  When S machine is applied as a gaming machine, each data is as follows using two types of data of "points" and "gaming points" and two types of data of "credit" and "credit excess point". It is also possible to configure a gaming system to be converted. These four types of data are displayed on the S display 510 or the display 29S.

  First, when a prepaid card remaining amount, stored medal, or conversion operation from a point (a lending operation, a stored medal payout operation, a point payout operation) is detected, each is withdrawn and converted to a gaming point Ru.

  The game points are data corresponding to medals in the conventional slot machine. Therefore, for example, it is desirable to display the points of the gaming points on the display 510 or the display 29S and to display the medal images corresponding to the number of the gaming points. For example, when a simulated insertion medal operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) in which the player touches this medal image and inserts it into the slot machine is detected, the medal image disappears, and the game points are subtracted, Instead, one bet number is set. The bet number is set to 3 which is the maximum value by performing such a pseudo medal insertion operation three times.

  Thereafter, when the pseudo medal insertion operation is further detected, the credit is added according to the detection. An upper limit (for example, 50) is set for the credit, and when the credit exceeds the upper limit, a credit excess point is added.

  The bet number setting can be performed as described above using gaming points, and can also be performed using credits. That is, when the one-sheet BET switch 5S is operated, the bet number setting value is incremented by one and the credit is decremented by one. Further, if the MAX BET switch 6S is operated, the bet number is set to 3, and the credit is subtracted according to the bet number setting.

  As a result of the game, when a winning occurs, scores corresponding to the winning are added to the credits. When a prize winning that exceeds the upper limit of the credit occurs, the score for the over is stored as a credit excess point. This credit excess point corresponds to a medal to be paid out when a prize is generated exceeding the upper limit of the credit in the conventional slot machine. Therefore, for example, it is desirable to display the credit excess point on the display 510 or the display 29S, and to display medal images corresponding in number to the credit excess point. In addition, it is desirable to change the color of the medal image so that it can be distinguished from the medal image corresponding to the game points.

  In addition, it is desirable that a credit excess point be converted into a gaming point by the operation of the player. For example, when a simulated medal conversion operation (for example, an operation such as pushing a medal) in which the player touches the medal image corresponding to the credit excess point and converts it to the gaming point is detected, the medal image disappears and the credit excess is exceeded. It is assumed that points are subtracted and gaming points are added.

  Alternatively, if the credit falls below the upper limit, the credit excess point may be automatically converted to the credit.

  When the player executes the counting operation, each of the gaming points, credits, and over-credit points are counted and converted into points. As a result, the player's points are listed as “card number of balls holdings + play points + credits + credit excess points”. Note that "the number of balls possessing a card" is a point before conversion (the number of balls possessed by the player at this moment) which has not been converted into gaming points.

  In the above description, the four types of data of points, gaming points, credits, and excess credit points may be stored in both by exchanging data between CU and S, or points may be It may be stored only at the CU side, and at the S side only for others. Also, the excess credit point may be displayed as a dollar box display.

  Also, in the above description, the example using credit excess points has been described, but it is not necessary to use credit excess points. In this case, when the credit upper limit is exceeded, the game points may be added.

  (3) In the present embodiment, gaming points are added by consuming card frequency. Alternatively, the game points are added by consuming the balls (stored medals). In other words, the card frequency or storage balls are converted into gaming points. On the other hand, the card frequency and the storage balls are not converted into points (count balls, count medals). However, the card frequency and the balls may be converted into points once.

  (4) In the present embodiment, the gaming points are converted to points by the counting operation. The conversion rate in this case is 1: 1. However, the conversion rate in the case of conversion may be other than 1: 1. For example, when 100 game points are converted, 97 points obtained by subtracting 3 points may be converted into points. Alternatively, it may be converted into a number of game balls obtained by multiplying a predetermined percentage of the score by less than 100%.

  (5) The recording medium for recording points in an identifiable manner may be a portable terminal such as a smartphone. In this case, the CU is provided with a communication unit for communicating with the portable terminal, and by holding the portable terminal over the communication unit, the CU recognizes the ID stored in the portable terminal, and thereafter, this embodiment will be described. Enables the game in the procedure as described. On the other hand, when the game is over, by holding the mobile terminal over the communication unit again, the points at the end of the game are added to the points of the player through the ID.

  (6) The operation means for counting the gaming points may be provided on the CU side. The operation means in that case may be displayed on the touch panel or may be configured by a physical switch.

  (7) In the present embodiment, when a card return operation is performed and there are uncounted gaming points remaining, a message prompting counting is displayed on the P or CU display. However, instead of such a configuration, when an uncounted gaming point remains when a card return operation is performed, the counting display is automatically started and the display on the P unit or CU side, In addition to the fact that uncounted gaming points remain, it may be notified that the card is returned after the completion of the automatic counting.

  Alternatively, when an uncounted gaming point remains when the card return operation is performed, it is determined that the player may temporarily leave the seat, and the indicator (the CU side or the P base side) is A message may be displayed confirming whether it is a temporary absence. Furthermore, the display may be configured by a touch panel, and the player may be able to make an input in response to the message. Furthermore, if the response input is the end of the game, a message prompting the counting operation is displayed. On the other hand, if the response input is temporarily leaving the seat, the card may be ejected once while the ID of the card is stored on the CU side or the P side or both sides. Thereafter, when a card of the same ID is inserted, the game is resumed from the original state.

  (8) During the big hit, you may raise the judgment reference value for judging that the number of game balls is full. That is, the judgment reference value of the full tank judgment may be made different between the big hit and the time when it is not so. This makes it possible to prevent the number of game balls from rapidly increasing during a big hit and making a full tank determination immediately and stopping the firing.

  (9) The number of gaming balls when a big hit occurs is stored, and during the big hit, even if it exceeds the judgment threshold value of full tank, the number of playing balls increased after the big hit is acceptable If it is within the value (for example, 1000 balls), it may be determined not to be full.

  (10) As the counting operation means for counting the game balls, one that exhibits a counting function when operated a predetermined number of times more than twice may be adopted. This can prevent an erroneous operation. Further, in this case, in the one-time operation, another function different from the counting function may be exhibited. For example, if there is no operation for a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second) after one operation, the function to light the lamp for calling the store clerk is exhibited, and within 2 seconds from 1 operation It is also conceivable to exert a counting function when the second operation is detected.

  (11) The "predetermined processing" of the "recording medium processing means for processing so as to enable predetermined processing with the gaming points as the points when the predetermined recording medium processing operation is detected" is, for example, Processing of CU when used by inserting a card ejected from a CU into another CU connected to another game machine (processing of deducting and converting a ball that is recorded in a card identifiable manner into a game ball) And ball sharing processing, or wagon service processing etc.). Alternatively, the "predetermined process" may be a process for accepting a card by a prize exchange for prize exchange and consuming points specified by the card to enable prize exchange.

  Further, the above-mentioned “recording medium processing operation for processing so as to enable predetermined processing as points” is, for example, a card return operation. Further, the “predetermined process” is a process of specifying the mark on the card inserted in the CU so as to be identifiable, when the card return operation is detected, and returning the card. Here, “identifiable recording” means recording the points directly on the card, and without recording the points on the card, to the server connected to the CU with the card ID and the points connected. It includes a method of transmitting and associating and storing an ID and a point in the server.

  (12) If the counting operation is performed during the firing of the ball, the counting operation may be invalidated if the number of gaming balls at that time is equal to or less than the reference value. In addition, even if the number of gaming balls when the counting operation is detected during firing of the balls exceeds the reference value, the number of balls counted in one counting operation is determined to be a predetermined number. If the value obtained by subtracting the predetermined number from the number of gaming balls when the counting operation is detected does not reach the reference value, the counting operation may be invalidated.

  In addition, it may be judged whether or not the firing operation of the ball is detected whether or not the game is in progress, and the number of balls in the game (floating balls floating in the game area 27) becomes 0. It may be determined whether there is (not in play) or not (in play). Furthermore, it is also possible to determine whether or not the game is in progress based on whether or not the variable display device is in motion, whether or not the jackpot is in progress, whether the attacker is open, or the like.

  Furthermore, "in the game" in the case of invalidating the counting operation in the game by applying S units as a gaming machine is, for example, a period from when the reels 2L, 2C, 2R start rotating until they stop. . Alternatively, it is a period from when the start operation is detected to when the reels 2L, 2C, 2R stop.

  (13) Referring to FIG. 14, although the P-unit has the counting ball number counter that temporarily stores the counted counting balls (balls having balls), it does not have the counter that stores the accumulated value of the counting balls. . However, a counter ball cumulative storage counter may be provided on the P side for storing the cumulative value of the counter ball. In addition, the CU side is provided with an area for storing card balls (count balls). If balls are recorded in the inserted card itself in this area, the card is held. The current number of balls held by the player, including the balls, is stored. For this reason, the number of counting balls counted by the player in the current game can not be specified only in this area. Therefore, an area for storing the number of counting balls counted by the player in the current game may be further provided on the CU side. In this case, the CU adds balls to the area based on the information on the number of balls sent from the P unit after the game starts, and when the balls are converted to game balls, the CU Subtract balls.

  (14) The display for prompting the counting operation in FIG. 17 may be a sentence "Please count because there are game balls remaining" in a sentence, or the counting button 28 is displayed on the screen and blinks. It may be a display that In addition, P base 2 which received card return preparation state ON may make the game ball of game ball number indicator 29 blink and indicate, or when game ball number indicator 29 is formed with the picture display device Alternatively, the message described in the above embodiment may be displayed on the game ball number display 29 to prompt the counting operation.

  (15) In order to make the number of gaming points to be converted into points different in one operation different in accordance with the time for which the count button is kept pressed, for example, in the case of long press (for example, continuous operation for 1 second or more) While all are counted, only 200 balls may be counted in the case of a short push (e.g., a continuous operation of less than 1 second). However, in this case, when the number of remaining game balls is small, for example, less than 200 balls, it is desirable that all the game balls be counted by the operation of the count button.

  (16) If, according to the remaining number of gaming points, the number of points counted in one short press operation of the counting button is made different, for example, the following may be considered. For example, when the number of gaming points is less than 200, all the gaming points are counted in one short press operation of the count button. When the number of gaming points is 200 or more and less than 1000, 200 points are counted by one short press operation. When the number of game points is 1000 or more and less than 5000, 1000 points are counted by one short press operation. When the number of playing points is 5,000 or more and less than 10,000, 2,000 points are counted by one short press operation. When the number of game points is 10000 or more, 2500 points are counted by one short press operation. The above numerical values are specific examples and can be set as appropriate.

  (17) When the game balls (game points) are counted and point conversion is performed, control may be performed to output not only counting display but also counting sound from the speaker 270. In addition, when counting the gaming points, it is conceivable to perform an image display in which the balls fall one by one from the ball storage plate to the counter.

  (18) A conversion display for converting gaming points into points based on the counting operation (a display showing counting of game balls and showing an increase in the number of balls) and subtraction of the game points on data The timing of performing the operation of adding points can be various. The above operation may be performed after the conversion display is completed. Also, for that purpose, the counting data may be transmitted from the gaming machine to the CU after the conversion display is finished. In addition, such a modification is applicable similarly, also when converting a point into a gaming point.

  (19) In the present embodiment, in the communication between the CU and the gaming machine, a command-response system in which the CU is a primary station and the gaming machine is a secondary station is adopted. However, the primary station and the secondary station The relationship with may be reversed. Alternatively, instead of adopting a communication scheme having such a master-slave relationship, a scheme may be adopted in which both transmit data to the other when a request to communicate occurs.

  (20) In the present embodiment, the game ball (game point) is stored on both the gaming machine side and the CU side, but the game ball (game point) is stored only on the game machine side, and the CU side is stored. In this case, it may not be stored. On the other hand, the card holding balls (point holding points) are stored only on the CU side, but may be stored also on the gaming machine side. In particular, the game ball (game point) is stored only on the game machine side, while the card holding ball (point held) is stored only on the CU side to clarify the division of data storage management. Good.

  (21) The counting display and various notification performed by the display 54 may be similarly performed by the display 312.

  (22) In CU3, the number of stored game balls is updated based on the value of the addition ball number counter (number of addition balls) and the value of the subtraction ball number counter (number of subtraction balls) transmitted from the P-base side If the value of the number of gaming balls becomes negative when the number of gaming balls stored is subtracted based on the value of the counting ball number counter transmitted from the P-base side, an error (abnormality) determination is made Error processing may be performed. As a specific example of error processing, error notification is performed by an error notification lamp or the like, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or the hall server 801 (in this case, for halls) An error notification may be made by the management computer or the hall server 801).

  (23) If a loan operation or a conversion operation (rental operation) from a point (ball) to a game point (game ball) is detected, the game points may be incremented one by one, In order to shorten the waiting time of the player, a plurality of points (for example, 25 points equivalent to 100 yen) may be displayed to be counted up. In addition, conversely, even when the counting operation of the gaming points is executed, the points may be displayed so as to count up a plurality of points. Furthermore, the number of units when counting up and displaying the gaming points or points may be set from among a plurality of types. At the time of setting, it is conceivable to use a touch panel of P or S displays.

  (24) A touch sensor may be provided on the hitting operation handle, and the counting operation may be invalidated while it is detected by the touch sensor that the player is holding the hitting operation handle. Invalidation of the counting operation means both detecting the counting operation but not performing the counting operation based on the detection output, or not detecting the counting operation itself. Alternatively, even if the player does not invalidate the counting operation just by touching the hitting operation handle, and turns the hitting operation handle to such an extent that the ball firing drive pulse is output, even if the counting operation is invalidated. Good.

  In these cases, when the counting operation is detected, a message of "Please release the handle" may be displayed on the display of the gaming machine or CU. Alternatively, when the counting operation button is displayed as an icon on the screen of the touch panel, the counting operation button may be grayed out to notify the player that the operation is impossible.

  (25) At least one or all of the ball lending button, the card return button, the replay button, and the counting button may be provided on the game machine side or on the CU side. Further, it is conceivable that the button is displayed on the display on the gaming machine side or CU side described as the touch panel type display.

  (26) A gaming system according to the present embodiment includes point use operating means for executing predetermined point use processing using points. Here, the predetermined point use process includes a process for executing a wagon service or a process of dividing and sharing points (balls having balls) (a process of dividing and transferring points to others). It is a concept. The point use operating means is, for example, a touch panel. Alternatively, the point use operation means may be a remote control provided to a game clerk in order to instruct the CU or the game machine to execute a point use process.

  (27) The sequence control shown in FIG. 8 to FIG. 31 is not limited to the transmission / reception sequence between the control devices in the gaming machine single unit such as CU3, P stand 2 and S stand 2S. The present invention may be applied to a transmission / reception sequence between a plurality of gaming devices such as a stand 2, a jet counter, a POS terminal, etc. The control of the request sequence number shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 is applied between the CU control unit 323 inside the CU 3 and the security chip (SC) 325 b, and between the security chip (SC) 325 b and the communication control IC 325 a. You may

  For example, when the processing related to the game ball addition request is applied between the CU control unit 323 and the security chip (SC) 325b, the CU control unit 323 transmits the game ball addition request message, and consent to this is sent Alternatively, the SC 325 b returns a rejection message via the communication control IC 325 a based on the response from the P-unit 2 side.

  When the processing related to the game ball addition request is applied between the security chip (SC) 325 b and the communication control IC 325 a, the security chip (SC) 325 b transmits the game ball addition request message via the CU control unit 323 Then, the communication control IC 325a sends back an acceptance or rejection telegram in response to the response on the side of the P base 2.

  When processing concerning the counting request is applied between the CU control unit 323 and the security chip (SC) 325b, the counting request message is sent to the CU control unit via the communication control IC 325a based on the request of the P unit 2 side. The CU control unit 323 sends the acceptance / rejection message to the H.323 in response to the transmission.

  When the processing relating to the counting request is applied between the security chip (SC) 325b and the communication control IC 325a, the communication control IC 325a transmits the counting request message based on the request of the P-unit 2 side, The security chip (SC) 325 b sends back a rejection message based on the instruction of the CU control unit 323.

  (28) In the above embodiment, the identification of the player's identity is performed by the card ID, but instead or in addition to that, the player's identity is determined by the player's fingerprint or the biomass such as retina The determination may be made.

  (29) In the above embodiment, the CU stores the score transmitted from the gaming machine on the condition that the card ID and the insertion time coincide with each other as the score at the present time. The CU is controlled to store the score transmitted from the gaming machine as the score at the present time, with the communication started as a further condition after the communication is interrupted and until the predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) elapses. May be Specifically, CU control section 323 is provided with a timer for counting a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) after the communication between the gaming machine and CU3 is interrupted, and at the start of communication between the gaming machine and CU3 (at restoration). It is determined whether or not the timer is still counting (the time is not up), and it is determined that the counting is in progress as a further condition, and the CU transmitted the score sent from the gaming machine at the current time. Control to memorize as a score.

  In addition, instead of the insertion time, the CU may store the score transmitted from the gaming machine as a score at the current time on the condition of matching of the final serial number etc. used between CU3 and P platform 2 .

  (30) In the above-mentioned embodiment, although what directly added the number of game balls and the game points was shown by generation of a prize, instead, points are added by generation of a prize, and the added points are added May be controlled to add the number of game balls and the game points.

  (31) In the above-described embodiment, in the case where the value is withdrawn within the range of the valuable value (prepaid balance, balls, balls) of the player's possession and the game points corresponding to the withdrawal are added, the withdrawn value Although what showed the addition of the game points of the same value as, instead, for example, it may be controlled to add the game points equivalent to the consumption tax equivalent amount to the actually withdrawn value.

  (32) In the present embodiment, the key management server is installed at the key management center remote from the game arcade. However, the key management server may be installed in the game arcade. This makes it easier to speed up the communication between the CU and the key management server as compared with the case where the key management server is installed outside the game arcade, and can reduce the incidence rate of communication failure.

  (33) The CU control unit 323 receives substrate security information (including a substrate authentication key and update information) from the key management server 800 via the hole server 801. However, instead of this, substrate security information may be transmitted from the key management server 800 to the CU control unit 323 without interposing the hall server 801 between the key management server 800 and the CU control unit 323. For example, it is conceivable to directly connect the key management server 800 and the CU with a line, or to provide a relay communication device different from the hall server 801 between the key management server 800 and each CU.

  (34) In the above embodiment, the number of counting balls automatically counted based on the game interruption operation (simple leaving operation or meal break operation) is temporarily added to the balls and written to the card and discharged. In this case, the interruption process is performed, and then the player who interrupted the game comes back, inserts the card into the original CU 3 again, and converts the balls into the game balls, thereby making the balls into 125 game balls It showed what was converted and it became possible to play games. However, instead of this, CU3 stores the counting ball automatically counted at the time of the interruption operation as a deposit ball (C-ID and insertion time are also stored) different from the game ball and the ball, and the ball is not added. Discontinue processing by discharging the card without recording the ball. When the ejection card is reinserted, all of the deposit balls may be automatically converted into P game balls at once and controlled so as to be playable. Alternatively, the deposit ball in this case is transmitted from the P unit to the CU based on the interruption operation and stored on the CU side or the hall server side, and automatically from the CU or the hall server when the card is reinserted. The information on the deposit ball may be transmitted to the P platform side and stored as the game ball on the P platform side. Further, in this case, when transmitting the information of the deposit ball, it may be transmitted from the CU to the P unit as the addition instruction of the game ball.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, when the number of counting balls automatically counted based on the interruption operation is temporarily added to the balls, written to the card and ejected, the interruption flag is recorded on the card. By making the card, you can not exchange prizes with that card. As the method of prohibiting the prize exchange in this manner, it is conceivable to adopt the following method other than using the flag during the interruption of the card.

  First, when an interruption operation is performed, the CU transmits the information (including the card ID) to the hall server, and the hall server side stores the interrupted card of the player as the interruption card. At the time of prize exchange, the POS or the like inquires of the hall server, and the hall server determines whether or not the card used for the exchange of prizes is an interruption card. Alternatively, all interruption card information may be transmitted in advance from the hall server to the POS side. In addition, if the card used for the prize exchange is an interruption card, the prize exchange using the card is prohibited.

  (35) In the above-mentioned embodiment, the gaming machine is determined that “the game device (CU) is determined with the gaming points as the points, on condition that the conversion process for all the gaming points is completed (gaming points = 0) Processing of receiving a card with a prize exchange and consuming points specified in the card to enable exchange of prizes, inserting a card ejected from a CU into another CU connected to another game machine Including a recording medium processing operation (card return operation (operation of card return button 322)) for performing processing of the CU in the case of use.

  (36) In the present embodiment, as an example of the game information, ball balls, game balls, remaining amount of cards, balls, and others, ball number information and game stand information have been described. However, the gaming information also includes other information related to gaming on the gaming machine. For example, when the player's favorite character selected or customized by the player can be displayed on the variable display means (variable display device) such as the variable display device 278 or the display 54, information capable of specifying the character Is also included in the game information. Such information of the screen design including the character matching the player's preference is transmitted to the server at the end of the game and stored, for example, in association with the card ID of the player, and when the game is newly started, It may be downloaded from the server to the CU or P.

  (37) In the game ball number display 29, a display in which the number of balls is decreased by one is interlocked with the firing or counting operation of the balls. Further, in the game ball number display 29, a display is performed in which the number of balls is increased one by one or each predetermined number of units in accordance with the ball lending operation or the like. When the game ball number display 29 is configured by an image display such as a liquid crystal display device, it is not simply to digitally display the number of game balls, but whether the change in the number of game balls is due to ballistic balls, or by counting Whether it is something that is due to the occurrence of a prize, whether it is due to withdrawal of a ball, or it is due to lending operation, etc., an image according to the type is displayed together with the display update of the number of game balls You may do it.

  In addition, when the counting operation is performed, although the counting display linked to the counting operation is performed in the gaming ball number display 29, when the gaming ball number display 29 is configured by an image display such as a liquid crystal display device. In the same manner as the display 54, the game balls may be counted and the number thereof may be reduced while the image display in which the balls are increased may be performed. In this case, as described above as a modification of the display of the display 54, a display (for example, a display of a bar graph) in which data on the number of gaming balls is converted over time to data on the number of balls held Display the number of game balls and the number of balls digitally as it is, increase the number of balls while decreasing the number of game balls, or repeat the display of moving part of the number of game balls to the number of balls It is conceivable.

  (38) As shown in FIG. 17, in the above embodiment, the card return operation detected with the game ball remaining is counted by detecting the counting operation in a predetermined standby period. It is activated after completion and shifts to card return processing.

  On the other hand, as a process in the case where the counting operation is not detected even after the waiting period has elapsed, for example, it is conceivable to invalidate the previous card return operation. In this case, since the counting operation is not detected even if the standby period has elapsed, the display on the CU 3 or P base 2 side may display that the card return operation has been invalidated.

  Alternatively, the card return operation detected in the state where game balls remain may be invalidated regardless of whether the counting operation is detected in a predetermined standby period. In this case, after all the game balls have been counted according to the counting operation after the card returning operation is detected, the card returning process may be executed by executing the card returning operation again. Alternatively, when counting of all the game balls is completed, or before or after that, a display may be displayed on the CU 3 or P platform 2 side display to prompt the card return operation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when at least one game ball remains when the card return operation is detected, the processing shown in FIG. 17 is executed. However, the process shown in FIG. 17 may be executed when the number of game balls remaining when the card return operation is detected is a predetermined number of two or more.

  In addition, in the counting operation after the card return operation is detected, the counting display speed of the game ball may be made faster than that at the normal time. For example, in the normal counting operation, the game balls are displayed one by one, while in the counting operation after the card return operation is detected, a display in which the game balls are collectively counted in plurals, or all games It is conceivable to display a display in which the balls are counted at once.

  Furthermore, in the counting operation after the card return operation is detected, not all the game balls are counted, but a predetermined number of gaming balls larger than those in the normal counting operation are counted. It may be For example, a maximum of 100 game balls are counted in one counting operation in a normal counting operation, but a larger number of 200 game balls are counted in the counting operation after the card return operation is detected. It may be done. Even in this case, when there is a card return operation in advance, the number of counting operations for counting all the game balls is reduced as compared with the case where there is no card return operation, and all the game balls are completed earlier Can.

  In addition, when a card return operation is detected in a state in which game balls are left, counting of all the game balls is started even if there is no detection of the counting operation, and then processing is shifted to card return processing. It is also good. In this case, when the counting of all the game balls is started, the fact that the counting of all the game balls is started may be displayed by P platform 2 or CU3. Alternatively, a message for confirming whether or not counting of all the game balls may be started is displayed, and a predetermined operation (for example, an operation on the touch panel of P platform 2 or CU3, a card return operation again, etc.) is detected. The counting of all the game balls may be started on the condition of the game.

  In addition, it is possible to invalidate the card return operation which is detected in the game (during the ball firing), but it is not to invalidate the card return operation, but to count operation in the game on P side The processing of counting based on may be invalidated.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, CU3 determines whether or not the number of game balls is 0 when a card return operation is detected. However, the P base 2 may make such a determination. In this case, for example, when a card return operation is detected, data indicating that the card return operation is present is transmitted from CU3 to P platform 2, and the number of game balls stored by P platform 2 that received it is 0 It is determined whether the If it is 0, it transmits to the CU 3 that the number of gaming balls is 0 or permits the card return, but if it is not 0, the number of gaming balls is not 0 or it waits for the card return or prohibits the card return. Send the data shown to CU3.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the operation of the counting button is detected, the P-base 2 determines whether the card return operation is detected before the detection of the operation. However, such determination means may be provided to the CU 3. In this case, for example, when the operation of the counting button is detected, the P-table 2 transmits data indicating that to the CU 3. It is conceivable that the CU 3 that has received it determines whether or not a card return operation has been performed within a predetermined period before receiving the data.

  Further, in the above embodiment, while the P platform 2 detects the counting operation, the CU 3 detects the card return operation, the CU 3 detects the counting operation while the P platform 2 detects the card return operation. It is good also as composition which P stand 2 or CU3 detects as both operations. Further, the attachment positions of the counting button and the card card return button may be both CU3 and P 2, and one may be CU 3 or P 2.

  (39) Check the presence or absence of change in the number of balls or game balls with CU or P. If the number of balls or game balls does not change for a predetermined period, notify that effect with CU or P. You may do so. Alternatively, a signal for notification may be output to an external device (hall computer, call lamp on P). This makes it easy for the clerk to grasp the game abandoned platform with, for example, a few remaining balls left.

  (40) Alternatively, if the game ball of the player has changed although the card is not inserted in the CU, the CU or P may notify that effect. Alternatively, a signal for notification may be output to an external device (hall computer, call lamp on P). Thus, for example, after the game is finished and the card is discharged, the clerk can easily grasp a stand where the ball caught on the game board gets a prize and the game ball is left being paid out.

  (41) In the present embodiment, the CU 3 compares the previous game table information from the P platform 2 and the latest game table information with the data stored by itself, and determines that there is no illegal water in the data on the P platform 2 side. Make sure to correct the data. Assuming that an error is determined on the CU 3 side, such a situation is merely a factor of the exchange of CU 3 (the CU 3 after exchange does not store the legitimate data to be compared), and is based on the fraudulent act. Because there is a possibility that it is not a thing, the clerk of the hall confirms the error and cancels the error in the portable terminal device such as the remote control. However, as described above, when the CU 3 is replaced with a new one, the CU 3 may not perform the above-described error determination at all. Alternatively, the above-mentioned error determination function may not be provided to the CU 3 regardless of whether it has been replaced or not.

  (42) In the present embodiment, a card, which is a recording medium capable of specifying a player-owned value, is inserted into the card insertion / ejection slot 309 at the start of the game, and removed from the card insertion / ejection slot 309 after the game is over. The configuration has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the card may be placed on the card reading unit at the beginning of the game and removed from the card reading unit after the game is over. That is, the recording medium reception means for receiving the recording medium capable of specifying the valuable value owned by the player may be attached to the recording medium reception means at the start of the game and removed from the recording medium reception means after the game is over.

  (43) In the present embodiment, the CU 3 notifies the P platform 2 of information waiting for card removal, and the P platform 2 receiving the notification of the information indicates that “Please remove card” and the variable display device 278 Has been described, for example, the notification of card removal is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CU 3 displays “Please remove card” on the display 54 and / or the indicator 312 while notifying the P platform 2 of information waiting for card removal. In this case, the CU side may be controlled to be notified of card removal.

  (44) In the present embodiment, after receiving the command of the status information request including waiting for card removal = ON, base P 2 continues receiving the command for the status information request including waiting for card removal = OFF. The configuration for continuing the notification of removal has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the P platform 2 is waiting for card removal even when the removal of the card is notified for a certain period of time after receiving the command of the status information request including waiting for card removal = ON. After receiving the command of the status information request including ON, the notification of card removal may be performed intermittently from when the command of the status information request including waiting for card removal = OFF is received.

  (45) In the present embodiment, in the counting history sequence, the P base 2 receives the “store code” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3 when the card is received, and the “store code held in the P base 2 In the case where they coincide, recovery processing of the counting history is performed, and in the case of non-coincidence, the recovery processing of the counting history is not performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the counting history sequence, P platform 2 receives “store code” and “SC substrate ID” notified from security substrate 325 of CU 3 when the card is received, and P platform 2 It may be configured to perform matching determination with the held "store code" and "SC substrate ID". Furthermore, without performing the match determination of the “store code” in the counting history sequence, the “store code” and the “store code” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3 when the P base 2 receives the card when the recovery request is received. At least one of “SC substrate ID” and at least one of “store code” and “SC substrate ID” held in P platform 2 are determined to match, and if they match, recovery processing is performed. In the case of non-coincidence, the continuation of the game may be prohibited.

  (46) Also, an IC tag may be attached to the pachinko ball. This makes it possible to specify which pachinko ball is a ball at the time of launch and at the time of passing through any winning area (winning opening or gate). For this reason, in the tabulation process, it is possible to specify the correspondence between the emission intensity T of the same pachinko ball specified by the IC tag and the passage area. As a result, it is possible to more accurately grasp which region the pachinko ball tends to pass depending on the firing intensity. Furthermore, by associating a ball unit price (see FIG. 8) transmitted from CU3 with a pachinko ball with an IC tag, it becomes possible to change the ball unit price for each ball, and the number of remaining balls and scheduled time Accordingly, it is possible to change the ball unit price according to circumstances and expand the degree of freedom of the player's game.

  (47) When the ball hitting operation handle 25 is fixed by the player, the above-mentioned correction processing of the emission intensity can not be performed. Therefore, the fact that the hitting operation handle 25 is fixed may be detected and notified. In addition, when the firing strength is stable at a constant value, it may be determined that the bat operating handle 25 is fixed.

  (48) For example, it can be detected by a touch sensor whether or not the player is touching the bat operating handle 25.

  Therefore, for example, when it is detected that the player does not touch the hitting operation handle 25, the above-mentioned correction processing of the emission intensity may be performed.

  Further, in the firing abnormality determination processing, when it is detected that the player does not touch the bat operating handle 25 and it is detected that the bat operating handle 25 is fixed, it is determined that the firing abnormality is present. You may

  (49) In the present embodiment, the hall computer 900 is configured to acquire the information of P platform 2 via CU3, but the hall computer 900 directly transmits the information of P platform 2 from P platform 2 without passing through CU3. It may be a configuration to acquire.

  (50) In the present embodiment, when the card insertion notification command is received while the state of CU3 is the card insertion state, the configuration is such that only the response is transmitted without backing up information such as the card ID and card insertion time. Explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the card insertion notification command is received while the state of the CU 3 is in the card insertion state, a warning is displayed on the display 54 or the like to perform notification or the upper server The notification of may be performed.

  (51) In the present embodiment, when the game is set to “Close store”, no card is inserted, and for a gaming machine in which game balls remain in P platform 2, card ID = 0, card insertion time = 0 The configuration has been described in which it is assumed that the virtual card has been inserted, and the remaining game balls are counted, stored in the card, and returned. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the card ID of the virtual card considered to be inserted is counted as the card ID of the card inserted immediately before closing the store, and the remaining game balls are inserted immediately before closing the store It may be configured to be automatically associated with the card that was used.

  (52) In the present embodiment, when the recovery request 2 command is transmitted to the P-unit 2 even though the CU 3 determines that the recovery request is unnecessary, the P-unit 2 again determines the recovery processing. The configuration has been described in which the process NG is notified to the CU 3 when the execution is unnecessary. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and judgment of the recovery processing is performed again by the P-unit 2 and when it is not necessary, a warning is displayed on the display 54 or the like to perform notification, or notification to that effect to the upper server You may do it.

  (53) In the present embodiment, if the state where the key management server 800 does not reach the CU control unit 323 even if it transmits the command of the health check request continues for 10 days, for example, it is determined that the health check request time limit is over. The configuration in which the timed operation function of CU3 or P2 is invalidated has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to display the number of days until the timed operation function of CU3 or P platform 2 is invalidated on the display 54, or stepwise the timed operation function having multiple restriction levels. You may make it invalid.

  (54) In the present embodiment, the control of the setting and cancellation of the alarm setting has been described in relation to the alarm setting based on the unauthorized operation to the P base 2 and the alarm setting based on the P base line disconnection. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to control of setting and cancellation of alarm setting in relation to alarm setting based on fraud on P base 2 and alarm setting on another fraud based on P base 2. The present invention may be applied to control of setting and cancellation of alarm settings in three or more relationships among alarm settings based on multiple frauds on P base 2 and alarm settings based on P base line disconnection.

  (55) In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the security related information is stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171a has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be stored in a register (for example, data reception register 723b) in the communication control circuit 171b. As a result, the security related information is stored as encrypted in the communication control circuit 171b, and the security is further improved.

  (56) In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60 and FIG. 61, the P unit 2 itself determines that it is a P unit 2 previously connected to the game board development jig 3E or the development CU 3D, The configuration in which the flag indicating the determination result is transmitted to the commercial CU 3 and detected by the SC 325 b has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is determined by the P itself that it is the P base 2 that has been connected to the game board development jig 3E or the development CU 3D in the past, and detected and reported by the P itself. Also, the configuration may be such that the SC 325b of CU3 determines and detects that it is the P base 2 that has been connected to the game board development jig 3E or the development CU 3D in the past based on the identification ID.

  It should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all the modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

2 pachinko gaming machine, 2S slot machine, 3 card units, 16 main control boards, 17 payout control boards, 26 gaming boards, 54, 312 indicators, 309 card insertion / ejection slot, 319 replay button, 320 IR light receiving units, 321 loan button, 322 return button, 161 main control unit, 325 display control unit, 171 payout control unit, 323
CU control unit.

Claims (1)

A gaming apparatus connected to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game and enabling gaming on the gaming machine using a gaming value owned by the player corresponding to the received recording medium,
An information transmitting unit for transmitting predetermined information;
The information transmitting means transmits the predetermined information which is not notified to the user program executed by the arithmetic processing means of the gaming machine but stored in the storage area of the arithmetic processing means to the gaming machine. Equipment.